Movitrac B Series

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services
MOVITRAC® B
Edition 02/2008
16601211 / EN
System Manual
Color Code System
Color code system for catalogs

and system manuals
Our catalogs and system manuals are identified by a color code system at the back to
make it easier to work with these publications. The short designation of the publication is
indicated as well. In this way you can immediately recognize the publication even if it is
standing on a shelf together with other publications. The following overview shows an
exemplary assignment of colors to product groups and products.
Mechanics
DR-GM GSE1 GSE2 GK
2008 2008 2008 2008
DR gearmotors Synchronous Asynchronous Gear units

servo gearmotors servo gearmotors
Electromechanics
MOT1 MOT2
2008 2008
DR series AC motors DT/DV/CT/CV series

AC motors
Explosion-proof drives
EXG EXS EXM
2008 2008 2008
Explosion-proof Explosion-proof Explosion-proof motors

gearmotors servo gearmotors
Control cabinet inverters, control technology and HMI

MDX MC MX PLC HMI
2008 2008 2008 2008 2008
MOVIDRIVE® MOVITRAC® MOVIAXIS® MOVI-PLC® DOP11B®
Decentralized technology
MM DI MG
2008 2007 2008
MOVIMOT® Decentralized MOVIGEAR®

gearmotors installation
Industrial gear units

IGX1 IGX2
2008 2008
X series horizontal X series vertical

industrial gear units industrial gear units
Contents
Contents
1 Important Notes................................................................................................... 6
1.1 Structure of the safety notes ....................................................................... 6
1.2 Rights to claim under warranty ................................................................... 6
1.3 Exclusion of liability..................................................................................... 6
2 Safety Notes ........................................................................................................ 7
2.1 General information .................................................................................... 7
2.2 Target group ............................................................................................... 7
2.3 Designated use ........................................................................................... 7
2.4 Transportation, storage............................................................................... 8
2.5 Installation................................................................................................... 8
2.6 Electrical connection ................................................................................... 9
2.7 Safe disconnection...................................................................................... 9
2.8 Operation .................................................................................................... 9
3 System Description MOVITRAC® B................................................................. 10
3.1 MOVITRAC® B – compact, versatile and universal .................................. 10
3.2 System overview MOVITRAC® B ............................................................. 11
3.3 The units at a glance................................................................................. 12
3.4 Functions / features .................................................................................. 13
3.5 MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio..................................................................... 16
4 Technical Data ................................................................................................... 17
4.1 CE marking, UL approval and C-Tick ....................................................... 17
4.2 General technical data .............................................................................. 18
4.3 MOVITRAC® B electronics data ............................................................... 20
4.4 Technical data of MOVITRAC® B ............................................................. 22
4.5 Front option FBG11B keypad ................................................................... 41
4.6 FSC11B communication module ............................................................. 42
4.7 FIO11B analog module ............................................................................. 43
4.8 DBG60B keypad ....................................................................................... 44
4.9 Parameter module UBP11A...................................................................... 47
4.10 MBG11A setpoint control module ............................................................. 48
4.11 UWS11A interface adapter RS-232 / RS-485 for mounting rail ................ 49
4.12 UWS21B interface adapter RS-232/RS-485 ............................................. 50
4.13 USB11A interface adapter USB/RS-485................................................... 50
4.14 BW series braking resistors ...................................................................... 51
4.15 Touch guard BS ........................................................................................ 58
4.16 Mounting PTC braking resistors FKB10B ................................................. 58
4.17 Submounting FKB11/12/13B flat-design resistors .................................... 59
4.18 Support rail mounting FHS11B/12B/13B .................................................. 60
4.19 Line chokes ND ........................................................................................ 61
4.20 NF line filter............................................................................................... 63
4.21 ULF11A folding ferrites ............................................................................. 65
4.22 HD series output chokes........................................................................... 65
4.23 EMC-module FKE12B/13B ....................................................................... 68
4.24 HF output filter .......................................................................................... 69
4.25 Fieldbus connection .................................................................................. 73
4.26 MOVI-PLC®............................................................................................... 83
4.27 UWU52A switched-mode power supply.................................................... 85
System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 3

Contents
5 Parameters......................................................................................................... 86
5.1 Explanation of the parameters .................................................................. 86
6 Project Planning.............................................................................................. 112
6.1 Schematic procedure .............................................................................. 112
6.2 Options for standard applications ........................................................... 113
6.3 Description of applications ...................................................................... 114
6.4 Speed-torque characteristic curve .......................................................... 115
6.5 Motor selection........................................................................................ 116
6.6 Overload capacity ................................................................................... 118
6.7 Load capacity of the units at low output frequencies .............................. 119
6.8 Selecting the braking resistor.................................................................. 120
6.9 Connecting AC brakemotors................................................................... 124
6.10 Mains and motor connection................................................................... 125
6.11 Multi-motor drive/group drive .................................................................. 132
6.12 Line chokes............................................................................................. 133
6.13 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC ........................................................ 133
6.14 HF output filters....................................................................................... 136
6.15 Electronics cables and signal generation................................................ 139
6.16 External voltage supply DC 24 V ............................................................ 139
6.17 Parameter set switchover ....................................................................... 141
6.18 Priority of the operating statuses and interrelation between
control signals ......................................................................................... 142
6.19 PI controller............................................................................................. 143
6.20 Application examples .............................................................................. 146
7 Unit design....................................................................................................... 152
7.1 Size 0XS / 0S / 0L................................................................................... 152
7.2 Size 1 / 2S / 2.......................................................................................... 153
7.3 Size 3 ...................................................................................................... 154
7.4 Size 4 / 5 ................................................................................................. 155
7.5 Unit designation / nameplate .................................................................. 156
8 Installation ....................................................................................................... 157
8.1 Installation notes ..................................................................................... 157
8.2 Installing the optional power components............................................... 163
8.3 UL compliant installation ......................................................................... 167
8.4 Scope of delivery and installation of loose items .................................... 169
8.5 Installing cold plate ................................................................................. 174
8.6 Deactivating EMC capacitors (size 0 only) ............................................. 174
8.7 Wiring diagram........................................................................................ 176
8.8 TF thermistor and TH bimetallic switch ................................................... 177
8.9 Connecting braking resistors BW.. / BW..-T / BW..-P to X3 / X2 ............ 177
8.10 Connecting the brake rectifier ................................................................. 178
8.11 Installing FSC11B / FIO11B.................................................................... 179
8.12 Installing MBG11A speed control module ............................................... 184
4 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B

Contents
9 Startup.............................................................................................................. 185
9.1 Brief description of the startup process................................................... 185
9.2 General startup instructions .................................................................... 186
9.3 Preliminary work and resources.............................................................. 187
9.4 Optional keypad FBG11B ....................................................................... 188
9.5 Basic operation of the FBG11B keypad.................................................. 189
9.6 Manual operation with FBG11B speed control module........................... 191
9.7 External setpoint selection ...................................................................... 192
9.8 Startup using the FBG11B keypad ......................................................... 193
9.9 Startup with DBG60B.............................................................................. 195
9.10 Startup with PC and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio.................................. 202
9.11 Startup for MBG11A speed control module ............................................ 202
9.12 Starting up pumps and fans of non-SEW motors.................................... 203
9.13 Starting the motor ................................................................................... 204
9.14 Parameter list.......................................................................................... 208
10 Operation ......................................................................................................... 219
10.1 Data backup............................................................................................ 219
10.2 Return codes (r-19 ... r-38) ..................................................................... 220
10.3 Status displays........................................................................................ 221
10.4 Unit status codes .................................................................................... 222
10.5 DBG60B keypad ..................................................................................... 223
11 Service / List of Faults .................................................................................... 228
11.1 Unit information ....................................................................................... 228
11.2 List of faults (F-00 ... F-113).................................................................... 230
11.3 SEW electronics service ......................................................................... 233
11.4 Extended storage.................................................................................... 234
12 Address List .................................................................................................... 235
Index................................................................................................................. 244

Important Notes
1 Structure of the safety notes
1 Important Notes
1.1 Structure of the safety notes
The safety notes in these operating instructions are structured as follows:
Symbol SIGNAL WORD!
Nature and source of hazard.

Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
• Measure(s) to avoid the hazard.
Symbol Signal word Meaning Consequences if

disregarded
Example: HAZARD! Imminent hazard Severe or fatal injuries
WARNING! Possible hazardous situation Severe or fatal injuries

General hazard
CAUTION! Possible hazardous situation Minor injuries
Electric shock
STOP! Possible damage to property Damage to the drive system
or its environment
NOTE Useful information or tip.

Simplifies handling of the drive system.
1.2 Rights to claim under warranty

Adhering to the operating instructions is a prerequisite for fault-free operation and the
fulfillment of any right to claim under warranty. Read the operating instructions before
you start working with the unit.
Make sure that the operating instructions are available to persons responsible for the
system and its operation, as well as to persons who work independently on the unit.
1.3 Exclusion of liability

You must comply with the information contained in these operating instructions to
ensure safe operation of frequency inverters and to achieve the specified product
characteristics and performance requirements. SEW-EURODRIVE assumes no liability
for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting from non-observance
of these operating instructions. In such cases, any liability for defects is excluded.

Safety Notes
General information
2
2 Safety Notes
The following basic safety notes are intended to prevent injury to persons and damage
to property. The operator must ensure that the basic safety notes are read and
observed. Make sure that persons responsible for the system and its operation, as well
as persons who work independently on the unit, have read through the operating instruc-
tions carefully and understood them. If you are unclear about any of the information in
this documentation, or if you require further information, please contact SEW-
EURODRIVE.
2.1 General information

Never install or start up damaged products. Submit a complaint to the shipping company
immediately in the event of damage.
During operation, drives with this type of enclosure may have live, uninsinuated, and
sometimes moving or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces.
Removing covers without authorization, improper use as well as incorrect installation or
operation may result in severe injuries to persons or damage to property.
Refer to the documentation for additional information.
2.2 Target group

Only a qualified electrician is authorized to transport, install, startup or service the
units (observe IEC 60364 or CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC 60664 or
DIN VDE 0110 as well as national accident prevention guidelines).
Qualified electricians in the context of these basic safety notes are persons familiar with
installation, assembly, startup and operation of the product who possess the required
qualifications.
Any activities regarding transportation, storage, operation, and disposal must be carried
out by persons who have been instructed appropriately.
2.3 Designated use

Frequency inverters are components intended for installation in electrical systems or
machines.
In case of installation in machines, startup of the drive inverters (meaning the start of
proper use) is prohibited until it is determined that the machine meets the requirements
stipulated in the EC Directive 98/37/EC (machine directive); observe EN 60204.
Startup (i.e. the start of designated use) is only permitted under observance of the EMC
(2004/108/EC) directive.

Safety Notes
2 Transportation, storage
The frequency inverters comply with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC. The harmonized standards of the EN 61800-5-1/DIN VDE T105 series in
connection with EN 60439-1/VDE 0660 part 500 and EN 60146/VDE 0558 are applied
to these frequency inverters.
Technical data and information on the connection requirements are provided on the
nameplate and in the documentation; these must be observed under all circumstances.
2.3.1 Safety functions

Frequency inverters from SEW-EURODRIVE may not perform any safety functions
unless the inverters are subordinate to other safety systems. Use higher-level safety
systems to ensure protection of equipment and personnel.
When using the "Safe stop" function, you must observe the following publications:
• MOVITRAC® B / Safe Disconnection – Conditions
• MOVITRAC® B / Safe Disconnection – Applications
2.4 Transportation, storage

You must observe the notes on transportation, storage and proper handling. Observe
the climatic conditions as stated in the section "General technical data".
2.5 Installation
The units must be installed and cooled according to the regulations and specifications
in the corresponding documentation.
Protect the frequency inverters from excessive strain. Ensure that components are not
deformed and/or insulation spaces are maintained, particularly during transportation.
Avoid contact with electronic components and contacts.
Frequency inverters contain components that can easily be damaged by electrostatic
energy and improper handling. Prevent mechanical damage or destruction of electric
components (may pose health risk).
The following applications are prohibited unless the unit is explicitly designed for such
use:
• Use in potentially explosive areas
• Use in areas exposed to harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, dust, radiation, etc.
• Use in non-stationary applications which are subject to mechanical vibration and
impact loads in excess of the requirements in EN 61800-5-1.

Safety Notes
Electrical connection
2
2.6 Electrical connection

Observe the applicable national accident prevention guidelines when working on live
frequency inverters (e.g. BGV A3).
Electrical installation is to be carried out in compliance with pertinent regulations (e.g.
cable cross sections, fusing, protective conductor connection). Additional information is
contained in the documentation.
You will find notes on EMC-compliant installation, such as shielding, grounding, the
arrangement of filters and the routing of lines, in the documentation of the frequency
inverters. Always observe these instructions, even for frequency inverters bearing the
CE marking. The manufacturer of the system or machine is responsible for maintaining
the limits established by EMC legislation.
Protective measures and protection devices must comply with the regulations in force
(e.g. EN 60204 or EN 61800-5-1).
Required preventive measure: grounding the unit.
2.7 Safe disconnection

The unit meets all requirements for safe disconnection of power and electronic connec-
tions in accordance with EN 61800-5-1. All connected circuits must also satisfy the
requirements for safe disconnection.
2.8 Operation
Systems with integrated frequency inverters must be equipped with additional monitor-
ing and protection devices, as applicable, according to the relevant safety guidelines
and regulations, such as legislation governing technical equipment, accident prevention
regulations, etc. Changes to frequency inverters using the operating software are
permitted.
Do not touch live components or power connections immediately after disconnecting the
frequency inverters from the supply voltage because there may still be some charged
capacitors. Note the respective labels on the frequency inverter.
Keep all covers and doors closed during operation.
The fact that the status LED and other display elements are no longer illuminated does
not indicate that the unit has been disconnected from the mains and no longer carries
any voltage.
Mechanical blocking or safety functions inside the unit may result in the motor coming
to a standstill. Eliminating the cause of the problem or performing a reset may result in
the drive re-starting automatically. If, for safety reasons, this is not permitted for the
driven machine, disconnect the unit from the mains before correcting the fault.

kVA n System Description MOVITRAC® B
3 f
MOVITRAC® B – compact, versatile and universal
i
P Hz
3 System Description MOVITRAC® B
Compact and economical: MOVITRAC® B – the next frequency inverter generation.
3.1 MOVITRAC® B – compact, versatile and universal

The percentage of speed-variable AC drives with inverter technology is constantly
increasing, and these units offer all options to optimize system and machine concepts
to the process sequences in addition to machine-conserving drive technology. The
expanse of these different fields of application shows that it is difficult to meet the tech-
nological and economic requirements with one universal inverter class.
The drive electronics in asynchronous AC motors are separated into standard inverters,
for simple applications, e.g. materials handling, and application inverters, for more
complex technological applications, e.g. positioning and handling applications. This
differentiation of the units allows scaling to different applications while staying with a
certain budget.
Operation, parameter setting, diagnostics and integration in automation concepts must
offer unit-comprehensive and therefore universal engineering and communication
support. Engineering tools for project planning, parameter setting and startup as well as
availability of communication interfaces (fieldbuses and Industrial Ethernet) offer users
a solution-oriented and unit-independent user interface.

System Description MOVITRAC® B kVA n
System overview MOVITRAC® B
f 3
i
P Hz
3.2 System overview MOVITRAC® B
1x 200 ... 240 VAC 3x 200 ... 240 VAC 3x 380 ... 500 VAC
Keypad Front option
DBG60B keypad
FBG11B
Line choke ND... Line filter NF...

Analog module
FIO11B
MOVITRAC® B MOVITRAC® B
MC07B...-2B1 MC07B...-....3
Operator terminals
DOP
Option card:
Front option – DFP21B
communication FSC11B – MOVI-PLC®
Gateway
UOH11B
Braking resistor BW
with submounting option FKB
Support rail EMC module Braking resistor BW...
mounting FHS FKE
Interface adapter Speed control
USB11A, UWS11A, UWS21B module
MGB11A
Output filter HF...
Output choke HD...
MOVITOOLS®
MotionStudio
Power supply connection Front options Option cards

• ND line choke • FBG11B keypad • PROFIBUS
• NF line filter • FIO11B analog module • MOVI-PLC® controller
• FSC11B communication for connecting
Power connection Installation
(only one option possible):
• HF output filter – DBG60B keypad • FHS support rail mounting
• HD output choke – Gateway UFx / UOH • Submounting option for FKB braking resistor
– UWS/USB interface adapter • FKE EMC-module
BW braking resistor
– SBus / RS-485 MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software
– DOP operator terminals
– MBG11A speed control module

3 f
The units at a glance
i
P Hz
3.3 The units at a glance

Power supply Motor power Rated output MOVITRAC® B type Size
connection current
0.25 kW / 0.34 HP AC 1.7 A MC07B0003-2B1-4-00
0XS
0.37 kW / 0.50 HP AC 2.5 A MC07B0004-2B1-4-00
0.55 kW / 0.74 HP AC 3.3 A MC07B0005-2B1-4-00
0S
230 V 1-phase 0.75 kW / 1.0 HP AC 4.2 A MC07B0008-2B1-4-00
1.1 kW / 1.5 HP AC 5.7 A MC07B0011-2B1-4-00
1.5 kW / 2.0 HP AC 7.3 A MC07B0015-2B1-4-00 0L
2.2 kW / 3.0 HP AC 8.6 A MC07B0022-2B1-4-00
0.25 kW / 0.34 HP AC 1.7 A MC07B0003-2A3-4-00
0XS
0.37 kW / 0.50 HP AC 2.5 A MC07B0004-2A3-4-00
0.55 kW / 0.74 HP AC 3.3 A MC07B0005-2A3-4-00
0S
0.75 kW / 1.0 HP AC 4.2 A MC07B0008-2A3-4-00
1.1 kW / 1.5 HP AC 5.7 A MC07B0011-2A3-4-00
1.5 kW / 2.0 HP AC 7.3 A MC07B0015-2A3-4-00 0L
2.2 kW / 3.0 HP AC 8.6 A MC07B0022-2A3-4-00
230 V 3-phase
3.7 kW / 5.0 HP AC 14.5 A MC07B0037-2A3-4-00 1
5.5 kW / 7.4 HP AC 22A MC07B0055-2A3-4-00
2
7.5 kW / 10 HP AC 29 A MC07B0075-2A3-4-00
11 kW / 15 HP AC 42 A MC07B0110-203-4-00
3
15 kW / 20 HP AC 54 A MC07B0150-203-4-00
22 kW / 30 HP AC 80 A MC07B0220-203-4-00
4
30 kW / 40 HP AC 95 A MC07B0300-203-4-00
0.25 kW / 0.34 HP AC 1.0 A MC07B0003-5A3-4-00
0XS
0.37 kW / 0.50 HP AC 1.6 A MC07B0004-5A3-4-00
0.55 kW / 0.74 HP AC 2.0 A MC07B0005-5A3-4-00/S0
0.75 kW / 1.0 HP AC 2.4 A MC07B0008-5A3-4-00/S0
0S
1.1 kW / 1.5 HP AC 3.1 A MC07B0011-5A3-4-00/S0
1.5 kW / 2.0 HP AC 4.0 A MC07B0015-5A3-4-00/S0
2.2 kW / 3.0 HP AC 5.5 A MC07B0022-5A3-4-00/S0
3.0 kW / 4.0 HP AC 7.0 A MC07B0030-5A3-4-00/S0 0L
4.0 kW / 5.4 HP AC 9.5 A MC07B0040-5A3-4-00/S0
400 V 3-phase 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP AC 12.5 A MC07B0055-5A3-4-00
2S
7.5 kW / 10 HP AC 16.0 A MC07B0075-5A3-4-00
11 kW / 15 HP AC 24.0 A MC07B0110-5A3-4-00 2
15 kW / 20 HP AC 32.0 A MC07B0150-503-4-00
22 kW / 30 HP AC 46.0 A MC07B0220-503-4-00 3
30 kW / 40 HP AC 60.0 A MC07B0300-503-4-00
37 kW / 50 HP AC 73.0 A MC07B0370-503-4-00
4
45 kW / 60 HP AC 89.0 A MC07B0450-503-4-00
55 kW / 74 HP AC 105 A MC07B0550-503-4-00
5
75 kW / 100 HP AC 130 A MC07B0750-503-4-00

Functions / features
f 3
i
P Hz
3.4 Functions / features

MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters are characterized by the following features:
3.4.1 Unit properties

• Wide voltage range:
– 230 V units for the voltage range 1 × AC 200 ... 240 V, 50/60 Hz
– 230 V units for the voltage range 3 × AC 200 ... 240 V, 50/60 Hz
– 400/500 V units for the voltage range 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V, 50/60 Hz
• Overload capacity: 125 % IN continuous duty
150 % IN for at least 60 s
Maximum 200 % breakaway torque (BG0)
• Rated operation up to an ambient temperature ϑ = 50 °C (122 °F), operation up to an
ambient temperature ϑ = 60 °C (140 °F) possible with current reduction.
• Speed range 0 ... 5500 rpm.
• Output frequency range:
– VFC: 0 ... 150 Hz
– V/f: 0 ... 600 Hz
• 4-quadrant capability due to the integrated brake chopper.
• Compact unit design for minimum control cabinet space requirement and optimum
utilization of control cabinet volume.
• Units with the "Safe stop" function:
– Unit variant (...-S0): 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V, 0.55 ... 4.0 kW (0.74 ... 5.4 HP)
– Standard unit: 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V, 5.5 ... 75 kW (7.4 ... 100 HP)
• Integrated EMC line filter to maintain the specified limit classes on the line side / C1/
C2 to EN 61800-3:
– Sizes 0 ... 2: C2 without further measures
– Sizes 0 ... 5: C1 with corresponding filters / folding ferrites
• Configurable inputs / outputs
– 1 analog input
– 6 binary inputs
– 3 binary outputs, including 1 relay output
– Optional: 1 additional analog input / 1 additional analog output
• Voltage supply and evaluation for TF (PTC temperature sensor) integrated for
monitoring the motor temperature.
• Integrated evaluation of TH for monitoring the temperature of the motor.

3 f
i
P Hz
• Integrated keypad for displaying setpoints and setting parameters

– 5-digit 7-segment display
– 9 LEDs for displaying the selected symbols
– 6 keys for operation
– 1 setpoint generator for speed specification
– Parameter set data backup
• Braking resistor can be sub-mounted as an option for size 0.
• Separable signal terminals.
• Size 0:
– Separable power terminals and signal terminals
– EMC capacitor can be insulated for reduced earth-leakage currents and operation
in IT network.
– "Cold Plate" installation possible.
– Long motor cable length
• Up to size 2S: Operation on MDR regenerative power supply unit possible (see
MOVIDRIVE® B documentation).
3.4.2 Control
• V/f control or VFC control mode.
• Automatic brake rectifier control by the inverter.
• Standstill current function for:
– Rapid start
– Heating current for preventing condensation in the motor at low temperatures
• Flying start function for synchronizing the inverter to the running motor.
• Hoist capability.
• DC braking to decelerate the motor in 1Q mode.
• Slip compensation for high stationary speed accuracy.
• Motor stall protection by sliding current limitation in the field weakening range
• Two complete motor parameter sets
• Factory setting can be restored.
• Parameter lock for protection against changes to parameters.
• Protective functions for protection against
– Overcurrent
– Ground fault
– Overload
– Overtemperature of the inverter
– Overtemperature of the motor (TF/TH)

f 3
i
P Hz
• Speed monitoring and monitoring of the motor and regenerative limit power.
• 5 fault memories with all relevant operating data at the moment of the fault.
• Standardized operation, parameter setting and identical unit connection technology
across all units in the MOVITRAC® B range.
• Configurable signal range monitoring (speed).
• Energy-saving function for optimizing the magnetization current automatically.
3.4.3 Setpoint technology

• Motor potentiometer.
• External setpoint selections:
– 0 ... +10 V (unidirectional and bidirectional)
– 0 ... 20 mA
– 4 ... 20 mA
– –10 V ... +10 V bidirectional with FIO11B
• 6 fixed setpoints.
• Frequency input.
3.4.4 Optional communication / operation

• CAN based system bus (SBus) for networking max. 64 MOVITRAC® B units. A PC,
a PLC or a MOVIDRIVE® can be the SBus master.
• CANopen Protocol DS301 V4.
• RS-485 interface.
• Simple parameter setting and startup using optional keypad or MOVITOOLS®
MotionStudio software.
• Fieldbus interfaces for
– PROFIBUS
– DeviceNet
– INTERBUS
– CANopen
– Ethernet-based:
• EtherCAT
• PROFINET (in preparation)
• Ethernet/IP (in preparation)

3 f
MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio
i
P Hz
3.5 MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio

The MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio program includes:
• Parameter tree
• Startup
• SCOPE
• Application Builder
• Data management
The MOVITRAC® B has the following functions:
• Startup
• Parameter setting
• Visualization / diagnostics
3.5.1 SCOPE
SCOPE for MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio is an oscilloscope program for SEW inverters.
SCOPE allows you to optimize the drives yourself. The inverter records, for example,
response functions to setpoint changes in real time. You can transfer this information to
the PC and graphically display it. SCOPE shows up to four analog and digital measured
variables in differently colored curves. You can scale both the x-axis and the y-axis as
required.
SCOPE also enables you to record digital input and output signals of the inverter. This
means you can record complete program sequences of the higher-level controller and
then evaluate them.
SCOPE supports simple documentation of the set parameters and the recorded
measurement data by providing the following functions:
• Save
• Meta data
• Print
The online help functions enable you to quickly get familiar with how to use SCOPE.
SCOPE is a multi-document interface (MDI application). This interface lets you observe
and analyze several data sets simultaneously. SCOPE displays every new data set in a
new window. All settings made for displaying and editing the data record apply to the
active window only.

Technical Data kVA n
CE marking, UL approval and C-Tick
f 4
i
P Hz
4 Technical Data
4.1 CE marking, UL approval and C-Tick
4.1.1 CE-marking
MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters comply with the regulations of the Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC.
MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters are designed for use as components for installation
in machines and systems. They comply with the EMC product standard EN 61800-3
Variable-speed electrical drives. Provided the installation instructions are complied with,
they satisfy the relevant requirements for the CE marking for the entire machine/system
in which they are installed, on the basis of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC. For detailed
information on EMC compliant installation, refer to the publication "Electromagnetic
Compatibility in Drive Engineering" from SEW-EURODRIVE.
Compliance with limit classes C2 and C1 has been tested on a specified test setup.
SEW-EURODRIVE can provide detailed information on request.
The CE-mark on the nameplate indicates conformity with the low voltage directive 73/
23/EEC. We can provide a declaration of conformity on request.
4.1.2 UL approval / CSA / GOST-R certificate / C-Tick

UL and cUL approval (USA) has been granted for the following MOVITRAC® B units:
• 230 V / single-phase
• 230 V / 3-phase
• 400/500 V / 3-phase (0.25 ... 45 kW / 0.34 ... 60 HP)
cUL approval has been applied for the other units. cUL is equivalent to CSA approval.
The GOST-R certificate (Russia) is approved for the MOVITRAC® B unit series.
C-Tick approval has been granted for the entire MOVITRAC® B series. C-Tick certifies
conformity with ACMA (Australian Communications and Media Authority) standards.

kVA n Technical Data
4 f
General technical data
i
P Hz
4.2 General technical data

The following technical data applies to all MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters indepen-
dent of size and power.
MOVITRAC® B All sizes
Interference immunity Complies with EN 61800-3
Interference emission with According to limit value class1)
EMC-compliant installation • Sizes 0 ... 2: C2 without further measures
• Sizes 0 ... 5: C1 with corresponding filters / folding ferrites
C1/C2 to EN 61800-3
Leakage current > 3.5 mA
Ambient temperature ϑA • 230 V, 0.25 ... 2.2 kW (0.34 ... 3.0 HP) / 400/500 V, 0.25 ... 4.0 kW (0.34 ... 5.4 HP)
(up to 60 °C (140 °F) with cur- With overload capacity (max. 150% for 60 s):
rent reduction) ID = 100 % IN / fPWM = 4 kHz: -10 °C ... +40 °C (14 °F ... 104 °F)
Without high overload capacity:
ID = 100 % IN / fPWM = 4 kHz: -10 °C ... +50 °C (14 °F ... 122 °F)
ID = 100 % IN / fPWM = 8 kHz: -10 °C ... +40 °C (14 °F ... 104 °F)
ID = 125 % IN / fPWM= 4 kHz: -10 °C ... +40 °C (14 °F ... 104 °F)
• 3 × 230 V, 3.7 ... 30 kW (5.0 ... 40 HP) / 400/500 V, 5.5 ... 75 kW (7.4 ... 100 HP)
With overload capacity (max. 150% for 60 s):
ID = 100 % IN / fPWM = 4 kHz: 0 °C ... +40 °C (32 °F ... 104 °F)
Without overload capacity:
• Mounting plate with "cold plate" < 70°C (+158 °F)
Derating ambient temperature 2.5 % IN per K at 40 °C ... 50 °C (104 °C ... 122 °F)
(current reduction) 3 % IN per K at 50 °C ... 60 °C (122 °F ... 140 °F)
Climate class EN 60721-3-3, class 3K3
Storage temperature -25 °C ... +75 °C (–13 °F ... 167 °F)
Transportation temperature -25 °C ... +75 °C (–13 °F ... 167 °F)
Cooling type Self-cooling: 230 V: ≤ 0.75 kW (1.0 HP)
400/500 V: ≤ 1.1 kW (1.5 HP)
Forced cooling: 230 V: ≥ 1.1 kW (1.5 HP)
(temperature controlled fan, 400/500 V: ≥ 1.5 kW (3.0 HP)
Response threshold 45 °C (113 °F])
Degree of protection EN Sizes 0 ... 3: IP20
60529 (NEMA1) Sizes 4 ... 5 power connections:
• IP00
• With the supplied Plexiglas cover mounted and mounted shrinking tube (not sup-
plied) IP10
Operating mode Continuous duty
Overvoltage category III according to IEC 60664-1 (VDE 0110-1)
Mains voltage tolerance EN 50160: ±10 %
Pollution class 2 according to IEC 60664-1 (VDE 0110-1)

General technical data
f 4
i
P Hz
MOVITRAC® B All sizes

Installation altitude Up to h ≤ 1000 m (3281 ft) without restrictions.
At h ≥ 1000 m (3281 ft), the following restrictions apply:
• from 1,000 m (3281 ft) to max. 4000 m (13120 ft):
– IN reduction by 1% per 100 m (328 ft)
• from 2000 m (6562 ft) to max. 4000 m (13120 ft):
– AC 230 V units: Reduction of the rated mains voltage Vsupply by AC 3 V per
100 m (328 ft)
– AC 500 V units: Reduction of the rated mains voltage Vsupply by AC 6 V per
100 m (328 ft)
Over 2000 m (6562 ft) only overvoltage class 2, external measures are required for
overvoltage class 3. Overvoltage classes according to DIN VDE 0110-1.
Dimensioning According to DIN ISO 276-v
Size 0: • Maximum ambient temperature ϑA: 40 °C (104 °F)
Restrictions for continuous • Maximum rated mains voltage Vsupply: 400 V
duty with 125 % IN • No DIN rail mounting / submounting resistor
• With 1 × 230 V: Provide line choke ND
1) Electrical installation in compliance with applicable regulations is necessary for maintaining the EMC limit value class. Comply with the
installation notes.

4 f
MOVITRAC® B electronics data
i
P Hz
4.3 MOVITRAC® B electronics data

Function Terminal Designa- Default Data
tion
Setpoint input1) (differ- X10:1 REF1 +10 V, RLmin = 3 k
ential input) X10:2 AI11 (+) 0 ... +10 V (Ri > 200 k)
X10:3 AI12 (–) 0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA (Ri = 250 ),
10 bit resolution, sampling time 1 ms
X10:4 GND GND = Reference potential for binary and analog
signals, PE potential
Binary inputs X12:1 DI00 Fault reset Ri = 3 k, IE = 10 mA, sampling time 5 ms, PLC
X12:2 DI01 CW/stop compatible
X12:3 DI02 CCW/stop Signal level according to EN 61131-2 type 1 or 3:
X12:4 DI03 Enable/stop • +11 ... +30 V → 1 / contact made
X12:5 DI04 n11/n21 • –3 ... +5 V → 0 / contact open
X12.6 DI05TF n12/n22 • X12:2 / DI01 with fixed assignment CW/Stop
• X12:5 / DI04 can be used as frequency input
• X12:6 / DI05 can be used as TF input
Supply voltage for TF X12:7 VOTF Special characteristics for TF according to
DIN EN 60947-8 / trigger value 3 k
Auxiliary voltage output X12:8 24VIO Auxiliary supply output: V = DC 24 V, current
/ external voltage sup- carrying capacity Imax = 50 mA
ply2) External voltage supply:
V = DC 24 V –15 % / +20 % to EN 61131-2
See section Project planning/external DC 24 V
voltage supply.
Reference terminal X12:9 GND Reference potential for binary and analog signals,
PE potential
Binary outputs X13:1 GND PLC compatible, response time 5 ms,
X13:2 DO02 Brake released Imax DO02 = 150 mA, Imax DO03 = 50 mA,
X13:3 DO03 Ready Short-circuit proof, protected against external
X13:4 GND voltage up to 30 V
GND = Reference potential for binary and analog
signals, PE potential
Relay output X13:5 DO01-C Shared relay contact
X13:6 DO01-NO NO contact
X13:7 DO01-NC NC contact
Load capacity: Vmax = 30 V, Imax = 800 mA

MOVITRAC® B electronics data
f 4
i
P Hz
Function Terminal Designa- Default Data

tion
Safety contact X17:1 DGND: Reference potential for X17:3
X17:2 VO24: : VOUT = DC 24 V, only to supply X17:4 of the same unit; it cannot be used
to supply other units.
X17:3 SOV24: Reference potential for DC+24 V input "Safe stop" (safety contact)
X17:4 SVI24: DC+24 V input "Safe stop" (safety contact)
Permitted cable cross One core per terminal: 0.08...1.5 mm2 (AWG 28...16)
section Two cores per terminal: 0.25 ... 1.0 mm2(AWG 23...17)
Power consumption Size 0: 3 W
X17:4 Size 1: 5 W
Size 2, 2S: 6 W
Size 3: 7.5 W
Size 4: 8 W
Size 5: 10 W
Input capacitance Size 0: 27 μF
X17:4 Sizes 1..0.5: 270 μF
Time for restart tA = 200 ms
Time to inhibit output tS = 200 ms
stage
Signal level DC +19.2 V...+30 V = "1" = Contact closed
DC –30 V...+5 V = "0" = Contact open
Terminal response Binary input and output terminals are updated every 5 ms
times
Max. cable cross-sec- 1.5 mm2 (AWG15) without conductor end sleeves
tion 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves
1) If the setpoint input is not used, it should be set to GND. Otherwise a measured input voltage of –1 V ... +1 V is set.
2) The MC07B...-S0 unit type must always be supplied with external voltage.
4.3.1 DC 24 V power demand for 24 V backup mode
Size Basic unit power

DBG60B FIO11B Fieldbus option2)3) DHP11B3)
demand1)
0 MC07B...-00 5W
0 MC07B...-S0 12 W
1, 2S, 2 17 W 1W 2W 3W 4.5 W
3 23 W
4, 5 25 W
1) FBG11B, FSC11B (UWS11A/USB11A) included. Take account of the additional load of the binary inputs
with 2.4 W per 100 mA.
2) Fieldbus options are: DFP21B, DFD11B, DFE11B, ...
3) These options must always be externally supplied.

4 f
Technical data of MOVITRAC® B
i
P Hz
4.4 Technical data of MOVITRAC® B

4.4.1 Overview MOVITRAC® B
400 / 500 V 230 V
0XS 0S
0L 0XS 0S
0L
1
2
2
2S
3 4
4
5
Power supply connection 400 / 500 V / 3-phase

Size 0XS 0S 0L 2S 2 3 4 5
Power [kW / 0.55 / 0.74
HP] 2.2 / 3.0 15 / 20
0.25 / 0.34 0.75 / 1.0 5.5 / 7.4 37 / 50 55 / 74
3.0 / 4.0 11 / 15 22 / 30
0.37 / 0.50 1.1 / 1.5 7.5 / 10 45 / 60 75 / 100
4.0 / 5.4 30 / 40
1.5 / 2.0
Power supply connection 230 V / 1-phase

Size 0XS 0S 0L
Power [kW / 1.1 / 1.5
HP] 0.25 / 0.34 0.55 / 0.74
1.5 / 2.0
0.37 / 0.50 0.75 / 1.0
2.2 / 3.0
Power supply connection 230 V / 3-phase

Size 0XS 0S 0L 1 2 3 4
Power [kW / 1.1 / 1.5
HP] 0.25 / 0.34 0.55 / 0.74 5.5 / 7.4 11 / 15 22 / 30
1.5 / 2.0 3.7 / 5.0
0.37 / 0.50 0.75 / 1.0 7.5 / 10 15 / 20 30 / 40
2.2 / 3.0

f 4
i
P Hz
4.4.2 AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 0XS / 0.25 ... 0.37 kW / 0.34 ... 0.50 HP
54.5 (2.15) 163.5 (6.437)
6 (0.2)
49.5 (1.95) 149 (5.87)
185 (7.28)
220 (8.66)
196 (7.72)
285 (11.2)
6 (0.2)
159.5 (6.280)
MOVITRAC® MC07BB (3-phase supply system) 0003-5A3-4-00 0004-5A3-4-00

Part number 828 515 2 828 516 0
INPUT
Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V
Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%
Rated mains current, 100 % operation Isupply AC 0.9 A AC 1.4 A
Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply 125 AC 1.1 A AC 1.8 A
OUTPUT
Output voltage UA 3 × 0 ... Vsupply
Recommended motor power 100 % operation PMot 0.25 kW / 0.34 HP 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP
Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot 125 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP 0.55 kW / 0.74 HP
Rated output current 100 % operation IN AC 1.0 A AC 1.6 A
Rated output current 125 % operation IN 125 AC 1.3 A AC 2.0 A
Apparent output power 100 % operation SN 0.7 kVA 1.1 kVA
Apparent output power 125 % operation SN 125 0.9 kVA 1.4 kVA
Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 RBW_min 68
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Power loss 100 % operation PV 30 W 35 W
Power loss 125 % operation PV 125 35 W 40 W
Current limitation 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds
Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in
Dimensions W×H×D 54.5 × 185 × 163.5 mm / 2.15 × 7.28 × 6.437 in
Weight m 1.3 kg / 2.9 lb

4 f
i
P Hz
4.4.3 AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 0S / 0.55 ... 1.5 kW / 0.74 ... 2.0 HP
80 (3.1) 163.5 (6.437)
6 (0.2) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87)
220 (8.66)
196 (7.72)
185 (7.28)
285 (11.2)
6 (0.2)
159.5 (6.280)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0005-5A3-4- 0008-5A3-4- 0011-5A3-4- 0015-5A3-4-

x0 x0 x0 x0
Part number, standard unit (-00) 828 517 9 828 518 7 828 519 5 828 520 9
Part number "Safe stop" (-S0)1) 828 995 6 828 996 4 828 997 2 828 998 0
INPUT
Rated mains current, 100 % operation Isupply AC 1.8 A AC 2.2 A AC 2.8 A AC 3.6 A
Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply 125 AC 2.3 A AC 2.6 A AC 3.5 A AC 4.5 A
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power 100 % opera- PMot 0.55 kW / 0.75 kW / 1.0 1.1 kW / 1.5 kW /
tion 0.74 HP HP 1.5 HP 2.0 HP
PMot 125 0.75 kW / 1.0 1.1 kW / 1.5 1.5 kW / 2.2 kW /
Recommended motor power 125 % opera- HP HP 2.0 HP 3.0 HP
tion
Rated output current 100 % operation IN AC 2.0 A AC 2.4 A AC 3.1 A AC 4.0 A
Rated output current 125 % operation IN 125 AC 2.5 A AC 3.0 A AC 3.9 A AC 5.0 A
Apparent output power 100 % operation SN 1.4 kVA 1.7 kVA 2.1 kVA 2.8 kVA
Apparent output power 125 % operation SN 125 1.7 kVA 2.1 kVA 2.7 kVA 3.5 kVA
Minimum permitted braking resistance value RBW_min 68
(4 quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Power loss 100 % operation PV 40 W 45 W 50 W 60 W
Power loss 125 % operation PV 125 45 W 50 W 60 W 75 W
Dimensions W×H× 80 × 185 × 163.5 mm / 3.1 × 7.28 × 6.437 in
D

f 4
i
P Hz
4.4.4 AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 0L / 2.2 ... 4.0 kW / 3.0 ... 5.4 HP
80 (3.1) 163.5 (6.437)
6 (0.2) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87)
308.5 (12.15)
273.5 (10.77)
284.5 (11.20)
373.5 (14.70)
6 (0.2)
159.5 (6.280)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0022-5A3-4-x0 0030-5A3-4-x0 0040-5A3-4-x0

Part number, standard unit (-00) 828 521 7 828 522 5 828 523 3
Part number "Safe stop" (-S0)1) 828 999 9 829 000 8 829 001 6
INPUT
Rated mains current, 100 % operation Isupply AC 5.0 A AC 6.3 A AC 8.6 A
Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply 125 AC 6.2 A AC 7.9 A AC 10.7 A
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power 100 % operation PMot 2.2 kW / 3.0 HP 3.0 kW / 4.0 HP 4.0 kW / 5.4 HP
Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot 125 3.0 kW / 4.0 HP 4.0 kW / 5.4 HP 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP
Rated output current 100 % operation IN AC 5.5 A AC 7.0 A AC 9.5 A
Rated output current 125 % operation IN 125 AC 6.9 A AC 8.8 A AC 11.9 A
Apparent output power 100 % operation SN 3.8 kVA 4.8 kVA 6.6 kVA
Apparent output power 125 % operation SN 125 4.8 kVA 6.1 kVA 8.2 kVA
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Power loss 100 % operation PV 80 W 95 W 125 W
Power loss 125 % operation PV 125 95 W 120 W 180 W
Dimensions W×H×D 80 × 273.5 × 163.5 mm / 3.1 × 10.77 × 6.437 in

4 f
i
P Hz
4.4.5 AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 2S / 5.5 ... 7.5 kW / 7.4 ... 10 HP
105 (4.13) 238 (9.37)

70 (2.8) 234 (9.21)
335 (13.2)
325 (12.8)
7 (0.3)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0055-5A3-4-00 0075-5A3-4-00

Part number 828 524 1 828 526 8
INPUT
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power 100 % operation PMot 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP 7.5 kW / 10 HP
Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot 125 7.5 kW / 10 HP 11 kW / 15 HP
Rated output current 100 % operation IN AC 12.5 A AC 16 A
Rated output current 125 % operation IN 125 AC 15.6 A AC 20 A
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 1.5 Nm / 13 lb
Dimensions W×H×D 105 × 335 × 238 mm / 4.13 × 13.2 × 9.37 in
Weight m 5.0 kg / 11 lb

f 4
i
P Hz
4.4.6 AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 2 / 11 kW / 15 HP

130 (5.12) 229 (9.02)
105 (4.13) 225 (8.86)
335 (13.2)
315 (12.4)
300 (11.8)
6.5 (0.26)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0110-5A3-4-00

Part number 828 527 6
INPUT
Rated mains current, 100 % operation Isupply AC 21.6 A
Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply 125 AC 27.0 A
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power 100 % operation PMot 11 kW / 15 HP
Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot 125 15 kW / 20 HP
Rated output current 100 % operation IN AC 24 A
Rated output current 125 % operation IN 125 AC 30 A
Apparent output power 100 % operation SN 16.6 kVA
Apparent output power 125 % operation SN 125 20.8 kVA
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Power loss 100 % operation PV 400 W
Power loss 125 % operation PV 125 500 W
Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 1.5 Nm / 5.90 kg in

4 f
i
P Hz
4.4.7 AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 3 / 15 ... 30 kW / 20 ... 40 HP

200 (7.87) 251 (9.88)
105 (4.13) 247 (9.72)
465 (18.3)
445 (17.5)
7 (0.3)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0150-503-4-00 0220-503-4-00 0300-503-4-00

Part number 828 528 4 828 529 2 828 530 6
INPUT
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power 100 % operation PMot 15 kW / 20 HP 22 kW / 30 HP 30 kW / 40 HP
Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot 125 22 kW / 30 HP 30 kW / 40 HP 37 kW / 50 HP
Rated output current 100 % operation IN AC 32 A AC 46 A AC 60 A
Rated output current 125 % operation IN 125 AC 40 A AC 57.5 A AC 75 A
Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 RBW_min 15 12
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
2 10 mm2 / AWG8 16 mm2 / AWG6
Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 6 mm / AWG10
3.5 Nm / 31 lb in
Weight m 15 kg / 33 lb

f 4
i
P Hz

280 (11.0) 250 (9.84)
140 (5.51) 246 (9.69)
522 (20.6)
499 (19.6)
7 (0.3)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0370-503-4-00 0450-503-4-00

Part number 828 531 4 828 532 2
INPUT
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power 100 % operation PMot 37 kW / 50 HP 45 kW / 60 HP
Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot 125 45 kW / 60 HP 55 kW / 74 HP
Rated output current 100 % operation IN AC 73 A AC 89 A
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 25 mm2 / AWG4 35 mm2 / AWG2
14 Nm / 120 lb in

4 f
i
P Hz

280 (11.0) 330 (13.0)
140 (5.51)
590 (23.2)
610 (24.0)
7 (0.3)

Part number 829 527 1 829 529 8
INPUT
Rated mains current, 100 % operation Isupply AC 94.5 A AC 117 A
OUTPUT
Rated output current 125 % operation IN 125 AC131 A AC 162 A
Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 RBW_min 6 4
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
14 Nm / 120 lb in

f 4
i
P Hz
4.4.10 AC 230 V / 1-phase / size 0XS / 0.25 ... 0.37 kW / 0.34 ... 0.50 HP
54.5 (2.15) 163.5 (6.437)
6 (0.2)
49.5 (1.95) 149 (5.87)
185 (7.28)
220 (8.66)
196 (7.72)
285 (11.2)
6 (0.2)
159.5 (6.280)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (1-phase supply system) 0003-2B1-4-00 0004-2B1-4-00

Part number 828 491 1 828 493 8
INPUT
OUTPUT
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION

4 f
i
P Hz
4.4.11 AC 230 V / 1-phase / size 0S / 0.55 ... 0.75 kW / 0.74 ... 1.0 HP
80 (3.1) 163.5 (6.437)
6 (0.2) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87)
220 (8.66)
196 (7.72)
185 (7.28)
285 (11.2)
6 (0.2)
159.5 (6.280)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (1-phase supply system) 0005-2B1-4-00 0008-2B1-4-00

Part number 828 494 6 828 495 4
INPUT
OUTPUT
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Dimensions W×H×D 80 × 185 × 163.5 mm / 3.1 × 7.28× 6.437 in

f 4
i
P Hz
4.4.12 AC 230 V / 1-phase / size 0L / 1.1 ... 2.2 kW / 1.5 ... 3.0 HP
80 (3.1) 163.5 (6.437)
6 (0.2) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87)
308.5 (12.15)
273.5 (10.77)
284.5 (11.20)
373.5 (14.70)
6 (0.2)
159.5 (6.280)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (1-phase supply system) 0011-2B1-4-00 0015-2B1-4-00 0022-2B1-4-00

Part number 828 496 2 828 497 0 828 498 9
INPUT
OUTPUT
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION

4 f
i
P Hz
4.4.13 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 0XS / 0.25 ... 0.37 kW / 0.34 ... 0.50 HP
54.5 (2.15) 163.5 (6.437)
6 (0.2)
49.5 (1.95) 149 (5.87)
185 (7.28)
220 (8.66)
196 (7.72)
285 (11.2)
6 (0.2)
159.5 (6.280)

Part number 828 499 7 828 500 4
INPUT
OUTPUT
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION

f 4
i
P Hz
4.4.14 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 0S / 0.55 ... 0.75 kW / 0.74 ... 1.0 HP
80 (3.1) 163.5 (6.437)
6 (0.2) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87)
220 (8.66)
196 (7.72)
185 (7.28)
285 (11.2)
6 (0.2)
159.5 (6.280)

Part number 828 501 2 828 502 0
INPUT
OUTPUT
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Dimensions W×H×D 80 × 185 × 163.5 mm / 3.1 × 7.28 × 6.437 in

4 f
i
P Hz
4.4.15 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 0L / 1.1 ... 2.2 kW / 1.5 ... 3.0 HP
80 (3.1) 163.5 (6.437)
6 (0.2) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87)
308.5 (12.15)
273.5 (10.77)
284.5 (11.20)
373.5 (14.70)
6 (0.2)
159.5 (6.280)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0011-2A3-4-00 0015-2A3-4-00 0022-2A3-4-00

Part number 828 503 9 828 504 7 828 505 5
INPUT
OUTPUT
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION

f 4
i
P Hz
4.4.16 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 1 / 3.7 kW / 5.0 HP

105 (4.13) 177 (6.97)
85 (3.3) 173 (6.81)
315 (12.4)
343 (13.5)
300 (11.8)
6 (0.2)
MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0037-2A3-4-00

INPUT
Rated mains current, 100 % operation Isupply AC 12.9 A
Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply 125 AC 16.1 A
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power 100 % operation PMot 3.7 kW / 5.0 HP
Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot 125 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP
Rated output current 100 % operation IN AC 14.5 A
Rated output current 125 % operation IN 125 AC 18.1 A
Apparent output power 100 % operation SN 5.8 kVA
Apparent output power 125 % operation SN 125 7.3 kVA
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Power loss 100 % operation PV 210 W
Power loss 125 % operation PV 125 270 W

4 f
i
P Hz
4.4.17 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 2 / 5.5 ... 7.5 kW / 7.4 ... 10 HP

130 (5.12) 229 (9.02)
105 (4.13) 225 (8.86)
335 (13.2)
315 (12.4)
300 (11.8)
6.5 (0.26)

Part number 828 507 1 828 509 8
INPUT
OUTPUT
Recommended motor power 100 % operation PMot 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP 7.5 kW / 10 HP
Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot 125 AC 7.5 kW (10 HP) 11 kW / 15 HP
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION

f 4
i
P Hz
4.4.18 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 3 / 11 ... 15 kW / 15 ... 20 HP

200 (7.87) 251 (9.88)
105 (4.13) 247 (9.72)
465 (18.3)
445 (17.5)
7 (0.3)

Part number 828 510 1 828 512 8
INPUT
OUTPUT
Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 RBW_min 7.5 5.6
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
2 10 mm2 / AWG8
Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 6 mm / AWG10
3.5 Nm / 31 lb in

4 f
i
P Hz
4.4.19 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 4 / 22 ... 30 kW / 30 ... 40 HP

280 (11.0) 250 (9.84)
140 (5.51) 246 (9.69)
522 (20.6)
499 (19.6)
7 (0.3)

Part number 828 513 6 828 514 4
INPUT
Rated mains current, 100 % operation Isupply AC 72 A AC 86 A
Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply 125 AC 90 A AC 107 A
OUTPUT
Rated output current 125 % operation IN 125 AC 100 A AC 118.8 A
quadrant operation)
GENERAL INFORMATION
14 Nm / 120 lb in

Front option FBG11B keypad
f 4
i
P Hz
4.5 Front option FBG11B keypad

The FBG11B front option can be used for simple diagnostics and startup.

Functions • Display process values and status
• Error memory and error reset queries
• Displaying and setting parameters
• Back up and transfer of parameter sets
• Easy-to-use startup menu for SEW and non-SEW motors
• Manual control for MOVITRAC® B
Features • 5-digit, 7-segment display / 6 buttons / 8 icons / setpoint control module
• Selection of short or long menu
• Can be plugged onto the inverter (during operation)
• Degree of protection IP20 (EN 60529)

4 f
FSC11B communication module
i
P Hz
4.6 FSC11B communication module

The FSC11B communication module enables communication with other units. These
may include: PC, operator terminals, MOVITRAC® or MOVIDRIVE®.

Functions • Communication with PLC / MOVITRAC®B / MOVIDRIVE® / PC
• Operation/parameter setting/service (PC)
• The options FSC11B and FIO11B are installed at the same fastening place and
therefore cannot be used simultaneously.
Features • RS-485 (one interface): Plug-in terminals and service interface (RJ10 socket)
• CAN-based system bus (SBus) (plug-in terminals)
• Supported protocols: MOVILINK® / SBus / RS-485 / CANopen
S1 S2
ON
OFF
X44
FSC11B
X45 X46
HL A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Function Terminal Designation Data

System bus X46:1 SC11: SBus high CAN bus according to CAN specification 2.0, parts A
(SBus) X46:2 SC12: SBus low and B, transmission technology according to ISO 11898,
X46:3 GND: Reference potential max. 64 stations, terminating resistor (120 ) can be
activated using DIP switches
X46:4 SC21: SBus high
Terminal cross-section:
X46:5 SC22: SBus low
1.5 mm2 (AWG15) without conductor end sleeves
X46:6 GND: Reference potential
1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves
X46:7 24VIO: Auxiliary voltage / external
voltage supply
RS-485 X45:H ST11: RS-485+ EIA standard, 9.6 kbaud, max. 32 stations
interface X45:L ST12: RS-485– Maximum cable length 200 m (656 ft)
X45:⊥ GND: Reference potential Dynamic terminating resistor with fixed installation
– 1.5 mm2 (AWG15) without conductor end sleeves
– 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves
X44 Service interface Connection: Only for service purposes, exclusively for
RJ10 point-to-point connection
Maximum cable length 3 m (10 ft)

FIO11B analog module
f 4
i
P Hz
4.7 FIO11B analog module

4.7.1 Description
The FIO11B analog module adds the following interfaces to the basic version:
• Setpoint input
• Analog output
• RS-485 interface
• The options FIO11B and FSC11B are mounted on the same fastening place and
therefore cannot be used simultaneously.
X44
FIO11B
X45 X40
HL A 1 2 3 4 5
4.7.2 Electronics data FIO11B analog module

Function Terminal Designation Data
1)
Setpoint input X40:1 AI2: Voltage input –10 ... +10 V
X40:2 GND: Reference potential Ri > 40 k
Resolution 10 bit
Sampling time 5 ms
Analog output/ X40:3 GND: Reference potential
alternative as cur- X40:4 AOV1: Voltage output 0 ... +10 V / Imax = 2 mA
rent output or volt- X40:5 AOC1: Current output 0 (4) ... 20 mA
age output
Resolution 10 bit
Sampling time 5 ms
Short-circuit proof, protected against external voltage up
to 30 V
Load impedance RL ≤ 750 Ω
RS-485 interface X45:H ST11: RS-485+ EIA standard, 9.6 kbaud, max. 32 stations
X45:L ST12: RS-485– Maximum cable length 200 m (656 ft)
X45:⊥ GND: Reference potential Dynamic terminating resistor with fixed installation
– 1.5 mm2 (AWG15) without conductor end sleeves
– 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves
X44 Service interface Connection: Only for service purposes, exclusively for
RJ10 point-to-point connection
Maximum cable length 5 m (20 ft)
1) If the setpoint input is not used, it should be set to GND. Otherwise a measured input voltage of –1 V ... +1 V is set.

4 f
DBG60B keypad
i
P Hz
4.8 DBG60B keypad

4.8.1 Description
The basic version of MOVITRAC® does not have a DBG60B keypad but has the option of
an upgrade to include the plain text keypad.
Keypad Language Part number
DE/EN/FR/IT/ES/PT/NL
DBG60B-01 (German / English / French / Ital- 1 820 403 1
ian / Spanish / Portuguese /
Dutch)
DE / EN / FR / FI / SV / DA / TR
DBG60B-02 (German / English / French / 1 820 405 8
Finnish / Swedish / Danish / Turk-
ish)
DE/EN/FR/RU/PL/CS
DBG60B-03 (German / English / French / Rus- 1 820 406 6
sian / Polish / Czech)
DE / EN / FR / ZH
DBG60B-04 (German / English / French / Chi- 1 820 850 9
nese)
Door installation Description (= scope of deliv- Part number
set1) ery)
• Housing for DBG60B (IP65)
DBM60B • DKG60B extension cable, 824 853 2
length 5 m (20 ft)
Extension cables Description (= scope of deliv- Part number
ery)
DKG60B • 5 m long (20 ft) 817 583 7
• 4-core, shielded cable
(AWG26)
1) The DBG60B keypad is not included in the scope of delivery and must be ordered separately.
4.8.2 Functions
• Display process values and status
• Status displays of the binary inputs / outputs
• Error memory and error reset queries
• Option to display and set the operating parameters and service parameters
• Data backup and transfer of parameter sets to other MOVITRAC® B units.
• User-friendly startup menu
• Manual control for MOVITRAC® B
• The FSC11B front option or FIO11B is required for connection

DBG60B keypad
f 4
i
P Hz
4.8.3 Features
• Illuminated plain text display, choice of 7 languages
• Keypad with 21 keys
• Can be connected via extension cable DKG60B (5 m (20 ft))
• Degree of protection IP40 (EN 60529)
NOTE
The DBG60B keypad option is connected to the FSC11B or FIO11B communication
front option. Simultaneous operation of DBG60B and PC, RS-485 connection,
MOVIDRIVE® or MOVITRAC® is not possible.
4.8.4 Dimension drawing for DBG60B

DBG60B dimension drawing, dimensions in mm
135 (5.31)
45 (1.8) 18 (0.71)

4 f
DBG60B keypad
i
P Hz
4.8.5 DBG60B housing dimension drawing

The DBM60B option can be used to mount the DBG60B keypad in the control cabinet
door, for example. The DBM60B option consists of housing in enclosure IP65 and a 5 m
(20 ft) DKG60B extension cable.
3)
(0.6
16
Ø4 (0.2) 54 (2
.1)
67 (2
.0) .6)
(1
26
139 (5.47)
151 (5.94)
R5 (0.2)

Parameter module UBP11A
f 4
i
P Hz
4.9 Parameter module UBP11A

Part number: 823 933 9
Functional description:
• Saving data from the inverter to the parameter module
• Loading data back from the parameter module to the inverter
• Operating status display
• The UBP11A parameter module requires the front option FSC11B or FIO11B.
Simultaneous operation of UBP11A and PC, RS-485 connection, MOVIDRIVE® or
MOVITRAC® is not possible.
• Meaning of the LED:
– Green: Data available
– Flashing green: Data transmission in progress
– Yellow: No data available
– Red: Copy fault

4 f
MBG11A setpoint control module
i
P Hz
4.10 MBG11A setpoint control module

Functional description:
• The MBG11A setpoint control module has 2 keys and a display. They make it
possible to adjust the speed remotely in the range from -100 %... +100 % fmax
(potentiometer f1).
• Up to 31 MOVITRAC® B units can be controlled at the same time (broadcasting).
• The MBG11A setpoint control module requires the front option FSC11B or FIO11B.
Technical data:
MBG11A option
Input voltage DC 24 V ±25 %
Current consumption approx. 70 mA
Setpoint resolution 1%
Serial interface1) RS-485 for connecting max. 31 MOVITRAC® inverters
(max. 200 m, (656 ft), 9600 baud)
Degree of protection IP 65
Ambient temperature –15 ... 60 °C (5 ... 140 °F)
1) with integrated dynamic terminating resistor
Dimensions and connection assignment:
[1] [1]
)
(2.8
70
38
(1.
5)
88 (3.5)
( )
60 (2.4)
[2] [2]
28 (1.1)
M4
[1] [1]
56 (2.2)
68 (2.7)
(3.5)
90 (3
MBG11A
RS+
24V
RS-
[1] Tapped hole on the rear

[2] Retaining holes for M4 screws

UWS11A interface adapter RS-232 / RS-485 for mounting rail
f 4
i
P Hz
4.11 UWS11A interface adapter RS-232 / RS-485 for mounting rail

Part number 822 689 X The FSC11B or FIO11B is required for connecting the UWS11A.
Ambient temperature 0 ... 40 °C (32 ... 104 °F)
Degree of protection IP20
Description The UWS11A option converts RS-232 signals, for example from the PC, into RS-485 signals. These RS-485
signals can then be routed to the RS-485 interface of the MOVITRAC® B.
The UWS11A option requires a DC 24 V voltage supply (Imax = DC 100 mA).
RS-232 interface The connection between UWS11A and PC is made using a commercially available serial interface cable
(shielded!).
RS-485 interface You can use the RS485 interface of the UWS11A to network up to 32 MOVITRAC® B units for communica-
tion (max. total cable length 200 m (656 ft)). Do not connect external terminating resistors because dynamic
terminating resistors are already installed.
Permitted cable cross-section: One core per terminal 0.20...2.5 mm2 (AWG 24...12)
2 cores per terminal 0.20...1 mm2 (AWG 24...17)
Dimension drawing
1 1 24V
X1: RS-485
2 2
3 3 RS+
4 4 RS-
75 (3.0)
5 5
X2: RS-232
UWS
5 (0.2) 68 (2.7)
22.5 (0.886)
83 (3.3)
The UWS11A option is mounted on a mounting rail (EN 50022-35 × 7.5) in the control cabinet.

4 f
UWS21B interface adapter RS-232/RS-485
i
P Hz
4.12 UWS21B interface adapter RS-232/RS-485

Part number 18204562 The FSC11B or FIO11B is required for connecting the UWS21B.
Ambient temperature 0... 40 °C (32 ... 104 °F)
Description The UWS21B option converts RS-232 signals, for example from the PC, into RS-485 signals. These RS-485
signals can then be routed to the interface of the MOVITRAC® B.
RS-232 interface The connection between UWS21B and PC connection is made using a standard serial interface cable
(shielded!).
RS-485 interface The connection between UWS21B and MOVITRAC® B is made using a serial interface cable with RJ10
plugs.
Scope of delivery The scope of delivery for the UWS21B option includes:
• UWS21B unit
• Serial interface cable with 9-pin sub D socket and 9-pin sub D connector to connect the UWS21B option
to the PC.
• Serial interface cable with two RJ10 plugs to connect UWS21B and MOVITRAC® B.
• CD-ROM with drivers and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio
UWS21B dimension draw-
ing 96 (3.8)
25 (0.98) 90 (3.5)
43 (1.7)
4.13 USB11A interface adapter USB/RS-485
Part number 824 831 1 The FSC11B or FIO11B is required for connecting the USB11A.
Ambient temperature 0 ... 40 °C (32 ... 104 °F)
Description The USB11A option is used to connect a PC or laptop with USB interface to the X44 interface of the
MOVITRAC® unit. The USB11A interface adapter supports USB1.1 and USB2.0.
USB interface The connection between USB11A and PC is made using a standard USB cable type USB A-B (shielded!).
Scope of delivery The scope of delivery for the USB11A option includes:
• USB11A unit
• USB connection cable type USB A-B to connect USB11A to PC.
• Serial interface cable with two RJ10 connectors to connect MOVITRAC® B and USB11A.
• CD-ROM with drivers and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio.
USB11A dimension draw-
ing 25 (0.98) 92.5 (3.64)
90 (3.5)
43 (1.7)

BW series braking resistors
f 4
i
P Hz
4.14 BW series braking resistors

4.14.1 General information
BW series braking resistors are adapted to the MOVITRAC® B inverter series. The type
of cooling is KS = self-cooling (air ventilation).
The resistor surfaces will heat up under a load of PN. Make sure that you select an
installation site that will accommodate these high temperatures. As a rule, braking resis-
tors are therefore mounted on the control cabinet roof.
Provide for a load derating of 4 % per 10 K from an ambient temperature of 45 °C
(118 °F). Do not exceed the maximum ambient temperature of 80 °C (176 °F). Note the
maximum permissible temperature of other components (e.g. MOVITRAC® B) when
installing in the control cabinet.
4.14.2 PTC braking resistors

Observe the following points for the PTC braking resistors:
• 4-quadrant operation is recommended for applications in which the level of
regenerative energy is low.
• The resistor protects itself (reversible) against regenerative overload by changing
abruptly to high resistance and no longer consuming any more energy.
• The inverter then switches off and signals a brake chopper fault (fault code 04).
Assignment of the PTC braking resistors:

Braking resistor type BW1 BW2 BW3 BW4
Part number 800 621 0 800 622 9 800 623 7 800 624 5
Ambient temperature ϑA -25 °C ... +60 °C (–13 °F ... 140 °F)
For MOVITRAC® B 0003 / 0004 (400/500 V) 0003 / 0004 (230 V)

4 f
i
P Hz
4.14.3 Flat design

The flat-design resistors have degree of protection IP54 and are equipped with internal
thermal overload protection (cannot be replaced). Depending on their type, you can in-
stall the resistors as follows:
• With support rail mounting FHS or submounting FKB under the heat sink. The
braking resistors in the submounting do not achieve the specified CDF power. The
FHS and FKB options are only suitable for the BW027-003 and BW072-003 braking
resistors.
• Attach to a mounting rail using a BS touch guard.
Caution: The load capacity applies for a horizontal mounting position [2]. Values are re-
duced by 10 % for a vertical mounting position [1].
[2]
[1]
230 V
Braking resistor type BW027-003 BW027-005
Part number 826 949 1 826 950 5
100 % cdf 230 W 450 W
50 % cdf 310 W 610 W
25 % cdf 410 W 840 W
12 % cdf 550 W 1200 W
6 % cdf 980 W 2360 W
Resistance value RBW 27 ±10% 27 ±10%
Trip current 1.0 A 1.4 A
Ambient temperature ϑA -20 °C ... +45 °C (-4 °F ... 113 °F)
For MOVITRAC® B 230 V 0003 ... 0022 0003 ... 0022
400 / 500 V
Braking resistor type BW072-003 BW072-005
Part number 826 058 3 826 060 5
100 % cdf 230 W 450 W
50 % cdf 310 W 600 W
25 % cdf 420 W 830 W
12 % cdf 580 W 1110 W
6 % cdf 1000 W 2000 W
Resistance value RBW 72 ±10% 72 ±10%
Trip current 0.6 A 1.0 A
Ambient temperature ϑA -20 °C ... +45 °C (-4 °F ... 113 °F)
For MOVITRAC® B 400/500 V 0003 ... 0040 0003 ... 0040

f 4
i
P Hz
4.14.4 Wire resistors and grid resistors

• Perforated sheet cover (IP20) open to mounting surface
• The short-term load capacity of the wire and grid resistors is higher than in the flat-
type braking resistors (→ MOVIDRIVE® B system manual, section "Selecting the
braking resistor").
• A temperature switch is integrated in the BW...-T braking resistor
• A thermal overcurrent relay is integrated in the BW...-P braking resistor
SEW-EURODRIVE recommends also protecting the wire and grid resistors against
overload using a bimetallic relay with trip characteristics of trip class 10 or 10A (in
accordance with EN 60947-4-1). Set the trip current to the value IF (→ following tables).
Do not use electronic or electromagnetic fuses because these can be triggered even in
case of short-term excess currents that are still within the tolerance range.
For braking resistors of the BW..-T / BW...-P series, you can connect the integrated tem-
perature sensor / overcurrent relay using a 2-core, shielded cable as an alternative to a
bimetallic relay. The cable entry for the BW...-T and BW...-P braking resistors can be run
from the front or the back (→ dimension drawing for BW... / BW...-T / BW...-P braking
resistors). Use filler plugs for tapped holes that are not connected.
The resistor surfaces will heat up under a load of PN. Make sure that you select an
installation site that will accommodate these high temperatures. As a rule, braking resis-
tors are therefore mounted on the control cabinet roof.
The performance data listed in the following tables indicate the load capacity of the
braking resistors depending on their cyclic duration factor. The cyclic duration factor cdf
of the braking resistor is indicated in % and is based on a cycle duration of ≤ 120 s.

4 f
i
P Hz
230 V
Type BW027- BW027- BW018- BW018- BW018- BW012- BW012- BW012-
006 012 015 035 075 025 050 100
Part number 822 422 6 822 423 4 – – – 821 680 0 – –
Type BW..-T part number – – 1820 416 3 1820 138 5 1820 139 3 – 1820 140 7 1820 141 5
Type BW..-P part number – – – – – 1820 414 7 – –
100 % cdf 0.6 kW 1.2 kW 1.5 kW 3.5 kW 7.5 kW 2.5 kW 5.0 kW 10 kW
50 % cdf 1.2 kW 2.3 kW 2.5 kW 5.9 kW 12.7 kW 4.2 kW 8.5 kW 17 kW
25 % cdf 2.0 kW 5.0 kW 4.5 kW 10.5 kW 22.5 kW 7.5 kW 15.0 kW 19.2 kW1)
12 % cdf 3.5 kW 7.5 kW 6.7 kW 15.7 kW 25.6 kW1) 11.2 kW 19.2 kW1) 19.2 kW1)
6 % cdf 6.0 kW 8.5 kW1) 11.4 kW 25.6 kW1) 25.6 kW1) 19.0 kW 19.2 kW1) 19.2 kW1)
Resistance 27 ±10% 18 ±10% 12 ±10%
Trip current IF 4.7 ARMS 6.7 ARMS 4.0 ARMS 8.1 ARMS 14 ARMS 10 ARMS 19 ARMS 27 ARMS
2
Connections Ceramic terminals 2.5 mm (AWG12) M8 stud
Tightening torque 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in 6 Nm / 50 lb in
Design Wire resistor Grid resistor
For MOVITRAC® B 0015 ... 0022 2 x parallel with 0110 0055 / 0075
1) Physical power limit due to DC link voltage and resistance value.
Type BW039-003 BW039-006 BW039-012 BW039-026 BW915 BW106 BW206

Part number 821 687 8 821 688 6 821 689 4 – – – –
Type BW..-T part number – – 1820 136 9 1820 415 5 1820 413 9 1820 083 4 1820 412 0
100 % cdf 0.3 kW 0.6 kW 1.2 kW 2.6 kW 16.0 kW 13 kW 18 kW
50 % cdf 0.5 kW 1.1 kW 2.1 kW 4.6 kW 27.0 kW 24 kW 32 kW
25 % cdf 1.0 kW 1.9 kW 3.8 kW 5.9 kW1) 30.7 kW1) 38.4 kW1) 38.4 kW1)
12 % cdf 1.7 kW 3.5 kW 5.9 kW1) 5.9 kW1) 30.7 kW1) 38.4 kW1) 38.4 kW1)
6 % cdf 2.8 kW 5.7 kW 5.9 kW1) 5.9 kW1) 30.7 kW1) 38.4 kW1) 38.4 kW1)
Resistance 39 ±10% 15 ±10% 6 ±10%
Trip current IF 2.8 ARMS 3.9 ARMS 5.5 ARMS 8.1 ARMS 28 ARMS 38 ARMS 42 ARMS
Connections Ceramic terminals 2.5 mm2 (AWG12) M8 stud
Tightening torque 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in 6 Nm / 50 lb in
For MOVITRAC® B 0015 ... 0022 2 x parallel 0150 / 2 x parallel with 0220/
with 0110 0300

f 4
i
P Hz
400 V
Type BW100-006 BW168 BW268 BW147 BW247 BW347
Part number 821 701 7 820,604 X 820 715 1 820 713 5 820 714 3 820 798 4
Type BW..-T part number 1820 419 8 1820 133 4 1820 417 1 1820 134 2 1820 084 2 1820 135 0
100 % cdf 0.6 kW 0.8 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 2.0 kW 4.0 kW
12 % cdf 3.6 kW 4.8 kW 6.7 kW 7.2 kW 12 kW 20 kW1)
6 % cdf 5.7 kW 7.6 kW 10 kW1) 11 kW 19 kW 20 kW1)
Resistance 100 ±10% 68 ±10% 47 ±10%
Trip current IF 2.4 ARMS 3.4 ARMS 4.2 ARMS 5 ARMS 6.5 ARMS 9.2 ARMS
2
Connections Ceramic terminals 2.5 mm (AWG12) Ceramic terminals 10
mm2 (AWG8)
Tightening torque 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in 1.6 Nm / 14 lb in
Design Wire resistor
For MOVITRAC® B 0015 ... 0040 0055 / 0075
Type BW039-012 BW039-026 BW039-050 BW018-015 BW018-035 BW018-075

Part number 821 689 4 – – 821 684 3 – –
Type BW..-T part number 1820 1369 1820 415 5 1820 137 7 – 1820 138 5 1820 139 3
Type BW..-P part number – – – 1820 416 3 – –
12 % cdf 7.0 kW 15.3 kW 24.0 kW1) 6.7 kW 15.7 kW 33.7 kW
6 % cdf 11.4 kW 24.0 kW1) 24.0 kW1) 11.4 kW 26.6 kW 52.2 kW1)
Resistance 39 ±10% 18 ±10%
Trip current IF 5.5 ARMS 8.1 ARMS 11.3 ARMS 9.1 ARMS 13.9 ARMS 20.4 ARMS
2
Connections Ceramic terminals 2.5 mm M8 stud Ceramic terminals 2.5 M8 stud
(AWG12) mm2 (AWG12)
Tightening torque 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in 6 Nm / 50 lb in 1.0 Nm / 8.9 lb in 6 Nm / 50 lb in
For MOVITRAC® B 0110 0110 0150 / 0220
Type BW915 BW012-025 BW012-050 BW012-100 BW0106 BW206

Part number – 821 680 0 – – – –
Type BW..-T part number 1820 413 9 – 1820 140 7 1820 141 5 1820 083 4 1820 412 0
Type BW..-P part number – 1820 414 7 – – – –
100 % cdf 16 kW 2.5 kW 5.0 kW 10 kW 13.5 kW 18 kW
50 % cdf 27 kW 4.2 kW 8.5 kW 17 kW 23 kW 30.6 kW
25 % cdf 45 kW1) 7.5 kW 15.0 kW 30 kW 40 kW 54 kW
12 % cdf 45 kW1) 11.2 kW 22.5 kW 45 kW 61 kW 81 kW
6 % cdf 45 kW1) 19.0 kW 38.0 kW 56 kW1) 102 kW 136.8 kW
Resistance 15 ±10% 12 ±10% 6 ±10%
Trip current IF 32.6 ARMS 14.4 ARMS 20.4 ARMS 28.8 ARMS 47.4 ARMS 54.7 ARMS
Connections M8 stud
Tightening torque 6 Nm / 50 lb in
Design Grid resistor
For MOVITRAC® B 0220 0300 0370 ... 0750

4 f
i
P Hz
4.14.5 Dimensions of BW braking resistors

Flat-design Flat-design resistors: The connecting lead is 500 mm (19.69 in) long. The scope of
delivery includes four M4 threaded bushes each of type 1 and 2.
B 1 C 2
M4
a
A
x1
12
x2 b (0.47)
Type Main dimensions [mm (in)] Fastening parts [mm (in)] Weight
A B C a b/c/e x1 x2 [kg (lb)]
BW072-003 110 (4.33) 80 (3.1) 15 (0.59) 98 (3.9) 60 (2.4) 6 (0.2) 10 (0.39) 0.3 (0.7)
BW027-003
BW072-005 216 (8.50) 80 (3.1) 15 (0.59) 204 (8.03) 60 (2.4) 6 (0.2) 10 (0.39) 0.6 (1)
BW027-005
Wire resistors
e d
a x1 c
A C
[kg (lb)]
A A BW..-T B C a b/c/e x1 d
BW027-006 486 (19.1) – 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 426 (16.8) 64 (2.5) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 2.2 (4.9)
BW027-012 486 (19.1) – 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 426 (16.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.3 (9.5)
BW100-006 (-T) 486 (19.1) 486 (19.1) 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 426 (16.8) 64 (2.5) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 2.2 (4.9)
BW168 (-T) 365 (14.4) 406 (16.0) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 326 (12.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 3.6 (7.9)
BW268 (-T) 465 (18.3) 486 (19.1) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 426 (16.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.3 (9.5)
BW147 (-T) 465 (18.3) 486 (19.1) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 426 (16.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.3 (9.5)
BW247 (-T) 665 (26.2) 686 (27.0) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 626 (24.6) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 6.1 (13)
BW347 (-T) 670 (26.4) 750 (29.5) 145 (5.71) 340 (13.4) 630 (24.8) 300 (11.8) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 13.2 (29.1)
BW039-003 286 (11.3) – 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 226 (8.9) 64 (2.5) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 1.5 (3.3)
BW039-006 486 (23.1) – 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 426 (16.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 2.2 (4.9)
BW039-012 (-T) 486 (19.1) 486 (19.1) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 426 (16.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.3 (9.5)
BW039-026-T – 586 (23.1) 120 (4.72) 275 (10.8) 530 (20.9) 240 (9.45) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 7.5 (17)

f 4
i
P Hz
Grid resistors
D
B
d a
c A
C
[kg (lb)]
A A BW..-T B C a b/c/e x1 d
BW012-025 295 (11.6) – 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 270 (10.6) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 8.0 (18)
BW012-025-P1) 295 (11.6) – 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 270 (10.6) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 8.0 (18)
BW012-050-T – 395 (15.6) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 370 (14.6) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 12 (26)
BW012-100-T – 595 (23.4) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 570 (22.4) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 21 (46)
BW018-015 600 (23.6) – 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 540 (21.3) 64 (2.5) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.0 (8.8)
BW018-015-P 620 (24.4) – 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 540 (21.3) 64 (2.5) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.0 (8.8)
BW018-035-T – 295 (11.6) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 270 (10.6) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 9.0 (20)
BW018-075-T – 595 (23.4) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 570 (22.4) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 21 (46)
BW039-050-T – 395 (15.6) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 370 (14.6) 380 (15.0) 10 (0.39) 10.5 (0.413) 12 (26)
BW915-T – 795 (31.3) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 770 (30.3) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 26 (57)
BW106-T – 795 (31.3) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 770 (30.3) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 32 (71)
BW206-T – 995 (39.2) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 970 (38.2) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 43 (95)
1) D = 355 mm (14.0 in)
PTC braking
resistors
L1
(0.18 ±0.004)
≥11 (0.43)
4.5 ±0.1
(1.3 ±0.01)
34 ±0.3
≥1 (0.04) >0
(L4)
max. 14
(L3) (0.55)
L L2
Type L1 L2 L3 L4 L
BW1 89 (3.5) 82 (3.2) 64 (2.5) 60 (2.4) 100 (3.94)
BW2 124 (4.88) 117 (4.61) 97 (3.8) 95 (3.7) 165 (6.50)
BW3 89 (3.5) 82 (3.2) 64 (2.5) 60 (2.4) 100 (3.94)
BW4 124 (4.88) 117 (4.61) 97 (3.8) 95 (3.7) 165 (6.50)

4 f
Touch guard BS
i
P Hz
4.15 Touch guard BS

Touch guard dimension drawing:
[1] Grommet
[2] Support rail mounting
Type Main dimensions [mm (in)] Mounting dimensions [mm (in)]

A B C b d e a x
BS-003 60 (2.4) 160 (6.30) 146 (5.75) 125 (4.92) 40 (1.6) 20 (0.8) 6 (0.2) 17.5 (0.689)
BS-005 60 (2.4) 160 (6.30) 252 (9.92) 125 (4.92) 40 (1.6) 20 (0.8) 6 (0.2) 17.5 (0.689)
Type Weight [kg Part number Mounting rail installa- BW

(lb)] tion
BS-003 0.35 (0.77) 813 151 3 Accessory S001 / part BW027-003 / BW072-003
BS-005 0.5 (1) 813 152 X number 822 194 4 BW027-005 / BW072-005
4.16 Mounting PTC braking resistors FKB10B

For sizes 0XS, 0S, 0L
65 (2.6)
125 (4.92)

Submounting FKB11/12/13B flat-design resistors
f 4
i
P Hz
4.17 Submounting FKB11/12/13B flat-design resistors

FKB..B is used for submounting flat-design resistors under the inverter.
Type Part number Size Braking resistor
230 V 400/500 V
FKB11B 1820 728 6 0XS BW4 BW2
FKB12B 1820 729 4 0S
BW027-003 BW072-003
FKB13B 1820 730 8 0L
The braking resistors in the submounting do not achieve the specified CDF power.
Dimension drawing:
185 (7.28) a
21.5 (0.846)
M5
d
b
MOVITRAC® B size a b d
0XS 55 (2.2) 196 (7.72) 220 (8.66)
0S 80 (3.1) 196 (7.72) 220 (8.66)
0L 80 (3.1) 284.5 (11.20) 308.5 (12.15)

4 f
Support rail mounting FHS11B/12B/13B
i
P Hz
4.18 Support rail mounting FHS11B/12B/13B

The FHS is used for support rail mounting of MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters and for
the submounting of flat-design resistors.
Type Part number Size Braking resistor
230 V 400/500 V
FHS11B 1820 724 3 0XS BW4 BW2
FHS12B 1820 725 1 0S
BW027-003 BW072-003
FHS13B 1820 727 8 0L
Dimension drawing:
196 (7.72) a
d
b
5 (0.2)
10 (0.39)
4.5
32.5
e (0.18)
(1.28)
MOVITRAC® B size a b d e
0XS 55 (2.2) 171.5 (6.752) 220 (8.66) 7.5 (0.30)
0S 80 (3.1) 171.5 (6.752) 220 (8.66) 32.5 (1.28)
0L 80 (3.1) 260.3 (10.25) 308.5 (12.15) 32.5 (1.28)

Line chokes ND
f 4
i
P Hz
4.19 Line chokes ND

The line choke assists in overvoltage protection. The line choke limits the charging
current when several inverters are connected together in parallel on the input end with
shared mains contactors. ND line filters have cRUus approval independent of the
MOVITRAC® B. The ambient temperature range is –25 ... +45 °C (–13 ... 113 °F). The
degree of protection is IP00 (EN 60529).
Line choke type ND 010-301 ND 020-151
Part number 826 972 6 826 973 4
Rated voltage VN 1 x AC 230 V ±10 %
Rated current IN AC 10 A AC 20 A
Power loss at IN PV 6W 10 W
Inductance LN 3 mH 1.5 mH
Terminal strip 4 mm2 (AWG10) 10 mm2 (AWG8)
Tightening torque 0.6 Nm / 5 lb in 1.5 Nm / 13 lb in
®
Suitable for MOVITRAC B
1-phase 230 V 0003 ... 0008 0011 ... 0022
Line choke type ND 020-013 ND045-013 ND085-013 ND150-013

Part number 826 012 5 826 013 3 826 014 1 825 548 2
Rated voltage VN 3 x AC 380 ... 500 V ± 10 %
Rated current IN AC 20 A AC 45 A AC 85 A AC 150 A
Power loss at IN PV 10 W 15 W 25 W 65 W
Inductance LN 0.1 mH
Terminal strip 4 mm2 (AWG10) 10 mm2 (AWG8) 35 mm2 (AWG2) M10/PE stud: M8
Tightening torque 0.6 ... 0.8 Nm / 5 2.5 Nm / 22 lb in 3.2 ... 3.7 Nm / M10 stud:
... 7 lb in 28 ... 33 lb in 10 Nm / 89 lb in
PE: 6 Nm / 50 lb in
Suitable for MOVITRAC® B
3-phase 100 % IN 0003 ... 0075 0110 ... 0220 0300 ... 0450 0550 ... 0750
400/500 V
125 % IN 0003 ... 0075 0110 ... 0150 0220 ... 0370 0450 ... 0750
3-phase 100 % IN 0003 ... 0055 0075 ... 0110 0150 ... 0220 0300
230 V
125 % IN 0003 ... 0037 0055 ... 0750 0110 ... 0150 0220 ... 0300

4 f
Line chokes ND
i
P Hz
4.19.1 Dimension drawing for ND 010-301 / ND 020-151
Type Main dimensions [mm (in)] Mounting dimensions [mm (in)] Weight
A B C1 C2 a c d e [kg (lb)]
ND 010-301 90 (3.5) 100 (3.94) 80 (3.1) 70 (2.8) 64 (2.5) 52 (2.0) 4.4 (0.17) 7.4 (0.29) 1.4 (3.1)
ND 020-151 90 (3.5) 100 (3.94) 90 (3.5) 70 (2.8) 64 (2.5) 52 (2.0) 4.4 (0.17) 7.4 (0.29) 1.4 (3.1)
4.19.2 Dimension drawing for ND 020-013 / ND 045-013 / ND 085-013 / ND 150-013

A
a
c
c
[1]
B b
1U1 1U2 1V1 1V2 1W1 1W2
[1]
C
[1] = Space for touch-safe terminal strips
Type Main dimensions [mm (in)] Mounting dimensions [mm (in)] Weight [kg (lb)]
A B C a b d/e
ND 020-013 85 (3.3) 60 (2.4) 120 (4.72) 50 (2.0) 31 (1.2) 5 - 10 (0.2 - 0.39) 0.5 (1)
ND 045-013 125 (4.92) 95 (3.7) 170 (6.69) 84 (3.3) 55 ... 75 (2.2 ... 3.0) 6 (0.2) 2.5 (5.5)
ND 085-013 185 (7.28) 115 (4.53) 235 (9.25) 136 (5.35) 56 (2.2) 7 (0.3) 8 (20)
ND 150-013 257 (10.1) 145 (5.71) 230 (9.06) 170 (6.69) 77 (3.0) 8 (0.3) 17 (37)

NF line filter
f 4
i
P Hz
4.20 NF line filter

The line filter suppresses interference emissions on the line side of inverters. The
ambient temperature range is –25 ... +45 °C (–13 ... 113 °F). The degree of protection
is IP20 (EN 60529). NF line filters have cRUus approval independent of the
MOVITRAC® B.
Type NF009-503 NF014-503 NF018-503 NF035-503 NF048-503
Part number 827 412 6 827 116 X 827 413 4 827 128 3 827 117 8
Rated current AC 9 A AC 14 A AC 18 A AC 35 A AC 48 A
Power loss 6W 9W 12 W 15 W 22 W
Earth-leakage current ≤ 25 mA ≤ 25 mA ≤ 25 mA ≤ 25 mA ≤ 40 mA
Connections 4 mm2 (AWG10) 10 mm2 (AWG8)
PE screw M5 M5/M6
Tightening torque 0.6 ... 0.8 Nm / 5 ... 7 lb in 1.8 Nm / 16 lb in
®
Suitable for MOVITRAC B
3 x 400/ 100 % IN 0003 ... 0040 0055 / 0075 – 0110 / 0150 0220
500 V
125 % IN 0003 ... 0030 0040 / 0055 0075 0110 0150
3 x 230 V 100 % IN 0015 / 0022 0037 – 0055 / 0075 0110
125 % IN 0015 0022 0037 0055 / 0075 –
Type NF063-503 NF085-503 NF115-503 NF150-503

Part number 827 414 2 827 415 0 827 416 9 827 417 7
Rated current AC 63 A AC 85 A AC 115 A AC 150 A
Power loss 30 W 35 W 60 W 90 W
Earth-leakage current ≤ 30 mA ≤ 30 mA ≤ 30 mA ≤ 30 mA
Connections 16 mm2 (AWG6) 35 mm2 (AWG2) 50 mm2 (AWG1/0) 50 mm2 (AWG1/0)
PE screw M6 M8 M10 M10
Tightening torque 3 Nm / 30 lb in 3.7 Nm / 33 lb in
Suitable for MOVITRAC® B
3 x 400/ 100 % IN 0300 0370 / 0450 0550 0750
500 V
125 % IN 0220 0300 / 0370 0450 0550 / 0750
3 x 230 V 100 % IN 0150 0220 0300 –
125 % IN 0110 / 0150 – 0220 / 0300 –

4 f
NF line filter
i
P Hz
Dimension drawing for line filter [mm (in)]:
Line filter Main dimensions

type
A B C
NF009-503 195 (7.68)
55 (2.2)
NF014-503 225 (8.86) 80 (3.1)
NF018-503 50 (2.0) 255 (10.0)
NF035-503 275 (10.8)
60 (2.4)
NF048-503 315 (12.4) 100 (3.94)
NF063-503 260 (10.2)
90 (3.5)
NF085-503 320 (12.6) 140 (5.51)
NF115-503 100 (3.94) 330 (13.0) 155 (6.10)
Line filter Hole dimen-

Installation dimensions Weight
type sion PE connection
kg (lb)
a b d
NF009-503 180 (7.09) 0.8 (2)
NF014-503 20 (0.79) 210 (8.27) 0.9 (2)
M5
NF018-503 240 (9.45) 5.5 (0.22) 1.1 (2.4)
NF035-503 255 (10.0) 1.7 (3.7)
30 (1.2)
NF048-503 295 (11.6) 2.1 (4.6)
M6
NF063-503 235 (9.25) 2.4 (5.3)
60 (2.4)
NF085-503 6.5 (0.26) M8 3.5 (7.7)
255 (10.0)
NF115-503 65 (2.6) M10 4.8 (11)

ULF11A folding ferrites
f 4
i
P Hz
4.21 ULF11A folding ferrites

Folding ferrites are used to reduce intereference emitted from the mains cable. Only use
folding ferrites with single-phase units.
The delivery scope contains 3 folding ferrites, which much be installed according to the
installation instructions.
Technical data:
Part number 1821 213 1 (3 pcs)
For cable diameter 10.5 ... 12.5 mm (0.413 ... 0.492 in)
Storage temperature –40 °C ... +85 °C (–40 ... +185 °F)
Operating temperature –25 °C ... +105 °C (–13 ... +221 °F)
Dimension drawing for folding ferrites:
28.8
(1.13)
Ø
1
(0 3.0
.5
12
)
.6
33 37 8)
(1 .5 4
.3
2) (1.
4.22 HD series output chokes

You can reduce the radiated interference of the unshielded motor cable by using an
output choke.
Output choke type HD001 HD002 HD003 output choke
Part number 813 325 5 813 557 6 813 558 4
Max. power loss PVmax 15 W 8W 30 W
Weight 0.5 kg (1 lb) 0.2 kg (0.4 lb) 1.1 kg (2.4 lb)
For cable cross sections 1.5 ... 16 mm2 ≤ 1.5 mm2 ≥ 16 mm2
AWG16 ... 6 ≤ AWG16 ≥ AWG6
Output choke type HD012 HD100 HD101

Part number 1821 217 4 829 837 8 829 838 6
Rated current AC 12 A
Power loss (at rated current) 11 W 20 W
Ambient temperature –10 °C ... +60 °C (+14 ... 140 °F)
Derating 3 % IN at 40 °C ... 60 °C (113 ... 140 °F)
Mains and the motor connec- ≤ 4 mm2 Screw terminals 4 mm2 (AWG 10)
tion ≤ AWG12
Inverter connection Cables with conductor end sleeves
Weight 0.55 kg (1.2 lb) 0.40 kg (0.88 lb) 0.48 kg (1.1 lb)
Can be sub-mounted for 0S 0L
sizes
for MOVITRAC® B ...-5A3 0005 / 0008 / 0011 / 0022 / 0030 / 0040
0015
for MOVITRAC® B ...-2A3 0005 / 0008 0011 / 0015 / 0022

4 f
HD series output chokes
i
P Hz
HD dimension drawing 001 / 002 / 003 [mm (in)]:
Output Main dimensions Installation Inside Hole

choke type dimensions diameter dimension
A B C a b d e
HD001 121 (4.76) 64 (2.5) 131 (5.16) 80 (3.1) 50 (2.0) 50 (2.0) 5.8 (0.23)
HD002 66 (2.6) 49 (1.9) 73 (2.9) 44 (1.7) 38 (1.5) 23 (0.91) 5.8 (0.23)
HD003 out- 170 (6.69) 64 (2.5) 185 (7.28) 120 (4.72) 50 (2.0) 88 (3.5) 7.0 (0.28)
put choke
Dimension drawing for HD012

5 (0.2)
[1]
158 (6.22)
178 (7.01)
130 (5.12)
24 (0.94)
5 (0.2)
80 (3.1)
45 (1.8)
[1] Length = 100 mm (3.94 in)

HD series output chokes
f 4
i
P Hz
Dimension drawing for HD100 / HD101:

208.5 (8.209)
80 (3.1)
45 (1.8)
M5
d
e
e
Output choke MOVITRAC® B b d e

type
HD100 Size 0S 226 (8.90) 248 (9.76) 196 (7.72)
HD101 Size 0L 314.5 (12.38) 336.5 (13.25) 284.5 (11.20)

4 f
EMC-module FKE12B/13B
i
P Hz
4.23 EMC-module FKE12B/13B

Using the EMC module, you can reach limit class C1 (B) on the input and output sides.
The EMC module is designed for 100 % operation and 125 % operation.
Type FKE12B FKE13B
Part number 829 590 5 829 591 3
Rated voltage 3 × AC 230 ... 500 V
Voltage drop in the filter (at rated <1%
current)
Rated current AC 12 A
Power loss (at rated current) 20 W
Ambient temperature -10 °C ... +60 °C (+14 ... 140 °F)
Derating 3 % IN at 40 °C ... 60 °C (113 ... 140 °F)
Mains and the motor connection Screw terminals 4 mm2 (AWG 10)
Inverter connection Cables with conductor end sleeves
Weight 0.40 kg (0.88 lb) 0.48 kg (1.1 lb)
Can be sub-mounted for sizes 0S 0L
®
for MOVITRAC B ...-5A3 0005 / 0008 / 0011 / 0015 0022 / 0030 / 0040
for MOVITRAC® B ...-2A3 0005 / 0008 0011 / 0015 / 0022
Dimension drawing:
208.5 (8.209)
80 (3.1)
45 (1.8)
M5
d
e
e
EMC module MOVITRAC® B b d e

FKE12B Size 0S 226 (8.90) 248 (9.76) 196 (7.72)
FKE13B Size 0L 314.5 (12.38) 336.5 (13.25) 284.5 (11.20)

HF output filter
f 4
i
P Hz
4.24 HF output filter

SEW output filters of the HF type are sine filters. Sine filters smoothen the output voltage
of inverters. Use output filters in the following cases:
• In group drives (several motor leads in parallel); the discharge currents in the motor
cables are suppressed.
• To protect the motor winding insulation of non-SEW motors, which are not suitable
for inverters.
• To protect against overvoltage spikes in long motor cables (> 100 m (328 ft))
NOTE
Do not use output filters in hoists because of the voltage drop in the filter!
NOTE
During project planning of the drive, take into account the voltage drop in the output
filter and consequently the reduced motor torque available. This applies particularly to
AC 230 V units with output filters.
Output filters attenuate interference emission via unshielded motor lines.
The ambient temperature is 0 ... +45 °C (32 ... 113 °F) (reduction: 3 % per K up to max.
60 °C (140 °F)).
Output filter type HF008-5031) HF015-5031) HF022-5031) HF030-5031) HF040-5031) HF055-5031)
Part number 826 029 X 826 030 3 826 031 1 826 032 X 826 311 6 826 312 4
2)
Rated voltage VN 3 × AC 200 V –10 % ... 3 × AC 500 V +10 %, 50/60 Hz
Earth-leakage current at UN I 0 mA
Power loss at IN PV 25 W 35 W 55 W 65 W 90 W 115 W
Degree of protection (EN 60529) IP20
Connections / M4 terminal stud
tightening torque 1.6 Nm ± 20 % / 14 lb in ± 20 %
3.1 kg (6.8
Weight 4.4 kg (9.7 lb) 10.8 kg (23.8 lb)
lb)
Assignment to AC 400/500 V units
Voltage drop at IN U < 6.5 % (7.5 %) at AC 400 V / < 4 % (5 %) at AC 500 V and fAmax = 50 Hz (60 Hz)
3)
Rated throughput current IN 400 V AC 2.5 A AC 4 A AC 6 A AC 8 A AC 10 A AC 12 A
at Vsupply = 3 × AC 400 V
Rated throughput current3) IN 500 V AC 2 A AC 3 A AC 5 A AC 6 A AC 8 A AC 10 A
Rated operation (100 %) 3) 0003 ... 0011 0015 0022 0030 0040 0055
Increased power (125 %) 3) 0003 ... 0005 0008/0011 0015 0022 0030 0040
Assignment to AC 230 V units
Voltage drop at IN U - < 18.5 % (19 %) at AC 230 V with fAmax = 50 Hz (60 Hz)
3)
Rated throughput current IN 230 V
AC 4.3 A AC 6.5 A AC 10.8 A AC 13 A AC 17.3 A AC 22 A
at Vsupply = AC 230 V
Nennbetrieb (100 %) 3) 0003 ... 0008 0011 0015/0022 - 0037 0055
Increased power (125 %) 3) 0003 ... 0005 0008 0011 ... 0022 - - 0037
1) Approved to UL/cUL in conjunction with MOVITRAC® inverters. SEW-EURODRIVE will provide a certificate on request.
2) A reduction of 6 % IN per 10 Hz applies above fN = 60 Hz for the rated through current IN.
3) Only applies to operation without VDC link connection. For operating the inverter with VDC link connection, observe the project planning
notes in the system manual of the respective inverter.

4 f
HF output filter
i
P Hz
Output filter type HF075-5031) HF023-4031) HF033-4031) HF047-4031) HF450-503

Part number 826 313 2 825 784 1 825 785 X 825 786 8 826 948 3
Rated voltage VN 2)
3 × AC 200 V – -10 %... 3 × AC 500 V +10 %, 50/60 Hz
Earth-leakage current at UN I 0 mA
Power loss at IN PV 135 W 90 W 120 W 200 W 400 W
Degree of protection (EN 60529) IP 20 IP20 IP 10
M4 terminal stud
Connections / 35 mm2 (AWG 2)
1.6 Nm ± 20 % /
tightening torque 3.2 Nm / 28 lb in
14 lb in ± 20 %
15.9 kg (35.1 16.5 kg (36.4
Weight 10.8 kg (23.8 lb) 23 kg (51 lb) 32 kg (71 lb)
lb) lb)
Assignment to AC 400/500 V units
Voltage drop at IN U < 6.5 % (7.5 %) at AC 400 V / < 4 % (5 %) at AC 500 V and fAmax = 50 Hz (60 Hz)
3)
Rated throughput current IN 400 V AC 16 A AC 23 A AC 33 A AC 47 A AC 90 A
Rated throughput current3) IN 500 V AC 13 A AC 19 A AC 26 A AC 38 A AC 72 A
0370/0450/
Rated operation (100 %) 3) 0075 0110 0150/03004) 0220
05504)/07504)
0300/0370/
Increased power (125 %) 3) 0055 0075 0110/02204) 0150 0450/05504)/
07504)
Assignment to AC 230 V units
Voltage drop at IN U < 18.5 % (19 %) at AC 230 V with fAmax = 50 Hz (60 Hz)
Rated throughput current3) IN 230 V
AC 29 A AC 42 A AC 56.5 A AC 82.6 A AC 156 A
at Vsupply = AC 230 V
Rated operation (100 %) 3) 0075 0110 0150/03004) 0220 0300
3)
Increased power (125 %) 0055 0075 0110/02204) 0150 0220/0300
1) Approved to UL/cUL in conjunction with MOVITRAC® frequency inverters. SEW-EURODRIVE will provide a certificate on request.
2) A reduction of 6 % IN per 10 Hz applies above fN = 60 Hz for the rated through current IN.
3) Only applies for operation without VDC link connection. For operation with VDClink connection, observe the project planning instructions
in the MOVITRAC® system manual, section "Project Planning/Connecting the optional power components".
4) Connect 2 HF... output filters together in parallel for operation with these MOVITRAC® units.

HF output filter
f 4
i
P Hz
HF...-503 dimension drawing [mm (in)]:
1 1
1
M
~
MOVIDRIVE®
MOVIDRIVE®
U2 V2 W2
V5
B
B
b
b
U1 V1 W1
4 5 6 8
MOVIDRIVE®
c c a
A C A C
Type Main dimensions

A B C
HF008 / 015 / 022 / 030-503 80 (3.1) 286 (11.3) 176 (6.93)
HF040 / 055 / 075-503 135 (5.31) 296 (11.7) 216 (8.50)
Type Installation dimensions Hole Ventilation clearances

dimension
a b c Top Bottom
HF008 / 015 / 022 / 030-503 – 265 (10.4) 7 (0.3) 100 (3.94) 100 (3.94)
HF040 / 055 / 075-503 70 (2.8) 283 (11.1) 7 (0.3) 100 (3.94) 100 (3.94)
HF450-503 dimension drawing [mm (in)]:

b
H
4 5 6 7 U VW
a
B T
Only the mounting position shown in the dimension drawing is permitted
Main dimensions
Output filter type
B H T
HF450-503 465 (18.3) 385 (15.2) 240 (9.45)
Hole dimen-
Installation dimensions Ventilation clearances
Output filter type sion
a b c Top Bottom
HF450-503 436 (17.2) 220 (8.66) 8.5 (0.33) 100 (3.94) 100 (3.94)

4 f
HF output filter
i
P Hz
HF...-403 dimension drawing [mm (in)]:
Type Main dimensions Standard mounting position

A B C/C1 b a
HF023-403 365/390 (14.4/
145 (5.71) 284 (11.2) 268 (10.6) 60 (2.4)
HF033-403 15.4)
385/400 (15.2/
HF047-403 190 (7.48) 300 (11.8) 284 (11.2) 80 (3.1)
15.7)
Type Horizontal mounting Hole

Ventilation clearances
position dimension
d c1 e At the side Top Bottom
HF023-403
HF033-403 210 (8.27) 334 (13.1) 6.5 (0.26) 30 (1.2) 150 (5.91) 150 (5.91)
HF047-403

Fieldbus connection
f 4
i
P Hz
4.25 Fieldbus connection

4.25.1 Fieldbus gateways
The fieldbus gateways convert standard fieldbuses into the SEW SBus. This means that
up to 8 inverters can be triggered using one gateway.
The controller (PLC or PC) and the MOVITRAC® frequency inverter exchange process
data such as a control word or speed using the fieldbus. You need an FSC11B commu-
nication option for connecting the MOVITRAC® B unit to the fieldbus gateway. This is
also necessary if the gateway is integrated in the inverter. The FIO11B module cannot
be used for connecting.
In general, you can also connect and operate other SEW units (such as MOVIDRIVE®
inverters) using the SBus.
There are two different versions of gateway functionality:
• Integrated in the inverter: The DFx..B fieldbus interface is mounted in
MOVITRAC® B.
PROFIBUS MOVITRAC® B
DeviceNet
EtherCAT
PROFINET
EtherNet/IP
PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe®
PROFINET / PROFIsafe® 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPS / PLC
SBus
• In separate housing: The DFx..B fieldbus interface is mounted in an UOH11B

housing. The UFI11A gateway is available for INTERBUS.
PROFIBUS MOVITRAC® B
DeviceNet
EtherCAT
PROFINET
EtherNet/IP
PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe®
PROFINET / PROFIsafe® 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPS / PLC
SBus
NOTE
If a fieldbus interface is factory-installed in MOVITRAC® B, then SBus address P881
is already factory set to "1".
In MOVITRAC® B without fieldbus interface, SBus address P881 is factory set to "0".

4 f
Fieldbus connection
i
P Hz
Gateways are available for the following bus systems for connection to fieldbuses.
Bus Separate housing Integrated in inverter1)
PROFIBUS DFP21B / UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFP21B
DeviceNet DFD11B/UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFD11B
EtherCAT DFE24B/UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFE24B
PROFINET DFE32B/UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFE32B
EtherNet/IP DFE33B / UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFE33B
PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe® DFS11B / UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFS11B
PROFINET / PROFIsafe® DFS21B / UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFS21B
INTERBUS UFI11A (823 898 7) –
1) Integration in inverter not for size 0XS.
MOVITRAC® B must be supplied with DC 24 V at terminals X12.8 and X12.9 when it

supplies the gateways.
Theory of The fieldbus gateways have standardized interfaces. Connect lower-level

operation MOVITRAC® B units to the fieldbus gateway via the SBus unit system bus.
Front view of MOVITRAC® B / Description Function
UOH 11B
LED H1 (red) System error (only for gateway
H1
functions)
H2 LED H2 (green) Reserved
X24 X terminal RS-485 interface for diagnostics
via PC and MOVITOOLS®
X24
MotionStudio

Fieldbus connection
f 4
i
P Hz
Dimension drawing
for UOH
4.5 (0.18)
5.5 (0.22)
234.5 (9.232)
224 (8.82)
185 (7.28)
257.5 (10.14)
28 (1.1)
30 (1.2) 22.5
(0.886) 100 (3.94)

4 f
Fieldbus connection
i
P Hz
4.25.2 Fieldbus interface DFP21B for PROFIBUS

Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the DFP21B option to con-
nect to higher-level automation systems via PROFIBUS DP and DP-V1 thanks to its
powerful, universal fieldbus interface.
Refer to the publication "Fieldbus interface DFP21B PROFIBUS DP-V1" for installation.
Electronics data
DFP21B option
External voltage U = DC 24 V (–15 %, +20 %)
DFP21B supply via X26 Imax = DC 200 mA
RUN Pmax = 3.4 W
BUS PROFIBUS proto- PROFIBUS DP and DP-V1 acc. to IEC 61158
FAULT col options
Automatic baud 9.6 kBaud ... 12 MBaud
rate detection
Connection tech- • Via 9-pin sub D connector
nology • Pin assignment acc. to IEC 61158
Bus termination Not integrated, must be implemented using suitable PROFI-
BUS connector with switchable terminating resistors.
Station address 1 ... 125, adjustable via DIP switches
Name of the GSD SEW_6009.GSD
file
DP ident number 6009hex = 24585dec
Application- • Length: 3 bytes
X30
specific parame- • Hex parameter setting 00,00,00

ter-setting data
(Set-Prm-User-
Data)
20
21 DP configura- See publication "Fieldbus Interface DFP21B PROFIBUS DP-
22 tions for V1".
23
DDLM_Chk_Cfg
24
25 Diagnostics data • Standard diagnostics: 6 bytes
26
AS
0 1

Fieldbus connection
f 4
i
P Hz
4.25.3 Fieldbus Interface DFD11B for DeviceNet

Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter together with the DFD11B option and its high-
performance universal fieldbus interface enable the connection to higher-level automa-
tion systems via the open and standardized DeviceNet fieldbus system.
Refer to the publication "DFD11B DeviceNet Fieldbus Interface" for installation.
Electronics data
DFD11B option
supply via X26 Imax = DC 200 mA
Pmax = 3.4 W
Communication Master/slave connection set according to DeviceNet specification
protocol version 2.0
Number of Can be set using DIP switch:
process data • 1 ... 24 process data words with polled I/O
words • 1 ... 4 process data words with bit-strobe I/O
Baud rate 125, 250 or 500 kbaud, can be set using DIP switch
Bus cable length For thick cable according to DeviceNet specification 2.0 appendix
B:
• 500 m (1640 ft) with 125 kBaud
• 250 m (820 ft) with 250 kBaud
• 100 m (656 ft) with 500 kBaud
Transmission ISO 11 98 - 24 V
level
Connection • 5-pin Phoenix-Kombicon terminal
technology • Pin assignment according to DeviceNet specification
MAC ID 0 ... 63, can be set using DIP switch
Max. 64 stations
Supported • Polled I/O
services • Bit-strobe I/O
• Explicit messages:
– Get_Attribute_Single
– Set_Attribute_Single
– Reset
– Allocate_MS_Connection_Set
– Release_MS_Connection_Set
EDS file name SEW_GATEWAY_DFD11B.eds

4 f
Fieldbus connection
i
P Hz
4.25.4 Fieldbus interface DFE24B for EtherCAT

Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the DFE24B option to
connect to higher-level automation systems via EtherCAT thanks to its powerful, univer-
sal fieldbus interface.
Refer to the publication "DFE24B EtherCAT Fieldbus Interface" for installation.
Electronics data
DFE24B option
Pmax = 3.4 W
Standards IEC 61158, IEC 61784-2
Baud rate 100 Mbaud full duplex
Connection 2 × RJ45 (8x8 modular jack)
technology
Bus termination Not integrated because bus termination is automatically
activated.
OSI Layer 1/2 Ethernet II
Station address Setting via EtherCAT master (→ Display with P093)
Name of the XML SEW_DFE24B.xml
file
Vendor ID 0x59 (CANopenVendor ID)
EtherCAT • CoE (CANopen over EtherCAT)
services • VoE (Simple MOVILINK protocol over EtherCAT)

Fieldbus connection
f 4
i
P Hz
4.25.5 Fieldbus interface DFE32B for PROFINET IO RT

Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the DFE32B option to
connect to higher-level automation systems via PROFINET IO RT thanks to its powerful,
universal fieldbus interface.
Refer to the publication "DFE32B PROFINET IO Fieldbus Interface" for installation.
Electronics data
DFE32B option
Pmax = 3.4 W
Application • PROFINET IO (Ethernet frames with frame identification
protocols 8892hex) to control and set parameters for the inverter.
• HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) for diagnostics using a
Web browser.
• SMLP (Simple Movilink Protocol), protocol used by
MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio.
Port numbers • 300 (SMLP)
used • 80 (HTTP)
Ethernet services • ARP
• ICMP (Ping)
Baud rate 100 Mbaud in full duplex process
Connection 2 x RJ45 with internal switch and auto crossing
technology
Addressing 4 byte IP address or MAC-ID (00:0F:69:xx:xx:xx)
Manufacturer ID 010Ahex
(vendor ID)
GSD file name GSML-V2.1-SEW-DFE-DFS-2Ports-YYYYMMTT.xml

4 f
Fieldbus connection
i
P Hz
4.25.6 DFE33B fieldbus interface for EtherNet/IP

Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the EtherNet/IP DFE33B
option to connect to higher-level automation systems via EtherNet/IP thanks to its
powerful, universal fieldbus interface.
Refer to the publication "DFE33B EtherNet/IP Fieldbus Interface" for installation.
Electronics data
DFE33B option
DFE33B External voltage U = DC 24 V (–15 %, +20 %)

MODULE
STATUS Pmax = 3.4 W
NETWORK Application • EtherNet/IP (Industrial Protocol) to control and set
STATUS
protocols parameters for the inverter.
Web browser.
xx xx xx xx
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) to assign
address parameter automatically.
Port numbers • 44818 (EtherNet/IP TCP)
used • 2222 (EtherNet/IP UDP)
• 300 (SMLP)
• 80 (HTTP)
• 67 / 88 (DHCP)
• ICMP (Ping)
ISO/OSI Layer 1/2 Ethernet II
ISO/OSI Layer 3/4 TCP/IP and UDP/IP
Baud rate 10 / 100 MBaud
technology
ETHERNET/IP
Manufacturer ID 013Bhex
(vendor ID)
EDS file name SEW_GATEWAY_DFE33B.eds

Fieldbus connection
f 4
i
P Hz
4.25.7 Fieldbus interface DFS11B for PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe®

Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the DFS11B option to
connect to higher-level automation systems via PROFIBUS with PROFIsafe® thanks to
its powerful, universal fieldbus interface.
Refer to the publication "DFS11B PROFIBUS DP-V1 with PROFIsafe® Fieldbus
Interface" for installation.
Electronics data
DFS11B option
Pmax = 3.4 W
PROFIBUS PROFIBUS DP and DP-V1 acc. to IEC 61158
protocol options
Automatic baud 9.6 kBaud ... 12 MBaud
rate detection
Connection • Via 9-pin sub D connector
technology • Pin assignment acc. to IEC 61158
Bus termination Not integrated, must be implemented using suitable PROFI-
BUS connector with switchable terminating resistors.
Station address 1 ... 125, adjustable via DIP switches
F address 1 ... 1022, adjustable via DIP switches
Name of the GSD SEW_6009.GSD
file
DP ident number 6009hex = 24585dec
Application- • Length: 3 bytes
specific parame- • Hex parameter setting 00,00,00
ter-setting data
(Set-Prm-User-
Data)
DP configura- See publication "DFS11B PROFIBUS DP-V1 with
tions for PROFIsafe® Fieldbus Interface".
DDLM_Chk_Cfg
Diagnostics data • Standard diagnostics: 6 bytes
NOTE
Safety-oriented applications are implemented using PROFIsafe® interfaces.
Refer to the publication "DFS11B PROFIBUS DP-V1 with PROFIsafe® Fieldbus Inter-
face" for installation.

4 f
Fieldbus connection
i
P Hz
4.25.8 Fieldbus interface DFS21B for PROFINET / PROFIsafe®

Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the DFS21B option to
connect to higher-level automation systems via PROFINET IO RT with PROFIsafe®
thanks to its powerful, universal fieldbus interface.
Refer to the publication "DFS21B PROFINET with PROFIsafe®" for installation.
Electronics data
DFS21B option
Pmax = 3.4 W
Application • PROFINET IO (Ethernet frames with frame identification
protocols 8892hex) to control and set parameters for the inverter.
Web browser.
Port numbers • 300 (SMLP)
used • 80 (HTTP)
• ICMP (Ping)
Baud rate 100 Mbaud in full duplex process
technology
F address 1 ... 1022, adjustable via DIP switches
Manufacturer ID 010Ahex
(vendor ID)
GSD file name GSML-V2.1-SEW-DFE-DFS-2Ports-YYYYMMTT.xml
NOTE
Safety-oriented applications are implemented using PROFIsafe® interfaces.
Refer to the publication "DF21B PROFINET with PROFIsafe® Fieldbus Interface" for
installation.

MOVI-PLC®
f 4
i
P Hz
4.26 MOVI-PLC®
4.26.1 Unit versions
The MOVI-PLC® controller is available in different variants, which differ in the modules
available from a range of libraries. Refer to the publication "MOVI-PLC® Controller" for
installation.
MOVI-PLC® unit type: Description
MOVI-PLC® DHP11B-T0 MOVI-PLC® basic controller
basic 1)
DHP11B-T1 Application version I includes the functions electronic cam and
synchronous operation in addition to the T0 version.
DHP11B-T21) Application version II includes, for example, handling in addition to the
T1 version.
MOVI-PLC® DHE41B Functionality of MOVI-PLC® basic, but also enormous power reserves
advanced and high-speed interfaces.
1) Versions T1 and T2 are only partly useful together with MOVITRAC® B. Please contact SEW-
EURODRIVE in this case.
4.26.2 Description
With the MOVI-PLC® basic DHP11B controller, SEW-EURODRIVE's product portfolio
offers a user-programmable controller compliant with the IEC 61131-3 and PLCopen
standards for the first time.
The DHP11B option is integrated ex works (not in size 0XS) or supplied in a separate
UOH housing. Only SEW EURODRIVE can carry out an expansion of the unit with this
option.
The MOVI-PLC® DHP11B.. controller is equipped with a PROFIBUS DPV1 slave
interface, 2 SBus interfaces (CAN), RS-485, and 8 digital inputs/outputs, of which 5 are
interrupt capable. The DHP11B control card can control 12 units simultaneously
(MOVIDRIVE®, MOVITRAC®, MOVIMOT®).

4 f
MOVI-PLC®
i
P Hz
4.26.3 Electronics data

Electronics data of MOVI-PLC® basic DHP11B:
Status display LEDs for
• Voltage supply I/O
• Firmware
• Program
• PROFIBUS
• System buses
Fieldbus • PROFIBUS DP and DPV1 to IEC 61158
• Automatic detection of baud rate from 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud
• Implement bus connection with suitable connector
• GSD file SEW_6007.GSD
• DP ident. number 6007hex (24579dec)
• Maximum 32 process data
System bus • 2 system buses (CAN) for control of 12 inverters and
CANopen I/O modules
• CAN layer 2 (SCOM cyclic, acyclic) or via the SEW
MOVILINK® protocol
• Baud rate: 125 kBaud ... 1 MBaud
• External bus terminator
• Address range: 0 ... 127
Engineering Via RS-485, PROFIBUS and the system buses
Panel operation Via RS-485 and CAN 2 (in preparation)
Connection • PROFIBUS: 9-pole sub-D connector according to IEC 61158
technology • System buses and I/Os: plug-in terminals
• RS-485: RJ10
Binary inputs/ 8 I/Os to IEC 61131-2; can be configured as inputs or outputs, 5 of
outputs which are interrupt-capable.
Memory • Program: 512 kByte
• Data: 128 kByte
• Retain: 24 kByte
Tools for startup • Programming languages
– STL
– ST
– LD
– FUP
– CFC
– AS
• Libraries for optimized inverter control

UWU52A switched-mode power supply
f 4
i
P Hz
4.27 UWU52A switched-mode power supply
UWU52A switched-mode power

supply
Input voltage 1 × AC 110 V ... AC 240 V
Voltage range AC 95 ... 265 V, DC 110 … 300 V
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum no-load current AC 40 mA
Rated input current
at 1 × AC 110 V AC 1.04 A
at 1 × AC 230 V AC 0.63 A
Output voltage DC 24 V (–1 % / +3 %)
Rated output current
at 40 °C DC 2.5 A
at 55 °C DC 2.0 A
Residual ripple < 50 mVeff
Interference voltage < 120 mVSS
Power loss < 5.5 W
Weight 0.23 kg (0.51 lb)
Working temperature 0 ... +55 °C (+32 ... +131 °F) (condensation not permitted)
Degree of protection IP20 (EN 60529)
Protection class I
Connection Screw terminals for cable cross sections 0.20 ... 2.5 mm2 (AWG24 ...
AWG13)
109 (4.29)
38 (1.5)
101 (3.98)
76 (3.0)
EN 60715TM35 4 (0.2)

kVA n Parameters
5 f
Explanation of the parameters
i
P Hz
5 Parameters
As a rule, you only set the parameters during startup and if servicing is required. You
can set the MOVITRAC® B parameters in various ways:
• With the keypad
• With the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio program on a PC via the RS-485 interface
• Copy the parameters using the keypad
If you set the parameters other than the factory setting: Enter changes in the parameter
list in the "Startup" section.
5.1 Explanation of the parameters

If a choice is offered, the factory setting is indicated in bold.
The parameters for motor startup are described in the section "Startup with the FGB key-
pad".
You can select the parameters on the FBG11B keypad as follows:
Selection in the FBG11B long menu
Selection in the FBG11B short and long menus
Direct selection in the FBG11B keypad and in the FBG11B long menu
Selection within FGB motor startup
The following symbols explain the parameters:

These parameters are switch-selectable and available in parameter sets 1
2 and 2.
1
These parameters can only be changed with INHIBITED inverter status (=
output stage at high resistance).
The startup function automatically changes this parameter.
AUTO
No. FBG Name Description

0__ Display values
00_ Process values
000 Speed (signed) [rpm] The displayed speed is the calculated actual speed.
001 User display for DBG11B The user display is defined by the following parameters:
• P850 Scaling factor numerator
• P851 Scaling factor denominator
• P852 User-defined unit
002 Frequency (signed) [Hz] Output frequency of the inverter.
004 Output current (amount) Apparent current of the rated unit current.
[% IN]
005 Active current (signed) [% IN] Active current in the range 0... 200 % of the rated unit current. The display value
is positive when torque is in positive sense of rotation, and negative when
torque is in negative sense of rotation.
008 DC link voltage [V] DC link voltage.

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

009 Output current [A] Apparent current at the inverter output, displayed in AC A.
01_ Status displays

010 Inverter status Status of the unit output stage:
• INHIBITED
• ENABLED
011 Operating status The following operating states are available:
• 24 V OPERATION
• CONTROLLER INHIBIT
• NO ENABLE
• CURRENT AT STANDSTILL
• ENABLE
• FACTORY SETTING
• ERROR
• SAFE STOP
012 Error status Fault number and fault in plain text.
013 Current parameter set Parameter set 1 or 2.
014 Heat sink temperature [°C] Heat sink temperature of the inverter.
02_ Analog setpoints

020 Analog input AI1 [V] Voltage 0 ... +10 V at analog input AI1. When S11 = ON and P112 AI1 operating
mode:
• = NMAX, 0 ... 20 mA: Display 0 ... 10 V = → 0 ... 20 mA
• = NMAX, 4 ... 20 mA: Display 2 ... 10 V = → 4 ... 20 mA
021 Analog input AI2 (optional) Unit: [V]
Voltage (-10 V ... +10 V)
03_ Binary inputs
030 Binary input DI00 Status of binary input DI00 (Fault reset = factory setting)
031 Binary input DI01 Status of binary input DI01 (CW/STOP= fixed assignment)
032 Binary input DI02 Status of binary input DI02 (CCW/STOP = factory setting)
033 Binary input DI03 Status of binary input DI03 (ENABLE = factory setting)
034 Binary input DI04 Status of binary input DI04 (n11/n21 = factory setting)
035 Binary input DI05 Status of binary input DI05 (n12/n22 = factory setting)
039 Binary inputs DI00 ... DI05 Collective display of binary inputs.
05_ Binary outputs

051 Binary output DO01 Status of binary output DO01 (/FAULT = factory setting)
052 Binary output DO02 Status of binary output DO02 (BRAKE RELEASED = factory setting)
053 Binary output DO03 Status of binary output DO03 (READY FOR OPERATION = factory setting)
059 Binary outputs DO01 ... DO03 Collective display of binary outputs.
07_ Unit data

070 Unit type The unit type is displayed, e.g. MC07B0008-2B1
071 Rated output current [A] The rated unit current is displayed in [A]
076 Firmware basic unit Part number and firmware version
077 DBG firmware Part number and firmware version

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

08_ Fault memory
080 ... Fault t-0 ... Fault t-4 (FBG11B The unit saves the following information when an error occurs. MOVITOOLS®
084 keypad: fault t-0 only) MotionStudio can display this information if required:
• P036/P053 Status of binary inputs/binary outputs
• P013 Current parameter set
• P011 Operating status of the inverter
• P010 Inverter status
• P014 Heat sink temperature
• P000 Speed
• P004 Output current
• P005 Active current
• Unit utilization
• P008 DC link voltage
09_ Bus diagnostics
094 PO 1 Setpoint [hex] Process data output word 1, setpoint
097 PI 1 Actual value [hex] Process data input word 1, actual value
1__ Setpoints/ramp generators
10_ Setpoint selection/frequency input
100 Setpoint source 0 / Bipolar / Fixed setpoint
The setpoint is provided by the analog input or the fixed setpoints. The unit
processes the fixed setpoints according to their value.
The speed is limited by the maximum set speed P302/P312 in the event of
a wire breakage.
1 / Unipolar / Fixed setpoint
The setpoint is provided by the analog input or the fixed setpoints. The unit
processes the fixed setpoints according to their value. The binary inputs
specify the direction of rotation.
2/ RS-485 / Fixed setpoint
The setpoint is provided by the RS-485 interface. The sign of the setpoint
determines the direction of rotation.
4 / Motor potentiometer / Fixed setpoint
Set the setpoint by programming the terminals Motor potentiometer up and
Motor potentiometer down accordingly. The motor potentiometer is a virtual
potentiometer that does not correspond to the setpoint potentiometer on the
unit.
6 / Fixed setpoint + AI1
The setpoint is calculated by adding the selected fixed setpoint and analog
input AI1. The binary inputs specify the direction of rotation. Furthermore,
P112 AI1 operation mode applies.
7 / Fixed setpoint * AI1
The value at the analog input AI1 serves as an evaluation factor for the
selected fixed setpoint (0 ... 10 V = 0 ... 100 %). If no fixed setpoint is
selected, nmin applies. The binary inputs specify the direction of rotation.
8 / MASTER SBus1
In master/slave mode, the setpoint is provided by the master via system bus
1. See P75x master/slave function.
9 / MASTER RS-485
The setpoint is provided by the master in master/slave mode via the RS-485
interface. See P75x master/slave function.
10 / SBus 1 / Fixed setpoint
The system bus specifies the setpoint. The sign of the setpoint determines
the direction of rotation.

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

100 Setpoint source 11 / Frequency setpoint input / Fixed setpoint
The frequency at binary input DI04 specifies the setpoint. Set the value with
the P102 Frequency scaling parameter. You can influence the value with
P110 AI1 scaling. The following parameters are included in the scaling if the
PI controller is activated:
• P254 PI actual value scaling
• P255 PI actual value offset
The optimum pulse duty factor (pulse width of the high and low signal)
should be 1 : 1. The factor determines the rising edge and the falling edge
of the input signal. Use P102 Frequency scaling to determine at which input
frequency the system setpoint 100 % is reached. The reference of the sys-
tem setpoint is set via P112 AI1 Operating mode. The direction of rotation is
set via the binary inputs CW/STOP and CCW/STOP.
Frequency scaling Minimum response time Resolution

(delay) Frequency input
25 ... 120 kHz 20 ms 50 Hz
12.5 ... 24.99 kHz 40 ms 25 Hz
10 ... 12.49 kHz 60 ms 16.7 Hz
1 ... 9.99 kHz 500 ms 2 Hz
Setpoint cascade
3000
· rpm
DI04 f P110
· P102
· P302
P112 P100
P302: Maximum speed in rpm
P110: Gain 0.1 ... 1 ... 10
P102: Frequency scaling 1 ... 120 kHz
P112: Operation mode setpoint
Example:
A setpoint generator with the value range 1 ... 50 kHz is to set the motor
speed of 30 ... 1500 rpm.
Set the following parameters for this:
• P102 Frequency scaling: 50 kHz
• P112 Operation mode setpoint: 3000 rpm
• Setpoint scaling P110: 0.5
14 / Bipolar AI2 / Fixed setpoint
The setpoint is provided by the optional analog input AI2 or the fixed
setpoints. The unit processes the fixed setpoints according to their value.

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

101 Control signal source 0 / Terminals
The binary inputs determine the control.
1 / RS-485
The RS-485 interface and the binary inputs determine the control.
3 / SBus
The system bus and the binary inputs determine the control.
4 / 3-Wire Control
The 3-wire control principle determines the control.
In this case, the enable and direction of rotation signals will respond edge-
controlled.
• Connect start key CW with contact to binary input "CW/Stop".
• Connect start key CCW with contact to binary input "CCW/Stop".
• Connect stop key with normally open input "Enable/Stop".
If you connect CW and CCW at the same time, the drive decelerates with
downwards ramp P131/P141.
If the 3-WIRE CONTROL control signal source is active and the drive is
started by a start edge: You can stop the drive using the STOP button when
the RUN/STOP buttons are enabled. Then you can restart the drive with the
RUN button without another start edge being required.
The unit stores a start edge if you stop the drive using the stop button. If you
then press the RUN key, the unit will enable the drive immediately.
Control source 3-WIRE CONTROL
X12:2 X12:
X12:2 = CW/Stop
X12:3 X12:3 = CCW/Stop
X12:4 = Enable/Stop
X10 = Setpoint input AI
X12:4 fA = Output frequency
f0 = Start/Stop frequency
CW = Clockwise
X10 CCW = Counterclockwise
X10:
t11 [1] = t11 UP
t11 [2] = t11 DOWN
fA [Hz] t13 = Stop ramp
102 Frequency scaling fFI1max Setting range: 0.1 ... 10 ... 120.00 [kHz]

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

103 FI1 reference 0 / nmax
1 / nreference
104 Setpoint reference speed Setting range: 0 ... 3000 ... 6000 rpm
nreference for frequency input FI1
and analog inputs AI1 and AI2
105 Wire breakage detection Wire breakage detection is only available in operating mode 4 ... 20 mA.
0 / No response
2 / Immediate stop/fault
The inverter performs an emergency stop with an error message. The
inverter inhibits the output stage and the brake is applied. The inverter
revokes the ready signal and sets the programmed fault output. A restart is
only possible after a fault reset has been performed during which the
inverter is reinitialized.
4 / Rapid stop / Fault
The inverter brakes the drive at the specified stop ramp (P136/P146). The
inverter brakes with DC braking in 2-quadrant operation. Once the stop
speed is reached, the inverter inhibits the output stage and the brake is
applied. The fault is signaled immediately. The inverter revokes the ready
signal and sets the programmed fault output. A restart is only possible after
a fault reset has been performed during which the inverter is reinitialized.
7 / Rapid stop / Warning
The fault response corresponds to STOP/FAULT, except the inverter does
not revoke the ready signal and the fault output is set.
Frequency input FI1 characteristic curve
The frequency input can be configured using a characteristic curve:
FI1 operating mode

Maximum speed
Setpoint reference speed
Normalized Speed
Input value input value Normalized setpoint setpoint
Normali- FI1charact.
zation curve
0 ... fFI1max [Hz] 0 ... +100 % –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % in rpm
106 FI1 characteristic curve x1 Setting range: 0 ... 100 %

107 FI1 characteristic curve y1 Setting range: –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
108 FI1 characteristic curve x2 Setting range: 0 ... 100 %
109 FI1 characteristic curve y2 Setting range: –100 ... 0 ... +100 %
A 2-point characteristic curve is described by the coordinates x1/y1 and x2/y2, with which the FI1 frequency input is
evaluated.
Normalized setpoint
+100 %
Factory setting
0% Input
0 Hz value
+100 %
example fFI1max

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

11_ Analog input 1 (0 ... +10 V)
The analog input can be configured using a characteristic curve.
AI1 operating mode

Maximum speed
Setpoint reference speed
Speed
Normalized setpoint
Input value input value Normalized setpoint in rpm
AI1
Normalization charact.
0 ... 10 V 0 ... +100 % –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
curve
Speed setpoint in %
PI controller setpoint in %
110 AI1 scaling Setting range: 0.1 ... 1 ... +10.

(up to firmware .12) Is used to define the slope of the setpoint characteristic curve. If you set the
scaling to the value "1", then the input voltage VI = 10 V at the analog input
corresponds to the operating mode of the analog input (P112). This is the
speed 3000 rpm or the set maximum speed (P302).
n
3000 rpm
/ nmax 10 2 1
0.5
0.1
U1
10 V
Slope of the setpoint characteristic curve
You can only use the first quadrant with a unipolar setpoint source. Negative
setpoint selections create the setpoint zero. P110 AI1 scaling has no effect if
you set the current input operating mode. You set the current input oper-
ating mode by setting P112 AI1 to NMAX, 0-20 mA or NMAX, 4-20 mA.
112 AI1 Operating mode 1 / 10 V, reference maximum speed
Voltage input with reference nmax (0 ... 10 V = 0 ... nmax). You can adjust the
characteristic curve with AI1 scaling.
Switch S11 = V.
5 / 0 ... 20 mA, reference maximum speed
Current input 0 ... 20 mA = 0 ... nmax. P110 AI1 Scaling has no effect.
Switch S11 = mA.
Current input 4 ... 20 mA = 0 ... nmax. P110 AI1 Scaling has no effect.
Switch S11 = mA.
7 / 0 ... 10 V, n-reference
8 / 0 ... 20 mA, n-reference

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

113 AI1 voltage offset Setting range: –10 V ... 0 ... +10 V
(up to firmware 12) The zero passage of the setpoint characteristic curve can be moved along
the UE axis.
nmax
n
P302/P312
Reference point
with positive offset
(P113)
U offset
UE
Reference point
with negative offset
-nmax
P302/P312
0V 1V 2V 3V 4V 5V 6V 7V 8V 9V 10V
116 AI1 characteristic curve x1 Setting range: 0 ... 100 %

117 AI1 characteristic curve y1 Setting range: –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
118 AI1 characteristic curve x2 Setting range: 0 ... 100 %
119 AI1 characteristic curve y2 Setting range: –100 ... 0 ... +100 %
A 2-point characteristic curve is described by the coordinates x1/y1 and x2/y2, with which the AI1 analog input is
evaluated.
Normalized setpoint
+100 %
Factory setting
0%
0V
0 mA Input
4 mA value
+100 %
Example 10 V
20 mA

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

12_ Analog input AI2 / FBG Setpoint generator (option)
Analog input AI2 is only available with the optional analog module FIO11B.
Maximum speed
Speed
Normalized
setpoint
Input value input value AI2 Normalized setpoint
Normali- in rpm
zation charact.
–10 V ... 0 ... 10 V –100 % ... curve –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
0 ... +100 %
Speed setpoint in %
PI controller actual value in %
120 AI2 operating mode 0 / No function

The setpoint at AI2 is not used; the external current limitation is set to
100 %.
1 / 0 ... ±10 V + Setpoint / 100 % corresponds to nmax
The evaluated setpoint at AI2 is added to setpoint 1 (= AI1) observing the
signs; the external current limitation is set to 100 % Imax.
2 / 0 ... 10 V current limit / 100 % corresponds to Imax
The input serves as external current limitation.
121 Addition FBG setpoint control 0 / Off
module The unit does not take into account the value from the setpoint generator of
the FBG11 keypad.
1 / ON
The value from the setpoint generator of the FBG11 keypad is added to any
set setpoint source bipolar/fixed setpoint, unipolar/fixed setpoint, RS-485/
fixed setpoint, frequency input/fixed setpoint or SBus/fixed setpoint. The
addition also affects fixed setpoints.
2 / On (without fixed setpoint)
The value from the setpoint generator of the FBG11 keypad is added to any
set setpoint source bipolar/fixed setpoint, unipolar/fixed setpoint, RS-485/
fixed setpoint, frequency input/fixed setpoint or SBus/fixed setpoint. The
addition does not affect fixed setpoints.
122 Direction of rotation FBG Setting the setpoint with the setpoint generator of the FBG11 keypad in FBG
manual operation manual operation.
0 / Unipolar CW
Adjustable speed: 0 ... + nmax.
1 / Unipolar CCW
Adjustable speed: 0 ... – nmax.
2 / Bipolar CW and CCW
Adjustable speed: – nmax ... + nmax.

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

126 AI2 characteristic curve x1 Setting range –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–10 V ... 0 ... +10 V)
127 AI2 characteristic curve y1 Setting range –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–nmax ... 0 ... +nmax / 0 ... Imax)
128 AI2 characteristic curve x2 Setting range –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–10 V ... 0 ... +10 V)
129 AI2 characteristic curve y2 Setting range –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–nmax ... 0 ... +nmax / 0 ... Imax)
The characteristic curve is described by the coordinates x1/y1 and x2/y2, with which the analog input is evaluated.
Normalized setpoint
+100 %
Factory setting
0% Input
–100 % 0V value
–10 V +100 %
Example +10 V
–100 %
13_ / 14_ Speed ramps 1 / 2

The ramp times refer to a setpoint change of n = 3000 rpm. Ramps t11/t21 up and t11/t21 down are effective when the setpoint is
changed. The stop ramp t13/t23 is in effect when the enable is withdrawn by pressing the STOP/RESET key or via the terminals.
130 / 140 Ramp t11 / t21 up Setting range 0 ... 2 ... 2000 [s]; Acceleration ramp
131 / 141 Ramp t11 / t21 down Setting range 0 ... 2 ... 2000 [s]; Deceleration ramp
2
1
134 / 144 Ramp t12 / t22 Setting range 0 ... 10 ... 2000 [s]
up = down The following applies to this ramp: UP = DOWN and CW = CCW.
Ramps t12/t22 are activated by a binary input (→ P601 ... P608), which is set to
the function "Ramp switchover".
135 / 145 S pattern t12 / t22 Setting range: 0 / 1 / 2 / 3 (0 = off, 1 = weak, 2 = medium, 3 = strong)
(In preparation) The 2nd ramp (t12/ t22) of parameter sets 1 and 2 can be rounded with 3
pattern grades to achieve a smoother acceleration of the drive.
Effect of the S pattern:
UE
2 Setpoint specification
1
Without S pattern
With S pattern
t
A started S pattern is interrupted by the stop ramp t13/t23 and a changeover to
ramp t11/t21. Revoking the setpoint or a stop via the input terminals causes the
started S curve to be completed. This means the drive can still accelerate in
spite of the withdrawal of the setpoint.
136 / 146 Stop ramp t13 / t23 Setting range 0 ... 2 ... 20 [s]; stop ramp when switching to the NO ENABLE
up = down operating status

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

139 / 149 Ramp monitoring 1 / 2 Setting range: YES / NO
If you set the deceleration ramps to a value that is a lot shorter than can be
physically accomplished in this system, the turning drive will be stopped after
expiration of the monitoring time. Such a setting will cause a fault signal and
increase brake wear.
This step also entails an increased setting of the respective ramp, if the ramp
2 timeout definitely appears in form of a preset ramp that cannot be traveled.
1
This parameter is an additional monitoring function for speed monitoring. This
parameter only applies to the downwards ramp. This means the parameter can
be used to monitor the downwards ramp, stop ramp or emergency stop ramp if
speed monitoring is not desired.
15_ Motor potentiometer functionn (se P100 Setpoint source)
The ramp times refer to a setpoint change of n = 3000 rpm.
150 Ramp t3 up = down Setting range 0.2 ... 20 ... 50 [s]
The ramp is in effect when using the terminal functions Motor pot. up and Motor
pot. down.
152 Save last setpoint off / OFF
The inverter starts with nmin:
• After power off and on
• After revoking ENABLE
If you use the motor potentiometer for permanent speed control, you will
have to set P152 Save last setpoint to OFF. Otherwise, error message F25
EEPROM will appear after about 100,000 storage operations.
Store only after setpoint change. If a fixed setpoint is deselected, the fixed
setpoint will be used as motor potentiometer value.
on / ON
The inverter starts with the last set motor potentiometer setpoint:
• After power off and on
• After revoking ENABLE
If a fixed setpoint is deselected, the old motor potentiometer setpoint will be
used again.
16_ / 17_ Fixed setpoints 1 / 2
You can activate the fixed setpoints via the binary inputs DI02 ... DI05 with the arguments n11/n21 / n12/n22 and activate FIXED SETP.
CHANGE (parameter 60_). You activate the fixed setpoints n13/n23 by assigning the functions n11/n21 and n12/n22 to two binary
inputs and applying a "1" signal to the two inputs.
160 / 170 Internal setpoint n11 / n21 Setting range –5000 ... 150 ... 5000 [rpm]
163 / 173 n11/n21 PI controller Setting range 0 ... 3 ... 100 [%] (see section Project planning / PI controller)
2__ Controller parameters
25_ PI controller (for an explanation of the parameters, refer to the project planning/PI-controller section)
P250 PI controller
Normal
Inverted
1
-1
P251 P-gain P301/311 nmax

P252 I-component P302/312 nmin
nmax
Setpoint Speed setpoint (value)
% - x
Control difference
nmin
Correcting
variable
Actual
value
AI1 %

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

250 PI controller 0 / Off
PI controller deactivated.
1 / Normal
PI controller switched on normally.
2 / Inverted
PI controller switched on inverted.
251 P-gain Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 64
252 I-component Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 2000 [s]
253 PI actual value mode 1 / 10 V, reference maximum speed
(up to firmware .12) 5 / 0 ... 20 mA, reference maximum speed
7 / 0 ... 10 V, n-reference
254 PI actual value scaling (up to 0.1 ... 1.0 ... 10.0
.12)
255 PI actual value offset (up to .12) 0.0 ... 100.0 [%]
3__ Motor parameters

Use this parameter group to adjust the inverter to the motor.
30_ / 31_ Limits 1 / 2
300 / 310 Start/stop speed 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 150 [rpm]
If the setpoint speed is higher than the start/stop speed, the drive will be
enabled with the start/stop speed. The transition to the setpoint speed is made
using the active speed ramp. If the setpoint speed is lower than the start/stop
speed, the setpoint will become active immediately.
2 In the VFC & hoist operating mode, the drive is always enabled with the rated
1 motor slip speed.
During startup, the start/stop speed is set to half the rated slip speed of the
AUTO connected motor.
When a stop command is performed, this setting also defines the slowest speed
at which the motor energization is switched off or at which post-magnetization
takes effect and the brake is applied.
301 / 311 Minimum speed 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 15 ... 5500 [rpm]
Speed value, the lower limit of which must not be exceeded even when zero is
selected as the setpoint. The minimum speed also applies when nmin < nstart/
stop has been set.
2 Caution:
1 • The slowest speed is 15 rpm when the hoist function is active, even if
nmin has been set to a lower value.
AUTO • To also enable the drive to move clear of the limit switches at low
speeds, nmin is not active when drive has contacted the hardware limit
switch.
302 / 312 Maximum speed 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 1500 ... 5500 [rpm]
No setpoint greater than the value set here can be selected. If you set nmin
> nmax, then the value set in nmax applies to the minimum speed and the
maximum speed.
In the VFC and VFC + DC BRAKING operating mode, you may enter the
following maximum speed values depending on the number of poles:
2 • 2-pole: max. 5500 rpm
1 • 4-pole: max. 4000 rpm
• 6-pole: max. 2600 rpm
AUTO • 8-pole: max. 2000 rpm
Fault 08 Speed monitoring may appear if you enter higher values.
When you perform a startup, the unit automatically sets the maximum
speed to the transition speed.

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

303 / 313 Current limit 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 150 [% IN]
The internal current limitation refers to the apparent current, i.e. the output
current of the inverter. The inverter automatically decreases the current limit
2 internally in the field weakening range. In this way, the inverter implements
1 a stall protection for the motor.
A current limit lower than the rated motor current is ignored when the hoist
AUTO function is activated.
32_ / 33_ Motor adjustment 1 / 2

Use function P320 / P330 Automatic adjustment for single-motor operation only. You can use this function for all motors and control
modes. The inverter measures the motor during premagnetization and sets the parameters P322 / P332 IxR adjustment and P321 / P
331 Boost. The inverter thereby determines a basic setting that is suitable for many applications. The values are saved in volatile
memory.
The motor is not calibrated if:
• P320/P330 Automatic adjustment = OFF.
• VFC & Flying start operating mode is active.
• The set pre-magnetization time is more than 30 ms shorter than the pre-magnetization time calculated during startup.
If you deactivate automatic adjustment, the values measured last will be not be saved in volatile memory.
The factory setting of parameters 321 ... 324 / 331 ... 334 depends on the motor.
320 / 330 Automatic adjustment 1 / 2 off / OFF
No automatic adjustment: The inverter does not calibrate the motor.
on / ON
Automatic adjustment: The inverter always measures the motor when
changing to ENABLE operating mode.
321 / 331 Boost 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 100 [%]
2 The value is calibrated during startup. The value is 0 for VFC operating modes.
1 Usually, this parameter does not have to be set manually. In exceptional cases,
manual setting may be necessary to increase the breakaway torque. In this
case, set the values to max. 30% or IxR. One third of IxR is set for V/f operating
modes. In exceptional cases, manual setting may be necessary to increase the
breakaway torque. In this case, set the values to max. 60 % or IxR.
322 / 332 IxR adjustment 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 100 [%]
The inverter sets the value automatically when P320 / P330 Automatic adjust-
ment = ON. Manual alterations to individual controller parameters are reserved
for optimization by specialists.
323 / 333 Premagnetization time 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 2 [s]
Premagnetization builds a magnetic field in the motor when you enable the
inverter.
2
324 / 334 1 Slip compensation 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 500 [rpm]
Slip compensation increases the speed accuracy of the motor. Enter the rated
AUTO slip of the connected motor as a manual entry. Do not enter a value more than
20 % different from the rated slip to compensate for fluctuations between vari-
ous motors.
The slip compensation is designed for a ratio smaller than 10 of load moment of
inertia to motor moment of inertia. If the ratio is larger and the drive vibrates,
then slip compensation must be reduced and even be set to 0 if necessary.
34_ IN UL monitoring
345 / 346 IN UL monitoring 1 / 2 Setting range 0.1 ... 500 A
The function cannot be deactivated. The factory setting depends on the rated
power of the MOVITRAC® B and will be added to the rated current of the SEW
2 motor with the same rating.
1 At 150 % rated motor current, the inverter switches off after 5 minutes.
At 500 % rated motor current, the inverter switches off after 20 seconds.
AUTO

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

4__ Reference signals
The following reference values are used for recording and signaling certain operating states. All signals of parameter group 4__ can be
output via binary outputs.
The signals are valid if the inverter has signaled ready after switch-on and there is no fault.
40_ Speed reference signal
The inverter issues the signal "1" at P403 if the speed is less than or greater
than the set reference speed.
Speed reference message

400 Speed reference value Setting range 0 ... 750 ... 5000 [rpm]
401 Hysteresis Setting range 0 ... 100 ... 500 [rpm]
402 Delay time Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 9 [s]
403 Signal = "1" when 0 / n < nref
1 / n > nref
43_ Current reference signal (in preparation)
Signal if the output current is greater or less than the reference value.
I [% IN]
Iref P431
P430
t
-Iref
P432
1
P433: | I | > Iref
t
0
1
P433: | I | < Iref t
0
Current reference signal
430 Current reference value Setting range 0 ... 100 ... 150 % IN
431 Hysteresis Setting range 0 ... 5 ... 30 % IN
432 Delay time Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 9 s
433 Signal = "1" when 0 / I < Iref
1 / I > Iref

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

44_ Imax signal (in preparation)
Signal if the inverter has reached the current limitation.
440 Hysteresis Setting range 0 ... 5 ... 50 % IN
441 Delay time Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 9 s
442 Signal = "1" when 0 / I < Imax
1 / I > Imax
45_ PI controller reference signal (see project planning/PI controller/reference signal)
These parameters determine whether and how the PI reference signal responds
450 PI actual value reference 0.0 ... 100.0 [%]
451 Signal = "1" when 0 / PI Actual value < PI Ref
1 / PI Actual value > PI Ref
5__ Monitoring functions
50_ Speed monitoring 1 / 2
The drive reaches the speed specified by the setpoint only with adequate torque. When the inverter reaches P303 Current limit it
assumes that it does not reach the required speed. Speed monitoring responds when the inverter exceeds the current limit for longer
than P501 delay time.
500 / 502 Speed monitoring 1 / 2 off / OFF
on / Motor / regenerative
Function of speed monitoring in motor and regenerative operation of the
motor
501 / 503 Delay time 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 10 [s]
2 The set current limit can be reached briefly during acceleration, deceleration, or
1
load peaks. You prevent the speed monitoring from responding too sensitively
by setting the delay time. Monitoring responds when the current limit is reached
for the duration of the delay time.
54_ Gear unit/motor monitoring (in preparation)
These parameters are used to set the response to be triggered in the event of a motor or gear unit problem. The binary inputs have to
be set accordingly for this purpose. Fault responses are triggered in the Controller inhibit or No enable inverter states.
The binary input signals are filtered with a time constant of 10 s. This means the signal has to be present for at least 10 s.
Response Description
No response Neither a fault is displayed nor a fault response occurs. The fault which is signaled is completely ignored.
Display error The fault is displayed and the fault output is set (if programmed). The unit has no other fault responses. The fault
can be reset.
Immediate stop / The inverter performs an immediate switch-off and a fault is signaled. The output stage is inhibited and the brake is
fault applied. The ready signal is revoked and the error output is set, if programmed. A restart is only possible after the
fault has been reset during which the inverter is reinitialized.
Rapid stop / fault The drive is braked with the set stop ramp t13/t23. Once the stop speed is reached, the output stage is inhibited
and the brake is applied. The fault is signaled immediately. The ready signal is revoked and the error output is set,
if programmed. A restart is only possible after the fault has been reset during which the inverter is reinitialized.
Rapid stop / The drive is braked with the set stop ramp t13/t23. Once the stop speed is reached, the output stage is inhibited
warning and the brake applied. The fault is signaled immediately. The fault is signaled via the terminal, if programmed. The
ready signal is not revoked. The drive restarts without unit re-initialization if the error is rectified by an internal
procedure or by an error reset.

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

540 Response to drive vibration / Factory setting: Display error
warning Once the drive vibration sensor signals a warning, the inverter will respond with
the set response.
541 Response to drive vibration / Factory setting: Rapid stop / warning
fault Once the drive vibration sensor signals a fault, the inverter will respond with the
set response.
542 Response to oil aging / warning Factory setting: Display error
Once the oil aging sensor signals a warning, the inverter will respond with the
set response.
543 Response to oil aging / fault Factory setting: Display error
Once the oil aging sensor signals a fault, the inverter will respond with the set
response.
544 Oil aging / overtemperature Factory setting: Display error
Once the oil aging sensor signals overtemperature, the inverter will respond
with the set response.
545 Oil aging / ready signal Factory setting: Display error
Once the oil aging sensor signals ready, the inverter will respond with the set
response.
549 Response to brake wear Factory setting: Display error
Once the brake wear sensor signals a fault, the inverter will respond with the set
response.
6__ Terminal assignment
60_ Binary inputs (DI01 with fixed assignment to CW/STOP)
Effect of 0 signal 1 signal Takes effect when: No enable
0: No function: – – –
1: Enable / Stop: Stop at P136 Stop ramp Enable no
2: CW / stop: Stop at P131 Ramp down Enable CW no
3: CCW / stop: Stop at P131 Rampe down Enable CCW no
4: n11 / n21 no
5: n12 / n22 no
6: Fixed setpoint switchover: Fixed setpoints n11/n12/n13 Fixed setpoints n21/n22/n23 yes
7: Parameter set switchover: Parameter set 1 Parameter set 2 yes
8: Ramp switchover: t11/t21 active t12/t22 active yes
9: Motor potentiometer up: – Increase setpoint no
10: Motor potentiometer down: – Decrease setpoint no
11: /External fault: External fault – no
12: Fault reset: Reset on positive edge 0 to 1 yes
19: Free-running slave: Master-slave mode Free-running slave yes
20: Setpoint acceptance active: Do not accept Accept setpoint no
26: TF signal (DI05 only): Motor overtemperature No signal no
27: Vibration / warning Sensor signals warning Sensor does not signal warning yes
28: Vibration / fault Sensor signals fault Sensor does not signal fault yes
29: Brake wear Brake is worn Brake OK yes
30: /Controller inhibit: Inhibited Enable yes
33: Oil aging / warning Sensor signals warning Sensor does not signal warning yes
34: Oil aging / fault Sensor signals fault Sensor does not signal fault yes
35: Oil aging / overtemperature Sensor signals overtemperatureSensor does not signal overtemperatureyes
36: Oil aging / ready Sensor not ready Sensor ready yes
Fixed setpoints
n11/n21 = 0 and n12/n22 = 0: External setpoints only
n11/n21 = 1 and n12/n22 = 0: n11/n21
n11/n21 = 0 and n12/n22 = 1: n12/n22
n11/n21 = 1 and n12/n22 = 1: n13/n23
601 Binary input DI02 Factory setting: CCW/stop
602 Binary input DI03 Factory setting: Enable
603 Binary input DI04 Factory setting: n11/n21
604 Binary input DI05 Factory setting: n12/n22
608 Binary input DI00 Factory setting: Fault reset

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

62_ Binary outputs (for controlling the brake rectifier use only binary output DO02)
Effect of 0 signal 1 signal
0: No function: – –
1: /Fault: Collective fault signal –
2: Ready: Not ready ready
3: Output stage on: Unit inhibited Unit enabled and motor is energized
4: Rotating field on: No rotating field Rotating field
5: Brake released: Brake applied Brake released (not with DO03)
8: Parameter set: 1 active 2 active
9: Speed reference signal: n > nref / n < nref (P403) n < nref / n > nref (P403)
11: Set/actual value comparison signal: n ≠ nsetp n = nsetp
12: Current reference signal: I > Iref / I < Iref (P433) I < Iref / I > Iref (P433)
13: Imax signal: I < Imax / I = Imax (P442) I = Imax / I < Imax (P442)
21: IPOS output: – Depends on IPOS program
22: /IPOS fault: IPOS fault signal –
23: PI ACTUAL VALUE REF.: – PI controller actual value has exceeded the set threshold
24: Ex-e current limit active (in preparation)
27: Safe stop: The display "Safe stop" is not safety-related and must not be used as a safety function.
30: /Ixt warning (in preparation) Normal operation Ixt > 115 %
31: /Ixt fault (in preparation) Normal operation Ixt > 125 %
620 Binary output DO01 Factory setting: /FAULT
621 Binary output DO02 Factory setting: BRAKE RELEASED
622 Binary output DO03 Factory setting: READY (selection 5 (BRAKE RELEASED) not possible)
64_ Analog outputs AO1 (optional)

Analog output AO1 is only available with the optional analog module FIO11B
Output value obtained

100 % = output value Output
AO1
Normalization characteristic
–3000 ... 0 ... 3000 rpm –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % 0 ... 10 V
curve
–100 ... 0 ... 100 Hz 0 / 4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 100 % = 0 ... 150 % IN
= 0 ... 150 % unit utilization

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

640 Analog output AO1 0 / No function
The value 0 % evaluated by the characteristic curve is displayed.
1 / Ramp generator input (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 3000 rpm
Setpoint speed at the input of the internal ramp generator
2 / Setpoint speed (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 3000 rpm
Valid setpoint speed (output ramp generator or correcting variable of the
higher-level controller)
3 / Actual speed (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 3000 rpm
4 / Actual frequency (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 100 Hz
Rotating field frequency
5 / Output current (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 150 % Irated
Apparent current
6 / Apparent current (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 150 % Irated
7 / Unit utilization / 100 % corresponds to 150 % unit utilization
Current unit utilization
11 / Actual speed (signed) / ±100 % corresponds to ±3000 rpm
12 / Actual frequency (signed) / ±100 % corresponds to ±100 Hz
Rotating field frequency
641 AO1 reference (as of firmware 0 / 3000 rpm , 100 Hz, 150 %
.13) 1 / nmax
2 / nset reference
642 AO1 Operating mode 0 / No function
Output: Always 0 V or 0 mA
2 / 0 ... 20 mA/100 % corresponds to 20 mA
3 / 4 ... 20 mA/100 % corresponds to 20 mA
4 / 0 ... 10 V/100 % corresponds to 10 V
646 AO1 Characteristic curve x1 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
–3000 rpm ... 0 ... +3000 rpm
–100 Hz ... 0 ... 100 Hz
0 ... 100 % IN
0 ... 100 % = 0 ... 150 % unit utilization
647 AO1 Characteristic curve y1 0 ... 100 %
648 AO1 Characteristic curve x2 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
–3000 rpm ... 0 ... +3000 rpm
–100 Hz ... 0 ... 100 Hz
0 ... 100 % IN
0 ... 100 % = 0 ... 150 % unit utilization
649 AO1 Characteristic curve y2 0 ... 100 %
The characteristic curve is described by the coordinates x1/y1 and x2/y2, with which the analog output is
evaluated.
Output
+100 %
+10 V
+20 mA (x2/y2)
–100 %
–3000 rpm Example factory setting
Output
–100 Hz (x1/y1) value
–150 % IN +100 %
0% 0%
–nmax +3000 rpm
0V 0 rpm
–nSetpt ref. +100 Hz
0/4 mA 0 Hz
0% +150 % IN
+nmax
+nSetpt ref.

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

7__ Control functions
All settings with regard to the fundamental control properties of the inverter are defined within parameter group 7__. This parameter
group comprises functions which the inverter automatically executes when they are activated.
70_ Operating mode 1 / 2
This parameter is used to set the basic operating mode of the inverter. Setting on the keypad.
VFC / V/f characteristic curve: Default setting for asynchronous motors. Suitable for general applications, such as conveyor belts,
trolleys, and hoists with counterweight.
VFC & hoist: The hoist function automatically provides all functions necessary for operating an unbalanced hoist. For safety reasons,
make sure to activate monitoring functions that prevent the drive from starting. Monitoring functions:
• Monitoring the output current during the premagnetization phase
• Avoiding sag when the brake is released
The unit detects the following incorrect configurations and displays them with the following faults:
• 2 or 3-phase motor phase interruption: F82 = Output open
• Premagnetization time too short or incorrect motor/inverter combination: F81 = Error start condition
• Motor phase failure due to active speed monitoring P500/501: F08 = Fault n-monitoring
Caution!
• The control must be designed in such a way that the direction of rotation of the drive can only be changed when it is at a
standstill.
• A single-phase motor phase failure cannot always be detected reliably.
• SEW-EURODRIVE strongly recommends activating speed monitoring.
• Prerequisite for correct performance of the hoist function: Motor brake controlled by the inverter.
• Speed monitoring is set by changing parameters 500 / 502 and 501 / 503. The sagging of hoists cannot be avoided safely when
monitoring is deactivated or the delay time is set too long.
VFC & DC braking / V/f characteristic curve & DC braking: DC braking means the asynchronous motor brakes by using current
injection. The motor brakes without braking resistor on the inverter. The following figure shows the braking torque profile when the
braking current is the same as the rated motor current.
M/M N
1 During braking, the inverter injects a constant current with a rotating-
field frequency of 5 Hz. The braking torque = 0 at standstill. A greater
braking torque acts at a slower speed; the braking torque drops as
the speed increases. The braking time and consequently the duration
of the braking current depends on the load connected to the motor.
DC braking stops at a rotating-field frequency of the motor of 5 Hz.
The motor stops along the stop ramp. Rated motor current is used for
the current injection. In all cases, the inverter limits the current to
0 max. 125 %IN. See "Brake function" for information about the brake
0 5 Hz fN f control system.
Caution!
It is not possible to enable a directed stop or to observe a certain ramp using DC braking. The main purpose of DC braking is to
drastically reduce the time the motors need for coasting to a halt.
The following graphic shows the braking profile.
n1 = Setpoint speed
[1] = Enable
t13 = Stop ramp
tB = Braking phase

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

VFC & flying start function: The flying start function lets you synchronize the inverter to an already running motor. This is used in
particular with drives that are not braked actively, run on for a long time or are turned by a flowing medium, e.g. pumps and fans. The
maximum flying start time is approx. 200 ms.
P320 Automatic adjustment is deactivated in the FLYING START operating mode. It is important that the IxR value P322 stator
resistance is set correctly to ensure that the flying start function is performed properly.
Startup of an SEW motor: The IxR value is set for an SEW motor at operating temperature. This value has to be reduced if flying start
takes place with a cold motor.
The IxR value is measured at startup when a non-SEW motor is started up with MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio.
n1 = Setpoint speed
nM = Motor speed
[1] = Enable
The flying start function does not function if an output filter is connected to the inverter.
Caution!
Do not use the flying start function in hoist applications.
700 / 701 Operating mode 1 / 2 0 / VFC (field-oriented voltage flux control mode)
2 / VFC & hoist (field-oriented control mode for hoist applications, can only be
set in MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio)
2 3 / VFC & DC braking (field-oriented controlled mode with DC braking)
1
4 / VFC & flying start function (field-oriented control mode with flying start
function)
21 / V/f characteristic curve (voltage/frequency controlled mode)
22 / V/f & DC braking (voltage/frequency controlled mode with DC braking)
AUTO
71_ Standstill current 1 / 2

With activated standstill current function, the inverter injects a current in the motor at standstill. This allows the inverter to fulfill the
following functions:
• When the ambient temperature of the motor is low, the standstill current prevents the risk of condensation and freezing (in
particular of the disc brake). Set the amount of current in such a way that the motor does not overheat. Recommendation: Motor
housing should be hand hot.
• With activated standstill current, you can start the motor without premagnetization. Recommendation: For hoists, set to 45 ...
50 %.
You can activate the standstill current function by setting P710 = 0. Set the standstill current in % of the rated motor current. The stand-
still current cannot exceed the current limit (P303).
You can switch off the standstill current by setting /CONTROLLER INHIBIT to 0.
When the standstill current function is activated, the output stage remains enabled even in the "No enable" status to inject the motor
standstill current.
The standstill current is not switched off by pressing the stop/reset key.
You have to set the function of an input terminal to controller inhibit to activate the standstill current function. Else the output stage will
be energized directly.
710 / 711 Standstill current 1 / 2 0 ... 50 % IMot
2
1
72_ Setpoint stop function 1 / 2
Use the P720 / P723 Setpoint stop function to enable the inverter automatically depending on the main setpoint. The inverter is
enabled with all the necessary functions, such as premagnetization and brake control. It is important that you also enable the drive via
terminals.

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

720 / 723 Setpoint stop function 1 / 2 off / OFF
on / ON
721 / 724 Stop setpoint 1 / 2 0 ... 30 ... 500 [rpm]
2
722 / 725 1 Start offset 1 / 2 0 ... 30 ... 500 [rpm]
73_ Brake function 1 / 2
MOVITRAC® B inverters are capable of controlling a brake installed on the motor. The brake function acts on the
binary output which has the assignment of the "/BRAKE" function (24 V = brake released). Use DO02 for the brake
control system.
The brake is always applied when /CONTROLLER INHIBIT = 0.
Enable "1"
"0"
t
Pre-magnetization time Post-magnetization time
Brake t
Brake
release time application time
n t
n setpt
n start-stop
0
t
"1"
/BRAKE
"0"
t
Output stage ON "1"
"0"
t
Rotating field ON "1"
"0"
t
731 / 734 Brake release time 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 2 [s]
This parameter determines how long the motor will remain at a standstill after
expiration of the premagnetization time and how much time the brake has to
release.
732 / 735 2 Brake application time 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 2 [s]
1 You can use this parameter to set the time required for the mechanical brake to
apply. This parameter prevents a sagging of the drive especially in hoists.
74_ Speed skip function
The skip window center and skip width are values and automatically have an effect on positive and negative
setpoints when activated. The function is deactivated by setting the skip width to 0.
Output speed
P741/P743 Ramps
P740/P742
t11/t12
n-setpoint n-setpoint setpoint
(integrator (integrator
n-setpoint input) output)
positive and negative
The "Speed skip" function makes it possible to prevent the motor speed from remaining within a certain speed
window. This suppresses vibration and noise, in particular in machines with pronounced mechanical resonance.
740 / 742 Skip window center 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 1500 ... 5000 rpm
741 / 743 Skip width 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 300 rpm
2
1

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

75_ Master/slave function (in preparation)
The master-slave function allows for implementing automatical functions such as speed synchronization, shared
load and torque control (slave). The RS-485 interface or the system bus interface can be used as the communica-
tion link. P100 "Setpoint source" must then be set to master SBus or master RS485. The process output data PO1
... PO3 (P870, P871, P872) are automatically set by the firmware. A programmable terminal function, "Slave free
runn." (P60_/P61_) makes it possible to separate the slave from the master setpoint of the master and switch it to
a local control mode (like control source bipolar/fixed setpoint).
For the slave, the process data P87x are automatically assigned as follows:
– PO1 = Control word 1
– PO2 = Speed or current in M-control
– PO3 = IPOS PO data
– PI1 = Status word 1
– PI2 = Speed
– PI3: IPOS PI data
Slave
Master
= Master SBus
0 = Master RS-485
P750 RS-485 / SBus
Slave setpoint P751 P100 setpoint source
= Bipolar fixed setpoint /
Scaling 1 fixed setpoint
slave setpoint
If P100 = Master ,
0 Enable via master * )
P101 control source
1 = Input terminals
Slave free-running
P811 RS-485 Group address or P882 SBus Group address must be set to the same value in master and slave. For
master/slave operation via RS-485 interface, set P811 RS-485 Group address to a value greater than 100. For
operation via system bus (e.g. master/slave operation), the bus terminating resistors at the start and end of the
system bus must be activated.
Connection check
• System bus (SBus): P883 SBus timeout interval is in effect when there is a communication link via the SBus. If
P883 SBus timeout interval = 0, there is no monitoring of data transmission via the SBus.
• RS-485 interface: A connection check is always in effect if the communication link takes place via the RS-485
interface; P812 RS-485 timeout interval does not have any function. The slave inverter must receive a valid
RS-485 telegram within the fixed time interval of t = 500 ms. If the time is exceeded, the slave drives are
stopped at the emergency stop ramp and fault signal F43 "RS485 timeout" is issued.
Overview of functions of master/slave operation
Speed synchronization: Master Slave
Master controlled P750 Slave setpoint: P100 Setpoint source:
Slave controlled SPEED (485+SBus) MASTER SBus
P700 Operating mode 1: MASTER RS485:
VFC P700 Operating mode 1:
VFC & hoist VFC
V/f characteristic curve VFC & hoist
V/f & DC braking V/f characteristic
V/f & DC braking
750 Slave setpoint The setpoint to be transferred to the master is set on the master. The
"MASTER-SLAVE OFF" setting must be retained on the slave.
• MASTER-SLAVE OFF
• SPEED (RS485)
• SPEED (SBus1)
751 Scaling slave setpoint Setting range: –10 ... 0 ... 1 ... 10
The setpoint sent from the master is multiplied by this factor which is set in the
slave.
76_ Manual operation
760 Locking RUN/STOP keys (see off / OFF (RUN/STOP keys are activated and can be used for starting and
Startup / External setpoint selec- stopping the motor)
tion) on / ON (RUN/STOP keys are locked and therefore do not function)
77_ Energy-saving function

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

770 Energy-saving function off / OFF
on / ON
8__ Unit functions
80_ Setup
800 Short menu (FBG11B only) long
short
Use P800 to switch from the factory set short menu to the detailed parameter
menu.
801 Language DBG60B Language selection only for DBG60B keypad.
You can use P802 to reset the factory settings stored in the EPROM for almost all parameters. You can also reset the unit to its initial
delivery condition.
Selecting DELIVERY STATE also resets the parameters listed above.
Statistics data have to be reset separately with P804 Reset statistics data. Setting the parameter to YES will restore the factory
settings. SEt appears on the display while the factory settings are being restored. The previous operating status of the inverter appears
on the display after the factory settings have been restored. P802 automatically reverts to NO.
Activating the factory setting causes almost all parameter values to be overwritten. Save the set values using MOVITOOLS®
MotionStudio before you restore the factory settings. Once the factory setting function has been used, you must adapt the parameter
values and terminal assignments in accordance with the requirements.
802 Factory setting No (do not restore factory setting)
Hrs / standard (restore factory setting)
All / delivery status (for starting up IEC motors)
NEMA / delivery status (for starting up NEMA motors)
By setting P803 Parameter lock = ON, you can prevent any change to the parameters. An exception are P841 Manual reset and P803
itself. The parameter lock makes sense after optimizing the settings of the MOVITRAC® B. To enable changes to parameters again, set
P803 Parameter lock = OFF.
The parameter lock also affects parameter changes via the RS-485 and SBus interfaces.
803 Parameter lock off / OFF (you can change all parameters)
on / ON (You can change P803 and P840 only)
P804 Reset statistic data lets you reset the statistical data stored in the EEPROM (fault memory). These data are not affected when
restoring the factory settings. The parameter automatically reverts to NO after the reset.
804 Reset statistical data No action (no reset is performed)
Fault memory (the content of the fault memory is reset)
805 Rated mains voltage Setting range 50 ... 500 V
806 Copy DBG → MOVITRAC® B Yes / No
The parameter data in the DBG60B are transferred to MOVITRAC® B.
807 Copy MOVITRAC® B → DBG Yes / No
The parameter data in MOVITRAC® B are transferred to DBG60B.
808 24 V output voltage Off
On
809 IPOS enable This parameter lets you activate the integrated positioning and sequence
control

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

81_ Serial communication.
810 RS-485 address Setting range 0 ... 99
P810 sets the address of the MOVITRAC® B for communication via the serial
interface.
MOVITRAC® B units are always set to the address 0 on delivery. To avoid prob-
lems during data exchange in serial communication with several inverters,
SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you do not use address 0.
811 RS-485 group address Setting range 100 ... 199
812 RS-485 timeout interval Setting range 0 ... 650 [s]
82_ Brake operation 1 / 2
P820/P821 lets you switch 4-quadrant operation on and off. 4-quadrant operation is possible if you connect a braking resistor to
MOVITRAC® B. P820/P821 must be set to OFF if there is no braking resistor connected to MOVITRAC® B, which means regenerative
operation is not possible. In this operating mode, the MOVITRAC® B unit attempts to extend the deceleration ramp. As a result, the
generated power is not too great and the DC link voltage remains below the switch-off threshold.
If the regenerative power becomes too great despite the extended deceleration ramps, then MOVITRAC® B may switch off with the
F07 DC link overvoltage fault. In this case you have to extend the deceleration ramps manually (P131).
Therefore, do not set unreasonably short deceleration ramps!
The unit responds with fault F34 Ramp/timeout if the ramp is set too short and the ramp which can actually be achieved is significantly
longer than the set value.
820 / 821 4-quadrant operation 1 / 2 off / OFF
on / ON
2
1
83_ Fault responses
The fault EXT. FAULT triggers ENABLED in inverter status only. P830 programs the fault response that is triggered by input terminal
programmed to /EXT. FAULT.
830 Response terminal "external 2 / Immediate stop/fault
fault" The inverter performs an emergency stop with an error message. The
833 Response to RS-485 timeout inverter inhibits the output stage and the brake is applied. The inverter
revokes the ready signal and sets the programmed fault output. A restart is
836 Response to SBus timeout only possible after a fault reset has been performed during which the
inverter is reinitialized.
4 / Rapid stop / fault (factory setting for P830)
The inverter brakes the drive at the specified stop ramp (P136/P146). The
inverter brakes with DC braking in 2-quadrant operation. Once the stop
speed is reached, the inverter inhibits the output stage and the brake is
applied. The fault is signaled immediately. The inverter revokes the ready
signal and sets the programmed fault output. A restart is only possible after
a fault reset has been performed during which the inverter is reinitialized.
7 / Rapid stop / warning (factory setting for 833 / 836)
The fault response corresponds to STOP/FAULT, except the inverter does
not revoke the ready signal and the fault output is set.
84_ Reset behavior
840 Manual reset Yes
Parameter P840 corresponds to MOVITRAC® B resets the present fault. P840 automatically reverts to NO
the STOP/RESET key. after the reset. The motor immediately restarts to the specified setpoint if all
required signals are present after the reset has been performed. Activating
the manual reset does not have any effect if there is no fault present.
No
No reset.

kVA n Parameters
5 f
i
P Hz

85_ Scaling actual speed value
Scaling actual speed value defines a user-specific display parameter P001 User display. For example, the user display is to be shown
in 1/s. Such a setting requires a scaling factor of 1/60. This means the numerator scaling factor has to be set to 1 and the denominator
scaling factor to 60. The user-defined unit 1/s is entered in P852.
Actual P850 1 001 25

=
speed value P851 60 USER [1/s ]
(1500 rpm )
P852
Scaling actual speed value (example)

850 Scaling factor numerator Setting range 1 ... 65535
851 Scaling factor denominator Setting range 1 ... 65535
852 User travel unit Factory setting: rpm
Up to a maximum of eight ASCII characters; is displayed in P001 User display.
853 Scaled speed FBG 0 / Speed
1 / Scaled speed
86_ Modulation 1 / 2
P860/P861 lets you set the nominal cycle frequency at the inverter output. If P862/P863 is set to OFF, the cycle frequency may vary
automatically depending on the unit utilization.
860 / 861 PWM frequency 1 / 2 4 kHz
8 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
862 / 863 2 PWM fix 1 / 2 on / ON (no automatic change of the cycle frequency by the inverter)
1
off / OFF (autonomous change of the switching frequency by the inverter
depending on the utilization)
87_ Process data parameter setting (for more information, refer to the MOVITRAC® B Communication manual)
Mit P870 ... P872 lets you define the content of process output data words PO1 ... PO3. This definition is necessary so MOVITRAC® B
can allocate the appropriate setpoints.
The following process output assignments are available:
0 / No function: The content of the process output data word is ignored.
1 / Setpoint speed: Speed setpoint entry in rpm.
5 / Max. speed: Maximum speed (P302).
8 / Ramp: Ramp time for setpoint selection (P130 / P131).
9 / Control word 1: Control signals for start/stop, etc.
10 / Control word 2: Control signals for start/stop, etc.
11 / Setpoint speed [%]: Selection of a speed setpoint in % of P302.
12 / IPOS PO data Specification of a 16-bit coded value for IPOSplus®
13 / PI controller setpoint [%]: PI controller setpoint
870 Setpoint description PO1 Factory setting: Control word 1
871 Setpoint description PO2 Factory setting: Speed
872 Setpoint description PO3 Factory setting: No function

Parameters kVA n
f 5
i
P Hz

P873 ... P875 can be used to determine the content of the process input data words PI1 ... PI3. This definition is necessary so
MOVITRAC® B can allocate the appropriate actual values.
The following PI assignments are available:
0 / No function: The content of the process input data word is 0000hex.
1 / Actual speed: Momentary actual speed value in rpm.
2 / Output current: Momentary active current of the inverter in % of IN.
3 / Active current: Momentary output current of the inverter in % of IN.
6 / Status word 1: Status information of the inverter.
8 / Actual speed [%]: Momentary actual speed value in % of P302.
9 / IPOS PI data: IPOS Process input data.
10 / PI controller actual value [%]: Actual value of the PI controller.
873 Actual value description PI1 Factory setting: STATUS WORD 1
874 Actual value description PI2 Factory setting: SPEED
875 Actual value description PI3 Factory setting: OUTP.CURRENT
876 PO data enable no / NO
The last valid process output data remain in effect.
yes / YES
The process output data that was last sent from the fieldbus control become
effective.
88_ Serial communication SBus
880 SBus protocol Setting range SBus
0 / MoviLink
1 / CANopen
881 SBus address Setting range 0 ... 63
P881 lets you set the system address of the MOVITRAC® B unit. This address
enables the MOVITRAC® B to communicate, for example, with PC, PLC or
MOVIDRIVE® via the system bus.
MOVITRAC® B units are always set to the address 0 on delivery. To avoid prob-
lems during data exchange in serial communication with several inverters,
SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you do not use address 0.
882 SBus group address Setting range 0 ... 63
P882 lets you group several MOVITRAC® B units for communication via the
SBus interface. All MOVITRAC® B units with the same SBus group address can
be addressed using a multicast telegram via this address. MOVITRAC® B does
not acknowledge data received via group address. For example, the SBus
group address makes it possible to send setpoint selections to a group of
MOVITRAC® B inverters at the same time. An inverter with group address 0 is
not assigned to a group.
883 SBus timeout interval Setting range 0 ... 650 [s]
Use P883 to set the monitoring time for data transmission via the system bus.
MOVITRAC® B performs the fault response Stop/fault if there is no data traffic
via the system bus for the period set in P815. Data transmission via the system
bus is not monitored when P883 is set to 0.
884 SBus baud rate Use P816 to set the transmission speed of the system bus.
125 / 125 kBaud
250 / 250 kBaud
500 / 500 kBaud
1000 / 1000 kBaud
886 CANopen address Setting range 1 ... 2 ... 127
P886 is used to set the address for serial communication with the SBus.

Project Planning
6 Schematic procedure
6 Project Planning
6.1 Schematic procedure
Clarification of
→ • Technical data and requirements
• Basic conditions
• System interfacing
↓
Calculating the relevant application data
• Stationary, dynamic, regenerative power
• Speed
↓
Gear unit selection
Determine
• gear unit version, gear unit size, gear unit reduction ratio
Check the gear unit utilization (Mamax ≥ Ma(t))
↓
Motor selection
→ • Convert torque and speed for the motor shaft
• Define the motor
↓
Check
← • Maximum occurring torque Mmax < 1.5 x MN
• Required motor speed < nN
• Thermal load by taking into account setting range and cyclic duration factor
↓
Selecting the MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter
• Motor/inverter assignment
• Continuous power, peak power
• Installation conditions
• FBG11B keypad option
• DBG60B plain text keypad option
• FSC11B communication option
• FIO11B analog module option
• UWS11A / UWS21B / USB11A interface adapter option
↓
Selecting the braking resistor
• based on the calculated regenerative power and the cyclic duration factor cdf
↓
Grouping components
• Line choke, output choke, touch guard
↓
← Check whether all requirements are met.

Project Planning
Options for standard applications
6
6.2 Options for standard applications

Refer to the following table for available options for simple applications. Conditions for
simple applications:
• Vertical movement: Braking time is less than 25 % of cyclic duration factor CDF and
no longer than 30 s.
• Horizontal movement: Braking time is less than 12 % of cyclic duration factor CDF
and no longer than 15 s.
Braking resistor
Type MC07B Horizontal move- Output choke Line filter
Vertical movement
ment
0003 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012
0004 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012
0005 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012
230 V 1-
0008 BW027-003 BW027-005 HD012 Integrated1)
phase
0011 BW027-003 BW027-005 HD012
0015 BW027-003 BW027-006 HD012
0022 BW027-005 BW027-012 HD012
0003 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012
0004 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012
0005 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012
0008 BW027-003 BW027-006 HD012
0011 BW027-003 BW027-006 HD012
Integrated1)
0015 BW027-003 BW027-006 HD012
230 V 3- 0022 BW027-006 BW027-012 HD012
phase 0037 BW027-006 BW027-012 HD012
0055 BW012-025 BW012-025 HD001
0075 BW012-015 BW012-025 HD001
0110 BW012-025 BW012-050 HD003 NF048-503
0150 2 × BW012-025 2 × BW012-050 HD003 NF063-503
0220 2 × BW106 2 × BW106 HD003 NF085-503
0300 2 × BW106 2 × BW106 HD003 NF115-503
0003 BW072-003 BW072-003 HD012
0004 BW072-003 BW072-003 HD012
0005 BW072-003 BW072-003 HD012
0008 BW072-003 BW072-005 HD012
0011 BW072-003 BW072-005 HD012
0015 BW072-003 BW168 HD012
Integrated1)
0022 BW072-005 BW168 HD012
0030 BW072-005 BW268 HD012
0040 BW168 BW268 HD012
400 V 3-
0055 BW147 BW247 HD001
phase
0075 BW147 BW347 HD001
0110 BW039-026 BW039-050 HD001
0150 BW018-035 BW018-075 HD003 NF035-503
0220 BW018-035 BW018-075 HD003 NF048-503
0300 BW018-075 BW915 HD003 NF063-503
0370 2 × BW012-025 BW106 HD003 NF085-503
0450 BW106 BW206 HD003 NF085-503
0550 BW106 BW206 HD003 NF115-503
0750 BW106 3 × BW012-100 HD003 NF150-503
1) Additional components are required to reach limit value class C1.

Project Planning
6 Description of applications
6.3 Description of applications

6.3.1 Project planning for trolleys
The motor load in the dynamic sections determines the peak motor power to be dimen-
sioned. The thermal load determines the required continuous motor power. Refer to the
travel cycle for determining the thermal load. The speed profile is the significant factor
in determining the self-cooling of the motor.
6.3.2 Project planning for hoists

In practice, you must take particular account of thermal and safety-relevant criteria when
sizing hoists.
The control must be designed so that the direction of rotation of the drive can only be
changed when it is at a standstill.
Caution!
Speed monitoring is set by changing parameters 500 / 502 and 501 / 503. The sagging
of hoists cannot be avoided safely when monitoring is deactivated or the delay time is
set too long.
Thermal In contrast to trolleys, hoists require approx. 70 ... 90 % of the rated motor torque 90 %
considerations of rated torque of the motor.
Starting torque The highest operating torque is required for acceleration with maximum load in the
upwards hoisting direction.
As a rule, design the 4-pole gearmotor for a maximum speed of
• 2100 rpm (70 Hz) at a transition speed of 1500 rpm (50 Hz)
• 2500 rpm (83 Hz) at a transition speed of 1800 rpm (60 Hz)
This means the gear unit input speed is increased by a factor of 1.4. This is why you
have to select a 1.4 times higher gear unit reduction ratio. The motor will not lose any
torque on the input shaft in the field weakening range (50 ... 70 Hz or 60 ... 83 Hz). The
higher gear unit ratio compensates for the inversely proportionate decrease in torque in
relation to speed. Furthermore, the startup torque is 1.4 times greater. Further
advantages are that the speed range is greater and the self-cooling of the motor more
powerful.
Hoist voltage/speed characteristic curve
a = Recommended voltage/speed characteristic curve and resultant torque profile

B = Torque reserve range
Select the motor power for hoists according to the load type:

Project Planning
Speed-torque characteristic curve
6
• S1 (100 % cdf): Select the motor power of the next higher motor type than the
selected inverter power, e.g. for lengthy upwards travel or continuous elevators.
• S3 (40 % cdf): Select the motor power according to the selected inverter power.
Activate the hoisting function by selecting operating mode P700 = VFC & hoist regard-
less of the above guidelines.
6.4 Speed-torque characteristic curve

The speed-torque characteristic curve looks as follows:
M P
MN PN
1.6
Mmax
1.4
1.2
1.0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 25 % 50 % 75 % 100 % 125 % 150 % 175 % 200 % n
nN
[1] M in S1 100 % cdf

[2] P in S1 100 % cdf
To characteristic curve 1:
Below 20 Hz, the drive cannot be loaded with the rated mtoor torque. The reduced
speed decreases the self-cooling of the motor. As a result, the motor would heat up
excessively.
This limit is not caused by the inverter. Motors with sufficient forced cooling can even be
loaded with a rated torque below 20 Hz.

Project Planning
6 Motor selection
6.5 Motor selection

6.5.1 Basic recommendations
• Only use motors with at least Thermal class F.
• Use the TF thermistor or TH bimetallic switch.
• Preferably use 4-pole motors. This applies particularly if you are operating
gearmotors with a high oil filling level because of their vertical mounting position. The
churning losses are very great with 2-pole motors.
6.5.2 Voltage-frequency characteristic curve

The asynchronous motor follows a load-dependent voltage/frequency characteristic in
V/f operating modes. The motor model is continuously calculated in the VFC operating
mode. At startup, set the characteristic curve with rated motor voltage and rated motor
frequency. The setting determines the speed-dependent torque and power characteris-
tics of the asynchronous motor.
The following figure shows an example of the voltage/frequency characteristic curves of
an asynchronous AC motor 230 / 400 V, 50 Hz.
UA [V]
1 3
400
2
230
0
0 50 87 f [Hz]
1 Star connection; 400 V, 50 Hz

2 Delta connection 230 V / 50 Hz
3 Delta connection 400 V / 87 Hz
The MOVITRAC® B output voltage is limited by the provided supply voltage.
6.5.3 Dynamic applications

For dynamic applications, you must have a drive with a rated inverter current greater
than the rated motor current.
Set the following parameters so the motor can generate at most 150 % of the rated
motor torque:
• Current limit P303
• Slip compensation P324
Increase these parameters manually by a factor of approx. 1.4 for dynamic applications.

Project Planning
Motor selection
6
6.5.4 Inverter/motor combinations

The following table shows possible inverter/motor combinations. You can also assign
the next higher motor size to the inverters. The 4-pole motors (1500 rpm) are included
in the factory settings of MOVITRAC® B. Smaller motors can deteriorate the control
behavior.
MOVITRAC® B Rated power PN SEW motor
Speed [rpm] at 50 Hz 3000 1500
Speed [rpm] at 60 Hz 3600 1800
MC07B0003-...-4-00 0.25 kW (0.34 HP) DFR63M2 DFR63L4
MC07B0004-...-4-00 0.37 kW (0.50 HP) DFR63L2 DT71D4
MC07B0005-...-4-00 0.55 kW (0.74 HP) DT71D2 DT80K4
MC07B0008-...-4-00 0.75 kW (1.0 HP) DT80K2 DT80N4
MC07B0011-...-4-00 1.1 kW (1.5 HP) DT80N2 DT90S4
MC07B0015-...-4-00 1.5 kW (2.0 HP) DT90S2 DT90L4
MC07B0022-...-4-00 2.2 kW (3.0 HP) DT90L2 DV100M4
MC07B0030-...-4-00 3.0 kW (4.0 HP) DV100M2 DV100L4
MC07B0040-...-4-00 4.0 kW (5.4 HP) DV112M2 DV112M4
MC07B0055-...-4-00 5.5 kW (7.4 HP) DV132S2 DV132S4
MC07B0075-...-4-00 7.5 kW (10 HP) DV132M2 DV132M4
MC07B0110-...-4-00 11 kW (15 HP) DV160M2 DV160M4
MC07B0150-...-4-00 15 kW (20 HP) DV160L2 DV160L4
MC07B0220-...-4-00 22 kW (30 HP) DV180L2 DV180L4
MC07B0300-...-4-00 30 kW (40 HP) – DV200L4
MC07B0370-...-4-00 37 kW (50 HP) – DV225S4
MC07B0450-...-4-00 45 kW (60 HP) – DV225M4
MC07B0550-...-4-00 55 kW (74 HP) – DV250M4
MC07B0750-...-4-00 75 kW (100 HP) – DV280S4

Project Planning
6 Overload capacity
6.6 Overload capacity

MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters permanently calculate the load on the inverter
output stage (unit utilization). They can output the maximum possible power in every
operating status.
The permitted continuous output current depends on:
• Ambient temperature
• Heat sink temperature
• Mains voltage
• PWM frequency
If a PWM frequency > 4 kHz is set and "P862/P863 PWM fix 1/2" is set to off, the inverter
automatically reduces the PWM frequency in the event of a unit overload. The inverter
responds to a higher than permitted load by issuing the "F44 Unit utilization" error
message and an immediate switch-off.
Overload capacity at 40 °C (104 °F)
Overload capacity at 25 °C (77 °F)
Size 0XS 0S < 1.5 kW 0S 1.5 kW 0L 1 2S 2 3 4

T (min) 20 20 8 8 3.5 4 5 4 9

Project Planning
Load capacity of the units at low output frequencies
6
6.7 Load capacity of the units at low output frequencies

The thermal model in MOVITRAC® B implements dynamic limiting of the maximum
output current. Consequently, the thermal model only permits less than 100 % output
current at output frequencies less than 2 Hz if the capacity utilization is high.
In such operating states, configure the average output current of the inverter to max.
70 % of the rated inverter current.
NOTE
The output frequency of the inverter is comprised of the rotational frequency (speed)
and the slip frequency.
Guaranteed continuous currents depending on the output frequency:

Project Planning
6 Selecting the braking resistor
6.8 Selecting the braking resistor
HAZARD!
The supply cables to the braking resistor carry a high DC voltage (ca. DC 900 V).
Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock.
• The braking resistor cables must be suitable for this high DC voltage.
• Install the braking resistor cables according to the regulations.
WARNING!
The surfaces of the braking resistors get very hot when the braking resistors are loaded
with Prated.
Risk of burns and fire.
• Choose a suitable installation location. Braking resistors are usually mounted on
top of the control cabinet.
• Do not touch the braking resistors.
NOTES
• The data applies to BW..., BW...-T and BW...-P braking resistors.
• For BW..., BW...-T and BW...-P braking resistors, plan for a load derating of 4% per
10 K from an ambient temperature of 45 °C (113 °F). Do not exceed the maximum
ambient temperature of 80 °C (176 °F).
• The overload factor of the BW..-T and BW...-P braking resistors is limited by using
an integrated temperature relay:
– BW...-T up to overload factor 12
– BW...-P up to overload factor 40
• The maximum permitted line length between MOVITRAC® and braking resistor
is 100 m (328 ft).
• Parallel connection
Two braking resistors must be connected in parallel for some inverter/resistor
combinations. In this case, set the trip current on the bimetallic relay to twice the
value of IF entered in the table.
• Peak braking power
The peak breaking power can be lower than the load capacity of the braking resistor
due to the DC link voltage and the resistance value. Formula for calculating the peak
braking power:
Pmax = VDC2/R
VDC is the maximum permitted DC link voltage. Its value is
• With 400 / 500 V units: DC 970 V
• With 230 V units: DC 485 V

Project Planning
6
The following table lists the peak braking power levels that are possible for the differ-
ent resistance values.
Resistance [] Peak braking power [KW]
400 / 500 V units 230 V units
100 9.4 –
72 13.0 –
68 13.8 –
47 20.0 –
39 24.0 –
27 34.8 8.7
18 52.2 –
15 62.7 –
12 78.4 19.6
9 (2 × 18 parallel) – 26.1
6 156 39.2
6.8.1 Load capacity of PTC braking resistors

The following diagram shows the load capacity of the braking resistors BW1 ... BW4 per
braking operation:
BW2 BW1
BW4 BW3
1200 600
[J] [1]
1000 500
800 400 [2]
[3]
600 300
400 200
200 100
0 0
0 10 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
[c/h]
[1] Brake ramp 10 s

[2] Brake ramp 4 s
[3] Brake ramp 0.2 s
c/h cycles per hour

Project Planning
6 Selecting the braking resistor
Calculation Given:
example
• Average braking power: 0.25 kW
• Brake ramp: 2 s
• 200 brake applications per hour
Approach:
Calculating energy from the power of the brake ramp:
W = P × t = 0.25 kW × 2 s = 500 J
The brake ramp [3] (0.2 s) can be used for the brake ramp in the diagram. Use the
characteristic curve with the shorter brake ramp because a shorter brake ramp means
more power.
The diagram allows a power of 580 J with a 0.2 s brake ramp at 200 cycles per hour. In
this case, the required 500 J can be dissipated with BW2/BW 4.
6.8.2 Load capacity flat design, wire resistors, grid resistors

In braking operations within the cycle duration TD (standard: TD ≤ 120 s), the cdf braking
power can be used to determine the resulting continuous resistor dissipation (100 % cdf
power) by means of the power diagrams. The right-hand y axis shows 100 % cdf power.
Observe the conditional peak braking power due to the DC link voltage when determin-
ing the load capacity.
Flat-design power Power diagram for flat-design braking resistors:

diagram
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 100
6 6
4 4
P2 (100% ED) [kW]

P1 [kW]
BW...-005 2
2
1 1
0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6
0.4 0.4
BW...-003
0.2 0,2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 100
ED [%]
P1 = Short-term power
P2 = Continuous power
cdf = cyclic duration factor of the braking resistor

Project Planning
6
Overload factor for Overload factor dependent on the cycle duration factor for wire resistors:
wire resistors
K 30
10
1% 6% 10% 25% 40% 60% 100%
ED [%]
Cyclic duration factor 1% 3% 6% 15 % 25 % 40 % 60 % 80 % 100 %

CDF
Overload factor K 30 15 9.5 5 3.2 2.2 1.5 1.12 1
Overload factor for Overload factor depending on cycle duration factor for grid resistors:
grid resistors
20
10
1
1% 6% 10% 20% 40% 60% 100%
ED [%]
Cyclic duration factor 1% 3% 6% 15 % 25 % 40 % 60 % 80 % 100 %

CDF
Overload factor K 20 12 7.6 4 3 2.2 1.5 1.12 1

Project Planning
6 Connecting AC brakemotors
Calculation Given:
example
• Peak braking power 13 kW
• Average braking power 6.5 kW
• Cyclic duration factor cdf 6 %
Required:
• BW.. braking resistor
Procedure • The 100 % cdf power for wire and grid resistors is initially calculated using the follow-
ing formula:
Average braking power / overload factor (wire / grid resistor)
Refer to the diagrams for the overload factor (wire and grid resistor) with a cyclic
duration factor (cdf) of 6 %.
• Results:
100 % cdf power for wire resistors: 685 W.
100 % cdf power for grid resistors: 856 W.
• The maximum braking resistance value is 72 for a peak braking power of 13 kW
when using a MC07B...-5A3 (AC 400/500 V unit) (→ Peak braking power table).
• Select the appropriate braking resistor from the assignment tables with the following
points:
– Max. permitted braking resistance value
– MOVITRAC® unit used
Result when using MC07B0110-5A3, for example: BW039-12
6.9 Connecting AC brakemotors

For detailed information about the SEW brake system, refer to the "Gearmotors"
catalog, which you can order from SEW-EURODRIVE.
SEW brake systems are disc brakes with a DC coil that release electrically and brake
using spring force. A brake rectifier provides the brake with DC voltage.
NOTE
The brake rectifier must have a separate supply system cable for inverter operation; it
must not be powered using the motor voltage!

Project Planning
Mains and motor connection
6
6.9.1 Brake rectifier

The brake rectifier can be switched off in two ways causing the brake to be applied:
1. Cut-off in the AC circuit
2. Cut-off in the DC and AC circuit (faster cut-off)
Always switch off the brake on the DC and AC sides in:
• All hoist applications
6.9.2 Activating the brake

Always activate the brake via binary output DOØ2 "/Brake": do not use the PLC.
The binary output DOØ2 "/Brake" is configured as an output for operating a relay with
free-wheeling diode and a control voltage of DC +24 V / max. 150 mA / 3.6 W. A power
contactor can be controlled directly with a DC 24 V coil voltage or the BMK brake recti-
fier. This power contactor is used to switch the brake.
The startup function in the FBG11B keypad and in the MotionStudio software sets the
brake parameters for the 2-pole and 4-pole motors from SEW-EURODRIVE. The brake
parameters (P73_) must be set manually in the case of SEW-EURODRIVE motors with
a higher number of poles and non-SEW motors.
6.9.3 Brake parameters
NOTE
The brake parameters are adapted to the brake activation arrangement shown in the
wiring diagram. If the values set for the brake release and application times are too
short, e.g. for long response times in the brake control system, hoists, for example,
may sag.
6.10 Mains and motor connection

6.10.1 Permitted voltage supply systems
NOTE
• Voltage supply systems with grounded star point
MOVITRAC® B is intended for operation on TN and TT systems with directly
grounded star point.
• Voltage supply systems with non-grounded star point
Operation on mains systems with a non-grounded star point (for example IT
power systems) is also permitted. SEW recommends using an earth-leakage
monitor for this according to the PCM (pulse code measuring) principle. Using
such devices prevents the earth-leakage monitor from mis-tripping due to the
ground capacitance of the inverter.
• External conductor grounded voltage supply systems
Operate the inverters on supply systems with a maximum phase-to-earth voltage
of AC 300 V only.

Project Planning
6 Mains and motor connection
6.10.2 Mains contactors and input fuses

Input contactor • Only use input contactors of utilization category AC-3 (EN 60947-4-1).
Mains activations
• Ensure a minimum time of 120 s between two mains activations for AC 230 V /
single-phase units.
UN
t
120 s
• Maintain a minimum switch-off time of 10 s for 3-phase units.
UN
t
10 s
NOTE
• Do not use the K11 input contactor for jog mode, but only for switching the inverter
on and off. Use the following commands for jog mode:
– Enable/stop
– CW/stop
– CCW/stop
Input fuses Fusing types:

• Line protection types in operation classes gL, gG:
– Rated fusing voltage ≥ rated mains voltage
– Rated fusing current must be designed for 100 % or 125 % of the rated inverter
current depending on the inverter utilization.
• Line protection switch with characteristics B, C:
– Circuit breaker rated voltage ≥ rated mains voltage
– Rated line protection switch currents must be 10 % above the rated inverter
current.

Project Planning
6
6.10.3 Line protection and core cross section

Comply with the regulations of the specific country and for the specific machine
regarding fusing and selecting . If required, also adhere to the notes on UL compliant
installation.
Always size the shared neutral conductor for the total current when using several single-
phase units. Also size it according to the total current even if the unit connections are
distributed over the three mains phases. This is because the third supply current
harmonics are always cumulative.
Select the cable cross section of the motor so the voltage drop is as small as possible.
An excessively high voltage drop means that the full motor torque is not achieved.
Smallest bending As stipulated in EN 61800-5-1, the distance between a power connection terminal and
space (EN 61800- an obstruction toward which the wire is directed on leaving the terminal must correspond
5-1) with the minimum values given in the table below.
Cable cross section [mm2] Smallest bending space [mm]
Wires per connection terminal
1 2 3
10 ... 16 40 - -
25 50 - -
35 65 - -
50 125 125 180
70 150 150 190
95 180 180 205
120 205 205 230
150 255 255 280
185 305 305 330
Recommendation If single-core copper cables with PVC insulation routed in cable ducts are used, SEW-
for standard instal- EURODRIVE proposes the following cable cross-sections and fuses for an ambient
lation, metric temperature of 25 °C and rated mains currents of 100% of the rated inverter current:
MOVITRAC® B 1 × 230 V 0003 0004 0005 0008 0011 0015 0022
1) 2)
1-phase Line protection C16 / gL16 / K16 C32 / gL25 / K25 / D20
Supply system 1.5 mm2 4 mm2
lead
PE conductor 2 x 1.5 mm2 2 x 4 mm2
Motor lead 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
2
Unit terminal cross section of Disconnectable terminal strip 4 mm conductor end sleeve DIN 46228
the power section
1) If there has been a pause of at least two minutes between turning the unit off and on again: B16
MOVITRAC® B 3 × 230 V 0003 0004 0005 0008 0011 0015 0022

3-phase Line protection 10 A 16 A
Supply system 1.5 mm2 4 mm2
lead
PE conductor 2 x 1.5 mm2 2 x 4 mm2
Motor lead 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
Unit terminal cross section of Disconnectable terminal strip 4 mm2 conductor end sleeve DIN 46228
the power section

Project Planning
MOVITRAC® B 3 × 230 V 0037 0055 0075 0110 0150 0220 0300

Fuses F11/F12/F13
25 A 25 A 35 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A
IN
Supply system cable L1/L2/
4 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2
L3
2 × 4 mm2 2 × 4 mm2 2 × 6 mm2 1 × 16 1 × 16
PE conductor 1 × 10 mm2 1 × 16 mm2
1 × 10 mm2 1 × 10 mm2 1 × 10 mm2 mm2 mm2
Motor cable U/V/W 4 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2
Separable M4 screw and washer
terminal strip assembly with terminal clip M6 screw and washer M10 bolt with nut
Unit terminal cross section 4 mm2 con- 4 mm2 conductor end sleeve assembly with washer max. 70 mm2
of the power section ductor end DIN 46228 max. 25 mm2 Press cable lug DIN
sleeve DIN 6 mm2 crimp cable lug DIN Crimp cable lug DIN 46234 46235
46228 46234
MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0003 0004 0005 0008 0011 0015 0022 0030 0040 0055 0075
3-phase Line protection 10 A 16 A 16 A 16 A
2 2
Supply system 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm2
lead
PE conductor 2 x 1.5 mm2 2 x 1.5 mm2 2 x 1.5 mm2 2 x 1.5 mm2
1 x 10 mm2 1 x 10 mm2 1 x 10 mm2
Motor lead 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2
2
Unit terminal cross section of Disconnectable terminal strip 4 mm conductor end sleeve DIN M4 screw and washer assembly
the power section 46228 with terminal clip
4 mm2 conductor end sleeve DIN
46228
MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0110 0150 0220 0300

Supply system 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2
lead
PE conductor 2 x 4 mm2 2 x 6 mm2 1 x 10 mm2 1 x 16 mm2
1 x 10 mm2 1 x 10 mm2
Motor lead 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2
Unit terminal cross section of M4 screw and washer assembly with terminal clip M6 screw and washer assembly with washer
the power section 4 mm2 conductor end sleeve DIN 46228 max. 25 mm2
6 mm2 crimp cable lug DIN 46234 Crimp cable lug DIN 46234
MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0370 0450 0550 0750

Supply system 25 mm2 35 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2
lead
PE conductor 1 x 16 mm2 25 mm2
Motor lead 25 mm2 35 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2
Unit terminal cross section of Bolt M10 with nut max. 70 mm2 crimp cable connector DIN 36235
the power section

Project Planning
6
Recommendation for standard installation, USA NEC

MOVITRAC® B 1 × 230 V 0003 0004 0005 0008 0011 0015 0022
1-phase Line protection C161) / gL16 / K16 C322) / gL25 / K25 / D20
Supply system AWG16 AWG12
lead
PE conductor 2 x AWG16 2 x AWG12
Motor lead AWG16 AWG16
Unit terminal cross section of Separable terminal strip
the power section AWG10 conductor end sleeve
MOVITRAC® B 3 × 230 V 0003 0004 0005 0008 0011 0015 0022

3-phase Line protection 10 A 16 A
Supply system AWG16 AWG12
lead
PE conductor 2 x AWG16 2 x AWG12
Motor lead AWG16 AWG16
Unit terminal cross section of Separable terminal strip
the power section AWG10 conductor end sleeve
MOVITRAC® B 3 × 230 V 0037 0055 0075 0110 0150 0220 0300

Fuses F11/F12/F13
25 A 25 A 35 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A
IN
AWG12 AWG12 AWG10 AWG6 AWG4 AWG4 AWG3
L3
PE conductor AWG12 AWG12 AWG10 AWG10 AWG8 AWG8 AWG6
Motor cable U/V/W AWG12 AWG10 AWG10 AWG6 AWG4 AWG4 AWG3
Separable M4 screw and washer
terminal strip assembly with terminal clip M6 screw and washer
M10 bolt with nut
Unit terminal cross section assembly with washer
AWG10 AWG10 conductor end Max. AWG2/0 crimp
of the power section Max. AWG10 crimp cable
conductor sleeve cable lug
lug
end sleeve AWG10 crimp cable lug
MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0003 0004 0005 0008 0011 0014 0015 0022 0030 0040
Size 0 1
Fuses F11/F12/F13 IN 6A 10A 15 A
Supply system cable L1/L2/L3 AWG14 AWG14
PE conductor AWG14 AWG14
Motor cable U/V/W AWG14 AWG14
Unit terminal cross section of Separable terminal strip Separable terminal strip
the power section AWG10 conductor end sleeve AWG10 conductor end sleeve
MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0055 0075 0110 0150 0220 0300

Size 2 3
Fuses F11/F12/F13
20 A 30 A 40 A 60 A 80 A
IN
AWG12 AWG10 AWG8 AWG6 AWG4
L3
PE conductor AWG12 AWG10 AWG10 AWG8
Motor cable U/V/W AWG12 AWG10 AWG8 AWG6 AWG4
M4 screw and washer assembly with terminal clip
Unit terminal cross section M6 screw and washer assembly with washer
AWG10 conductor end sleeve
of the power section max. AWG4 crimp cable lug
AWG10 crimp cable lug

Project Planning
MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0370 0450 0550 0750

Size 4 5
Fuses F11/F12/F13
90 A 110 A 150 A 175 A
IN
AWG4 AWG3 AWG1 AWG2/0
L3
PE conductor AWG8 AWG6 AWG6 AWG6
Motor cable U/V/W AWG4 AWG3 AWG1 AWG2/0
Unit terminal cross section M10 bolt with nut
of the power section Max. AWG2/0 crimp cable lug
6.10.4 Motor cable length

The maximum motor cable length depends on:
• Cable type
• Voltage drop in the cable
• Set PWM frequency.
• Using an output filter
The limit values in the tables do not apply if you use and output filter. The motor cable
length is then solely limited by the voltage drop on the motor cable.
MOVITRAC® B Permitted maximum motor cable length in m (ft)
Size 0XS / 0S / 0L 2S 0055 2S 0075 /
2/3/4/5
3 AC 400 V
3 AC 500 V 3 AC 230 V
Voltage Vmains 3 AC 230 V
3 AC 400 V (125 % IN) 3 AC 400/500 V
1 AC 230 V
Shielded cable 4 kHz1) 100 (328) 50 (160) 300 (984) 400 (1310)
8 kHz 70 (230) 35 (110) 250 (820) 300 (984)
12 kHz 50 (160) 25 (82) 200 (656) 250 (820)
16 kHz 40 (130) 25 (82) 150 (492) 200 (656)
Unshielded 4 kHz1) 200 (656) 100 (328) 900 (2950) 1200 (3937)
cable 8 kHz 140 (459) 70 (230) 750 (2460) 900 (2950)
12 kHz 100 (328) 50 (160) 600 (1970) 750 (2460)
16 kHz 80 (2640 50 (160) 450 (1480) 600 (1970)
1) Standard setting
NOTE
Do not use an earth-leakage circuit breaker with long motor cables. The leakage
currents caused by cable capacitance may cause mis-tripping.

Project Planning
6
6.10.5 Voltage drop

Select the cable cross-section of the motor cable so the voltage drop is as small as
possible. An excessively high voltage drop means that the full motor torque is not
achieved.
You can determine the expected voltage drop using the following tables. For shorter
cables, you can calculate the voltage drop by converting in proportion to the length.
Cable cross sec- Load with I [A] =

tion 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 150
Copper Voltage drop U [V] with length = 100 m (328 ft) and ϑ = 70 °C (158 °F)
1.5 mm2 5.3 8 10.6 13.3 17.3 21.3 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
2.5 mm2 3.2 4.8 6.4 8.1 10.4 12.8 16 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
2 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
4 mm 1.9 2.8 3.8 4.7 6.5 8.0 10 12.5
6 mm2 4.4 5.3 6.4 8.3 9.9 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
10 mm2 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0 8.2 10.2 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
16 mm2 3.3 3.9 5.2 6.5 7.9 10.0 1) 1) 1)
2 1) 1)
25 mm 2.5 3.3 4.1 5.1 6.4 8.0
35 mm2 2.9 3.6 4.6 5.7 7.2 8.6
2
50 mm 4.0 5.0 6.0
1) Loading not permitted, in accordance with VDE 0100 part 430
Cable cross sec- Load with I [A] =

tion 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 150
Copper Voltage drop U [V] with length = 100 m (328 ft) and ϑ = 70 °C (158 °F)
AWG16 7.0 10.5 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
AWG14 4.2 6.3 8.4 10.5 13.6
1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
AWG12 2.6 3.9 5.2 6.4 8.4 10.3 12.9
1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
AWG10 5.6 6.9 8.7 10.8 13.0
1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
AWG8 4.5 5.6 7.0 8.4 11.2
1) 1) 1)
AWG6 4.3 5.1 6.9 8.6 10.8 13.7
1)
AWG4 3.2 4.3 5.4 6.8 8.7 10.8 13.5
AWG3 2.6 3.4 4.3 5.1 6.9 8.6 10.7 12.8
AWG2 3.4 4.2 5.4 6.8 8.5 10.2
AWG1 3.4 4.3 5.4 6.8 8.1
AWG1/0 2.6 3.4 4.3 5.4 6.8
AWG2/0 2.7 3.4 4.3 5.1
1) More than 3 % voltage drop in relation to Vmains = AC 460 V.

Project Planning
6 Multi-motor drive/group drive
6.11 Multi-motor drive/group drive

Group drives are mechanically decoupled from each other (e.g. different conveyor
belts). In this operating mode, the inverter operates without slip compensation and with
a constant V/f ratio.
Multi-motor drives are mechanically coupled to each other (e.g. chain drive with multiple
motors). Observe the notes in the publication "Multi-Motor Drives".
6.11.1 Motor currents

The total of the motor currents must not exceed the rated output current of the inverter.
6.11.2 Motor cable

You can calculate the permitted total length of all motor cables connected in parallel as
follows:
Imax
Itotal
n
ltotal = Total length of the motor cables connected in parallel
lmax = Recommended maximum motor cable length for individual drives
n = Number of motors connected in parallel
6.11.3 Motor size

The motors in a group must not be more than 3 type sizes apart.
6.11.4 Output filter

For groups with more than 3 ... 4 motors, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends to use an HF
output filter. An output filter HF... is required if the maximum motor cable length (lmax)
given in the table is exceeded. This may be the case in large groups (n) or when there
are long motor cable lengths connected in parallel (ltot). In this case, it is the voltage
drop on the motor cable that limits the maximum motor cable length, not the limit value
in the table. The total of the rated motor currents must not exceed the rated through-
current of the output filter.

Project Planning
Line chokes
6
6.12 Line chokes

6.12.1 1-phase
Use is required under the following circumstances:
• Mains inductances of less than 100 μH per branch
• Using line chokes is required when operating several units that are switched on
simultaneously. The line choke limits overvoltages caused by the switching.
Use is optional in the following instances:
• Reduction in the supply system current harmonics
• Support for overvoltage protection
6.12.2 3-phase
Using line chokes is required when operating more than 4 units that are switched on
simultaneously. The line choke limits overvoltages caused by the switching.
Use is optional for supporting overvoltage protection.
6.13 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC

MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters are components of machines and systems. They
comply with the EMC product standard EN 61800-3 Variable-speed electrical drives.
If you want to equip the machine / system with frequency inverters compliant with the
EMC directive 89/336/EEC: Adhere to the notes on EMC compliant installation.
Following the relationship between new and old limit classes:
New limit class according to EN 61800-3 Previous limit class according to EN 55011/55014
C2 A
C1 B

Project Planning
6 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC
6.13.1 Interference immunity

MOVITRAC® B meets the minimum requirements stipulated in EN 61800-3 with regard
to interference immunity.
6.13.2 Interference emission

The interference emission of MOVITRAC® B was tested using standard equipment. The
limit values complied with allow the units to be used in both the industrial and private
sphere. The following measures are recommended depending on the target limit value
class. Higher levels of interference are permitted in industrial environments. In industrial
environments, you can dispense with the measures listed below depending on the
situation of the supply system and the plant configuration.
Limit value class The following possible solutions exist for EMC-compliant installation, depending on the
plant configuration. Perform an EMC compliant installation.
Limit classes C1 and C2 according to EN 61800-3.
Limit value class Size 0
230 V 1-phase
Input end Output end
Output choke HD012 / HD100 /
C2 No additional filtering required HD101 or shielded motor cable, or
HF output filter
Cable conducted No additional filtering required
C1 Shielded motor cable
Radiation conducted Foldable ferrites1)
1) 3 foldable ferrites ULF11A over the supply system cables L and N (without PE)
Limit value class Size 0

400/500 V / 230 V 3-phase
C2 No additional filtering required HD101 or shielded motor cable, or
HF output filter
Line filter NF
C1 HD101 or shielded motor cable
FKE EMC-module
Limit value class Sizes 1 / 2S / 2

400/500 V / 230 V 3-phase
HD output choke, or shielded motor
C2 No additional filter required.
cable, or HF output filter
HD output choke or shielded motor
C1 Line filter NF
cable
Limit value class Size 3 / 4 / 5

400/500 V / 230 V 3-phase
HD output choke, or shielded motor
C2
cable, or HF output filter
Line filter NF
HD output choke or shielded motor
C1
cable

Project Planning
Electromagnetic compatibility EMC
6
6.13.3 Connection
Observe the "Installation" section for EMC-compliant connection.
6.13.4 IT systems
NOTES
• No EMC limits are specified for interference emission in voltage supply systems
without an NF earthed star point (IT systems). The efficiency of line filters is
severely limited.
• In size 0, you can deactivate the suppression capacitors. See the section
"Installation / Installation for IT systems".
• It is important that you deactivate the suppression capacitors when using earth-
leakage monitors with pulse code measurement.
6.13.5 Inverter-caused leakage currents

Earth-leakage currents ≥ 3.5 mA may occur during normal operation.
Earth leakage currents are determined mainly by:
• The amount of DC link voltage
• The PWM frequency
• The motor cable used and its length.
• The motor used
Reducing earth-leakage currents (size 0 only)
You can deactivate the suppression capacitors to PE (see section "Installation / Instal-
lation for IT systems") to reduce earth-leakage currents in the inverter.
When the suppression capacitors are deactivated, the EMC filter is no longer active.
SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you do not use earth-leakage circuit breakers and
instead choose other measures to ensure protection of personnel (e.g. according to
EN 61800-5-1, EN 50178, EN 60204-1, etc.).

Project Planning
6 HF output filters
6.14 HF output filters

6.14.1 Important notes
Observe the following instructions when using output filters:
• Do not use output filters in hoist applications.
• During project planning of the drive, take into account the voltage drop in the output
filter and consequently the reduced motor torque available. This applies particularly
to AC 230 V units with output filters.
• Flying start function is not possible with HF.. output filter
6.14.2 Installation, connection and operation
NOTES
• Install output filters next to the corresponding inverter. Leave a ventilation space of
at least 100 mm (3.94 in) below and above the output filter. No clearance is
required on the sides.
• Limit the connection cable between inverter and output filter to the absolutely
necessary length. Maximum 1 m (3 ft) with unshielded cable, 10 m (33 ft) with
shielded cable.
• An unshielded motor line is sufficient when using an output filter. Note the
following instructions when you use an output filter together with a shielded
motor cable:
– The maximum permitted length of the motor cable for operation without VDC link
connection is 20 m (66 ft).
– Operation with VDC link connection is required if the motor cable is longer than
20 m (66 ft).
– Observe the notes "Operation with VDC link connection" on the next page.
• The rated through current of the output filter must be higher than or equal to the
output current of the inverter. Note whether the projected output current of the
inverter is 100 % IN (= rated output current) or 125 % IN (= continous output
current).
• Several motors can be connected together to one output filter when operating a
motor group from one inverter. The total value of the rated motor currents must not
exceed the rated throughput current of the output filter.
• It is possible to connect two output filters of the same type to one inverter output to
increase the rated through current. To do this, connect all like connections to the
output filters in parallel.
• Considerable noise (magnetostriction) may occur in the output filter especially if
operating with fPWM = 4 kHz. In environments susceptible to noise, SEW-
EURODRIVE recommends operation with fPWM = 12 kHz (or 16 kHz) and VDC link
connection. Observe the notes regarding VDC link connection.
• When the inverter is operated with fPWM = 4 or 8 kHz, the output filter connection
V5 (with HF...-503) or 7 (with HF...-403) must not be connected (no VDC link
connection).
• Do not make a VDClink connection when using size 0XS units.

Project Planning
HF output filters
6
6.14.3 UZ link
Operation without VDC link connection:
• Approved only for PWM frequency 4 kHz or 8 kHz.
B
X1 X2/3
+R
Operation with VDClink connection:

Connection of inverter terminal + R with HF…-503 terminal V5 or HF…-403 terminal 7
NOTES
• Optimized grounded filter effect.
• Improved filter effect in the low-frequency range (≤ 150 kHz).
• Approved only for PWM frequency 12 kHz or 16 kHz. Note that increased losses
(= power reduction) occur in the inverter when operating with 12 kHz or 16 kHz.
• Set PMW fix = on; the inverter must not be able to reduce the PWM frequency
automatically
• Strictly observe the following for HF...-403: VDC link connection only permitted if
Vmains ≤ AC 400 V, not with Vmains = AC 500 V.
• The VDClink connection increases the inverter load. The DC link connection
increases the required inverter output current in relation to the rated output current
of the inverter as shown in the following table.
fPWM Umains = 3 × AC 230 V Umains = 3 × AC 400 V Umains = 3 × AC 500 V

12 kHz 4% 12 % 15 %
16 kHz 3% 8% 12 %
The increased power requirement causes an additional load on the inverter. Take this
aspect into account during project planning of the drive. Failure to comply with this
aspect may cause the inverter to shut down due to overload.
B
X1 X2/3
+R
NOTE
No VDClink connection is possible with size 0XS units.

Project Planning
6 HF output filters
The procedure for selecting the PWM frequency and checking the inverter is
summarized in the following figure.
Selecting PWM frequency

Noise sensitive
environment in which HF is used Yes and VDClink connection
(not motor!)
No
Motor cable type Shielded
Unschielded
Length of motor cable
(also total length for
Motor cable length only
group drive)
limited by voltage drop
> 20 m
< 20 m
High EMC requirements

Optimized filtering against ground Yes
Motor cable length only

No limited by voltage drop
With VDC link connection With UDC link connection

(P862) PWM frequency 4 / 8 kHz (P860) PWM frequency 12/16 kHz
(P862) PWM frequency = FIX
3 x AC 230 V Mains voltage? 3 x AC 500 V
3 x AC 400 V
HF...-403 not permitted

FI output current does not FI output current increases by FI output current increases by FI output current increases by
increase (u = 0) u = 4 % (12 kHz) u = 12 % (12 kHz) u = 15 % (12 kHz)
u = 3 % (16 kHz) u = 8 % (16 kHz) u = 12 % (16 kHz)
Required output current FI Checking the frequency inverter (FI)

= (1+u) x motor current
and selecting the HF filter
Take minimization of FI output current into account.
Requirements: Performance reduction due to PWM frequency,
ambient temperature, continuous current consumption.
See section "Project Planning" in system manual
Select larger FI output current large enough?

No
FI
Yes
Choose HF output filter from table depending on motor current (sec. "Technical Data and Dimension Drawings - HF... Output Filters).
Please note: I
HF_rated rated_motor motor
I I .

Project Planning
Electronics cables and signal generation
6
6.15 Electronics cables and signal generation

6.15.1 Cable type
The electronic terminals are suitable for:
• Cross sections up to 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) without conductor end sleeves
• Cross sections up to 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves
Use shielded cables as standard. Ground the shield at both ends. Route electronics
cables separately from power cables and leads to contactor controls or braking
resistors.
6.15.2 0 V cables
Never connect 0 V cables GND for generating signals. The 0 V cables of several elec-
trical units which are connected should not be looped from unit to unit, but rather wired
up in a star configuration. This means:
• Install the units in adjacent control cabinet compartments rather than distributing
them widely.
• Lay the 0 V cables with at least 1 mm2 (AWG17) cross section from a central point
to each individual unti by the shortest possible route.
6.15.3 Coupling relays

You can use coupling relays for electrical isolation of the binary inputs and binary
outputs to the functional ground. Use only coupling relays with encapsulated, dust-
protected electronic contacts. The relays must be suitable to switch small voltages and
current (5 ... 30 V, 0.1 ... 20 mA).
6.16 External voltage supply DC 24 V

The internal voltage supply is sufficient for the basic unit and binary outputs up to 200
mA (DO02: 150 mA; DO03: 50 mA). FBG11B, FSC11B with options DBG60B, USB11A,
UWS21A, or UWS21B can also be supplied by the internal voltage supply.
The MOVITRAC® B can be supplied via an external DC 24 V voltage supply. This is
useful, for example, with bus operation. The voltage supply must be sized large enough
to operate the digital outputs also. Fieldbus options always require an external voltage
supply,
In this case, you must always switch on the external DC 24 V power supply unit
prior to the mains contactor or after switching off the mains contactor.
The DC 24V voltage output can be switched off with P808. This means external voltage
supply is still possible.

Project Planning
6 External voltage supply DC 24 V
DC 24 V power demand of MOVITRAC® B:

Size Basic unit power DBG60B FIO11B Fieldbus option2)3) DHP11B3)
demand1)
0 MC07B…-00 5W
0 MC07B…-S0 12 W
1, 2S, 2 17 W 1W 2W 3W 4.5 W
3 23 W
4, 5 25 W
1) FBG11B, FSC11B (UWS11A/USB11A) included. Take account of the additional load of the binary inputs
with 2.4 W per 100 mA.
2) Fieldbus options are: DFP21B, DFD11B, DFE11B, ...
3) These options must always be externally supplied.
NOTES
When using an auxiliary voltage for the backup mode on VIO24, you must ensure that
the backup voltage is always applied in mains operation because other units
connected to VIO24 are otherwise supplied by MOVITRAC® B in mains operation
without a backup voltage supply.
The maximum current load for looping through the backup voltage supply from VIO24
/ basic unit to VIO24 / FSC/FIO is 1 A.
6.16.1 Example
MC07B0015-5A3-4-00/DFP21B with options FSC11B & FBG11B. MOVTRAC® B
supplies the binary inputs DI01 (CW/Stop) and DI03 (Enable) with voltage. The motor
brake is controlled via DO02.The brake coil of the brake relay requires 100 mA at DC 24
V. The master PLC evaluates the fault signal contact via DO00 at a current consumption
of 50 mA.
Calculating the total power demand:
• Power demand of the basic unit (incl. FSC11B and power supply of the binary inputs):
5W
• Power demand of the DFP21B fieldbus option: 3 W
• Power demand of the brake coil: 0 W because output is 0 active in DV 24 V
operation.
• Power demand of the fault signal contact: 24 V x 0.05 A = 1.2 W
The total power demand is 9.2 W. An external DC 24 V power supply is required in this
case.

Project Planning
Parameter set switchover
6
6.17 Parameter set switchover

This function is used to operate two motors on one inverter using two different parameter
sets.
The parameter set is switched over via binary input or fieldbus. A binary input must be
programmed to the "Parameter set switchover" function (→ P60_/P61_) for this
purpose. You can then change from parameter set 1 to 2 and vice versa in INHIBITED
inverter status.
Effect at
Function
"0" signal "1" signal
PARAM. SELECT Parameter set 1 active Parameter set 2 active
NOTE
A changeover contactor should be provided for each of the two motor cables when two
motors are operated alternately on the same inverter with the parameter set
switchover function in use. Only switch changeover contactors when the unit is
inhibited!

Project Planning
6 Priority of the operating statuses and interrelation between control signals
6.18 Priority of the operating statuses and interrelation between control signals
6.18.1 Priority of operating states
The following illustration shows the priority of operating states:
Priority
high Controller inhibit
Rapid stop
Stop
low Enable
6.18.2 Interrelation between control signals

The following table shows the interrelation between control signals. "CW/Stop" is
programmed to binary input DIØ1 and cannot be changed. The other control signals are
only in effect if a binary input is programmed to this function (→ parameter P60_).
Binary input is programmed to
/Controller inhibit Enable/ Inverter status
CW/stop (DI01) CCW/stop
Rapid stop
1) 1) 1)
"0"
2) 2)
Inhibited
"1" "0"
"1" "1" "1" "0" CW enabled
"1" "1" "0" "1" CCW enabled
1) Not relevant when the binary input is on controller inhibit and "/Control inhibit" = "0"
2) Not relevant if "Enable/Rapid stop" = "0"
Linking control signals:
CW
=1
CCW* &
& Drive control
ENABLE*
/CONTROLLER INHIBIT*
* If a binary input is programmed to this function.

Project Planning
PI controller
6
6.19 PI controller
You can use the implemented PI controller for temperature control, pressure control or
other applications. The PI controller can be switched on and off.
Structural diagram showing installation of the PI controller
P250 PI controller
Normal
Inverted
1
-1
P251 P-gain P301/311 nmax

P252 I-component P302/312 nmin
nmax
Setpoint Speed setpoint (value)
% - x
Control difference
nmin
Correcting
variable
Actual
value
AI1 %
Connect the actual value from the sensor (temperature, pressure, etc.) to analog input
AI1. You can scale the actual value up or down and assign an offset value, thereby
adapting it to the working range of the PI controller.
You can set the PI-controller setpoint using one of the six programmed fixed setpoints
or specify the setpoint using the RS-485 or fieldbus (SBus) interface (P100 = Setpoint
source). Furthermore you can specify the setpoint using the local setpoint potentiome-
ter.
The correcting variable of the PI controller is a speed setpoint limited to a minimum and
maximum speed (P301=Minimum speed1 and P302=Maximum speed1). The setting of
the speed ramp times has no effect when the PI controller is active.
The default settings for the parameters are indicated in bold below.
6.19.1 Parameterization
Activating the PI Switch the PI-controller on and off using parameter P250. The values set for setpoint
controller and actual values mentioned in the beginning are active when you switch on the PI
controller.
The NORMAL setting increases the correcting variable if there is a positive system
deviation; the correcting variable is reduced if there is a negative system deviation.
The INVERTED setting increases the correcting variable if there is a negative system
deviation; the correcting variable is reduced if there is a positive system deviation.
P 250 PI controller Off
Normal
Inverted
Controller You can adapt the controller to the application using the following settings:
parameters P 251 P-gain 0 ... 1 ... 64 Step width: 0.01
P 252 I-component 0 ... 1 ... 2000 [s] Bereich: Step width:
0 I-component OFF
0.01 ... 0.99 0.01
1.0 ... 9.9 0.1
10 ... 99 1
100 ... 2000 10

Project Planning
6 PI controller
6.19.2 Setpoint selection

The following settings are possible as the setpoint source. You can select the setpoint
source with parameter P100.
• Unipolar / Fixed setpoint: The setpoint zero applies as long as no setpoint is
selected. The FBG setpoint control module can be added to setpoint zero or a fixed
setpoint using P121.
P163/164/165 Setpoint n11/12/13 scales PI controller [0 … 100 %] step width: 0.1 %
P173/174/175 Setpoint n21/22/23 scales PI controller [0… 100 %] step width: 0.1 %
Operation with optional second analog input (e.g. FIO1B)
The setpoint from the AI2 analog input applies as long as no setpoint is selected. The
FBG speed control module can be added to AI1 or a fixed setpoint using P121.
Fixed setpoint selected
AI2 0
PI controller setpoint [%]
[%] 1
Fixed
setpoint
[%]
• RS-485/fixed setpoint
• SBus 1 / Fixed setpoint: Specify the setpoint and set it using the following bus
parameters:
P870/871/872 Setpoint description PO1/PO2/PO3 [PI controller setpoint [%]
PO1/PO2/PO3 = 0 ... 214 = 0 ... 100 % PI-controller setpoint
Setpoint selection is always unipolar. The inverter restricts negative setpoints (e.g.
via RS-485 or SBus) to zero.
Fixed setpoint selected
PO 0 100%
setpoint PI controller setpoint [%]
[%] 1
0%
Fixed
setpoint
[%] nset > 0: CW direction of rotation
nset < 0: CCW direction of rotation
• For all setpoint sources: The FBG setpoint control module can be added to the
setpoint or a fixed setpoint using P121.
• The settings Bipolar / fixed setpoint, Motor potentiometer / fixed setpoint as well
as Fixed setpoint + AI1 and Fixed setpoint * AI1 do not have any effect. If you set
these, the inverter always specifies the setpoint zero.
• Frequency input / fixed setpoint
Selected fixed setpoint
FI1 0
[%] 1
Fixed
setpoint
[%]

Project Planning
PI controller
6
6.19.3 Actual value detection

The unipolar input AI1 is the actual value input.
You can set the operating mode for the actual value using P112 AI1 operating mode
(see also parameters 116 … 119):
• 0 ... 10 V: The following applies to operation as a voltage input:
0 ... 10 V = 0 ... 100 % PI controller actual value
• 0 ... 20 mA: The following applies to operation as a current input:
0 ... 20 mA = 0 ... 100 % PI controller actual value
• 4 ... 20 mA: The following applies to operation as a current input:
4 ... 20 mA = 0 ... 100 % PI controller actual value
6.19.4 Reference message

With this parameter, you can program a reference message with regard to the actual
value of the PI controller. By doing this, you can monitor the actual value for violation of
a limit value.
P450 PI actual value reference 0 ... 100 [%] Step width: 0.1 %
P451 Signal = "1" when PI actual value < PI reference
PI actual value > PI reference
You have to program a binary output terminal to "PI controller actual value reference" to
issue the reference signal. The reference message operates with a hysteresis of 5 %.
The reference signal does not have a delay time and signals "1" depending on P451.
You must program the binary output DO01 P620, DO02 P621 or DO03 P622 to PI
controller actual value reference.
6.19.5 Inverter control

You can determine the direction of rotation by using the terminals for the direction of
rotation "CW/Stop and "CCW/Stop".
Upon enable, the inverter increases the speed up to P301 Minimum speed using the
P130 Speed ramp. PI control becomes active once the minimum speed is reached. The
PI controller correcting variable directly determines the speed setpoint.
If you revoke the CW/CCW terminal, the inverter deactivates PI control and stores the
I-component of the PI controller. The speed decreases using the speed ramp (P131). If
you enable the inverter before the drive has reached its stop speed, the PI controller
becomes active again with the current setpoint.
If you stop the inverter with the "Enable/Stop" terminal, the drive decelerates with the
stop ramp. The inverter stores the I-component of the controller.
With setpoint source RS485 or SBUS, the value of the PO data item determines the di-
rection of rotation. "PI-REGLER %" and the value of the PO data item "PI-REGLER %"
act as a setpoint for the PI controller.

Project Planning
6 Application examples
6.20 Application examples

All application examples presented here assume that the unit has been started up
correctly in accordance with the "Startup" section.
6.20.1 External setpoint potentiometer

The external setpoint potentiometer is not effective when manual operation is active.
Connect an external setpoint potentiometer as follows:
The resistance value of the external setpoint potentiometer R must be ≥ 3 k.
REF1 1 X10:
R AI11 2
AI12 3
GND 4
DI00 1 X12:
DI01 2
DI02 3
DI03 4
DI04 5
DI05TF 6
VOTF 7
24VIO 8
GND 9
6.20.2 Setpoint value processing

Using AI1 as 0 ... 10 V voltage input, no fixed setpoint selected, frequency inverter
enabled.
Setpoint X1 P116 X2 P118 UAI1 Setpoint Diagram
source Y1 P117 Y2 P119 speed
100% / nmax
0V nmin
0% 100 %
Bipolar 5V 50 % nmax 50 % / nmax/2
100 % 100 %
10 V nmax
nmin
0%
0 1/min 50% / 5 V 100% / 10 V
0V

Project Planning
Application examples
6
Setpoint X1 P116 X2 P118 UAI1 Setpoint Diagram

source Y1 P117 Y2 P119 speed
100% / nmax
50 % / nmax/2
0V – nmax. nmin
0% 100 %
Bipolar 5V –nmin / +nmin
–100 % 100 % 0%
10 V +nmax 0 1/min -nmin 100% / 10 V
0V
-50 % / nmax/2
-100% / nmax
100% / nmax
0V nmin
0% 100 %
Unipolar 5V 50 % nmax 50 % / nmax/2
100 % 100 %
10 V nmax
nmin
0%
0 1/min 50% / 5 V 100% / 10 V
0V
100% / nmax
0V nmax
0% 100 %
Unipolar 5V 50 % nmax 50 % / nmax/2
0% 0%
10 V nmin
nmin
0%
0 1/min 100% / 10 V
50% / 5 V
0V

Project Planning
6.20.3 Speed-controlled agitator

In this application, you can control the speed using the FBG speed control module.
RUN
STOP
RESET
The keypad is used to control:

• Reset
• Start
• Stop
• Speed control.
Select the "FGB speed control module" icon to operate the agitator.
Parameters Adapt the following parameters for the agitator:

• P122 FBG manual operation: Direction of rotation
• Ramp t11 up (adjust with keypad or parameter P130)
• Ramp t11 up (adjust via keypad icon or parameter P131)
• P301 Minimum speed
• P302 Maximum speed
• P860 PWM frequency

Project Planning
6
6.20.4 Positioning a trolley

Principle Positioning a trolley with rapid speed and creep speed, and position detection using
proximity sensors.
The emergency off function must be guaranteed using a separate safety circuit.
Install a braking resistor.
Perform a startup for the VFC operating mode.
RUN
STOP
RESET

Project Planning
Terminals • Rapid speed: DI04 = 1 and DI05 = 1

• Slow speed: DI04 = 1 and DI05 = 0
Assign the electronics terminal strip with
• DI01 = CW/stop
• DI02 = CCW/Stop
• DI03 = Enable
• DO01-C and DO01-NO = "Fault"
• DO02 = Brake
S1
DI00 1 X12:
DI01 2
DI02 3
DI03 4
DI04 5
DI05TF 6
VOTF 7
24VIO 8
PLC GND 9
GND 1 X13:
DO02 2
K1 DO03 3
GND 4
DO01-C 5
DO01-NO 6
DO01-NC 7
K1 is the brake contactor, S1 the fault indicator light.

The following signals between the machine controller PLC and MOVITRAC® B are
important:
X12:2: Clockwise direction of rotation X12:6: Slow speed/rapid speed
X12:3: Counterclockwise direction of rotation X12:8: 24 V
X12:4: Start/Stop X13:6: No malfunction
X12:5: Rapid speed X13:2: Brake released
Parameters The following parameters are relevant for this application. Check whether you can leave
all factory setting values unchanged.
P601 Binary input DI02: CCW/stop P604 Binary input DI05: n12/n22
P602 Binary input DI03: Enable P620 Binary output DO01: Malfunction
P603 Binary input DI04: n11/n21 P621 Binary output DO02: Brake released

Project Planning
6
6.20.5 PI controller
Following a diagram showing the basic structure of the control system with a PI control-
ler, taking the example of a pressure control system.
MOVITRAC® B
Control Frequency Speed
deviation Current/voltage Torque Pressure
+
Setpoint PI controller Motor Compressor
-
Unit signal
current/voltage
evaluated
Pressure
actual value Actual value
sensor

Unit design
7 Size 0XS / 0S / 0L
7 Unit design
7.1 Size 0XS / 0S / 0L
[2] [1]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[11]
[12]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[5] [18]
[1] PE connection
[2] X1: Power supply connection:
3-phase: L1 / L2 / L3
1-phase: L / N
[5] X2: Motor connection U / V / W / Brake connection +R / –R
[7] X17: Safety contact for safe stop (only MC07B...-S0: sizes 0S / 0L, 400 / 500 V)
[9] X13: Binary outputs
[10] X12: Binary inputs
[11] X10: Analog input
[12] Switch S11 for V-mA toggle analog input
(in sizes 0XS and 0S behind removable connector)
[13] Option card slot (cannot be retrofitted / not for BG0XS)
[14] Connection for optional communication / analog module
[15] Optional keypad
[16] Status LED (visible without optional keypad)
[17] Fixing strap
[18] Shield plate for motor cable, fixing strap underneath

Unit design
Size 1 / 2S / 2
7
7.2 Size 1 / 2S / 2
[1] [3]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[1] X1: Power supply connection 3-phase: L1 / L2 / L3 / PE screw

[3] X4: DC link connection –UZ / +UZ
[4] X2: Motor connection U / V / W / PE screw
[5] X3: Braking resistor connection R+ / R– / PE
[7] X17: Safety contact for safe stop (only 400 / 500 V)
[8] Electronics shield clamp
[13] Option card slot

Unit design
7 Size 3
7.3 Size 3
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[8]
[1] X2: PE connection

[2] X1: Power supply connection 3-phase: 1/L1 / 2/L2 / 3/L3
[3] X4: DC link connection –UZ / +UZ
[5] X2: Motor connection U (4) / V (5) / W (6)
[6] X3: Braking resistor connection R+ (8) / R– (9) and PE connection

Unit design
Size 4 / 5
7
7.4 Size 4 / 5
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[7]
[8]
[4] [5] [6]

[2] X1: Power supply connection 3-phase: 1/L1 / 2/L2 / 3/L3
[3] X4: DC link connection –UZ / +UZ and PE connection
[5] X2: Motor connection U (4) / V (5) / W (6)
[6] X3: Braking resistor connection R+ (8) / R– (9) and PE connection

Unit design
7 Unit designation / nameplate
7.5 Unit designation / nameplate

MC 07 B 0004- 2 B 1- 4- 00
00 = Standard
Design
S0 = Safe stop
Quadrants 4 = 4Q (with brake chopper)
Connection type 3 = 3-phase / 1 = 1-phase

0 = No radio interference suppression
Radio interference sup-
A = Radio interference suppression C2
pression
B = Radio interference suppression C1
2 = AC 200 ... 240 V
Supply voltage
5 = AC 380 ... 500 V
Recommended motor
0022 = 2.2 kW
power
Version B
Series and generation
MOVITRAC® type
The unit status is indicated above the lower barcode.

Installation
Installation notes
8
8 Installation
8.1 Installation notes
NOTE
Comply with the safety notes during installation.
8.1.1 Mounting the front options
[1]
[A]
[2]
[1] [3]
[4]
[B]
[2]
[1]
[C]
[2]
Observe the following sequence when mounting the front options:

• To mount the FBG11B [A] keypad, first insert it on top of the housing [1]. Next, press
the socket on the keypad onto the connector of the unit [2].
• For the FSC11B communication module and the FIO11B analog module [B], insert
the spacer bolt first for size 0 [1].
Insert the FSC11B communication module and the FIO11B module [B] first at the
bottom of the housing [2] before pressing the socket of the front option onto the
connector of the unit [3].
Finally secure the front option using the screw on the unit [4].
• To install the cover [C], first place it onto the unit approximately 5 mm away from the
final position [1]. Next, move it upwards [2].

Installation
8 Installation notes
8.1.2 Recommended tools

• Use a screwdriver with a 2.5 mm wide blade for connecting the electronics terminal
strip X10 / X12 / X13.
8.1.3 Minimum clearance and mounting position

• Leave 100 mm (3.94 in) clearance at the top and bottom of the housing for
optimum cooling. There is no need for clearance at the sides. You can line up the
units directly next to one another. It is important that air circulation is not impeded by
cables and other installation material. Prevent the heated exhaust air from other units
from blowing onto this unit. Install the units vertically only.You must not install them
horizontally, tilted or upside down.
• Proper heat dissipation of the rear side of the heat sink improves the thermal
utilization of the unit.
100 mm
(3.94 in)
100 mm
(3.94 in)
8.1.4 Separate cable ducts

• Route power leads and electronics leads in separate cable ducts.

Installation
Installation notes
8
8.1.5 EMC-compliant installation

• All cables except for the supply system lead must be shielded. For the motor cable,
you can use the HD.. option (output choke) instead of the shielding to meet the
interference emission limit values.
• When using shielded motor cables, e.g. prefabricated motor cables from SEW-
EURODRIVE, you must keep the unshielded conductors between the shield and
connection terminal of the inverter as short as possible.
• Apply the shield by the shortest possible route and make sure it is grounded
over a wide area at both ends. If using double-shielded cables, ground the outer
shield on the inverter end and the inner shield at the other end.
• You can also use earthed sheet-metal ducts or metal pipes to shield the cables.
Route the power and control cables separately.
• Provide high frequency compatible grounding for the inverter and all additional
units (wide area metal-on-metal contact between the unit housing and ground, e.g.
unpainted control cabinet mounting panel).
8.1.6 IT systems
• SEW recommends using earth-leakage monitors with a pulse code measuring
process in voltage supply systems with a non-earthed star point (IT systems).
Use of such devices prevents the earth-leakage monitor mis-tripping due to the earth
capacitance of the inverter.
• For size 0, SEW recommends deactivating the interference suppressor filter using
the enclosed insulation discs (see Deactivating EMC capacitors (size 0 only) (see
page 174)).
8.1.7 Contactor
• Only use contactors in utilization category AC-3 (EN 60947-4-1).
8.1.8 Cross sections

• Supply system lead: Cross section according to rated input current Imains at rated
load.
Motor lead: Cross section according to rated output current IN
Electronics cables: Maximum 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) without conductor end sleeves1)
Maximum 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves
1) Fine wired cables may not be installed without conductor end sleeves.

Installation
8.1.9 Cable lengths for individual drives

• The cable lengths depend on the PWM frequency. The permitted motor cable lengths
are listed in the "Project Planning" section of the MOVITRAC® B system manual.
8.1.10 Unit output

• Only connect an ohmic/inductive load (motor), do not connect a capacitive load!
8.1.11 Braking resistor connection

• Cut the lines to the required length.
• Use 2 tightly twisted leads or a 2-core shielded power cable. Cross-section
according to the rated output current of the inverter.
• Protect the braking resistor with a bimetallic relay with trip class 10 or 10A (wiring
diagram). Set the trip current according to the technical data of the braking
resistor.
• For BW..-T braking resistors, you can connect the integrated thermostat using a
2-core, shielded cable as an alternative to a bimetallic relay.
• Flat-type braking resistors have internal thermal overload protection (fuse which
cannot be replaced). Install the flat-type braking resistors together with the
appropriate touch guard.

Installation
Installation notes
8
8.1.12 Installing the braking resistor

• The supply cables to the braking resistors carry a high voltage (approx. DC 900 V)
during rated operation.
• The surfaces of the braking resistors get very hot when the braking resistors are
loaded with Prated. Choose a suitable installation location. Braking resistors are
usually mounted on the control cabinet roof.
8.1.13 Binary outputs

• The binary outputs are short-circuit proof and protected against external
voltage to 30 V. Higher external voltages can destroy the binary outputs.
8.1.14 Interference emission

• Use shielded motor cables or HD output chokes for EMC compliant installation.
8.1.15 Switched inductances
NOTE
The minimum distance of switched inductances to the inverter must be at least
150 mm (5.91 in).
• Use suppressors to suppress interference on

– contactors
– relays
– solenoid valves
Suppressors are, for example, diodes, varistors, or RC elements:
Do not connect any suppressors directly on MOVITRAC® B. Connect suppressors as

closely as possible to the inductance.
8.1.16 Line filters

MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters have an integrated line filter as standard. They
comply with the following limit value class to EN 55011 on the line side without further
measures:
• Single-phase connection: C1 cable conducted
• Three-phase connection: C2
No EMC limits are specified for interference emission in voltage suply systems without
an earthed star point (IT system). The efficiency of line filters is severely limited.

Installation
8.1.17 Line protection and earth-leakage circuit breaker

• Install the fuses at the beginning of the mains cable behind the supply bus
junction (→ Basic unit wiring diagram).
• SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you do not use earth-leakage circuit breakers.
However, if an earth-leakage circuit breaker is stipulated for direct or indirect protec-
tion against contact, observe the following note in accordance with EN 61800-5-1:
WARNING!
Wrong type of earth-leakage circuit breaker installed.
Severe or fatal injuries.
MOVITRAC® can cause direct current in the protective earth. In cases where an earth-
leakage circuit breaker is used for protection against direct or indirect contact, only
install a type B earth-leakage circuit breaker on the power supply end of the
MOVITRAC unit.
8.1.18 PE mains connection (→ EN 61800-5-1)

Earth-leakage currents ≥ 3.5 mA may occur during normal operation. To meet the
requirements of EN 61800-5-1 observe the following:
• Supply system lead < 10 mm2 (AWG7):
– Route a second PE conductor with the same cross section as the supply system
lead in parallel to the protective earth via separate terminals, or
– use a copper protective earth conductor with a cross section of 10 mm2 (AWG7)
• Supply system cable 10 mm2 ... 16 mm2 (AWG7 ... AWG5):
– Copper protective earth conductor with the cross section of the supply system
lead.
• Supply system cable 16 mm2 ... 35 mm2 (AWG5 ... AWG2):
– Copper protective earth conductor with a cross section of 16 mm2 (AWG5)
• Supply system lead > 35 mm2 (AWG2):
– Copper protective earth conductor with half the cross section of the supply system
lead.

Installation
Installing the optional power components
8
8.2 Installing the optional power components

When more than five 3-phase units or more than one 1-phase unit are connected to
a supply system contactor designed for the total current: Connect a line choke for
limiting the inrush current.
8.2.1 ND line choke

ND ... series line choke connection
8.2.2 NF line filter

• The NF.. line filter can be used to maintain the limit value class C1/B for MOVITRAC®
B units sizes 0 to 4.
STOP!
Possible damage to property
Do not switch between the line filter and MOVITRAC®.
• Consequences if disregarded: Damage to the input level.
• Install the line filter close to the inverter but outside the minimum clearance for
cooling.
• Restrict the cable between the line filter and the inverter to the absolute
minimum length required, and never more than 400 mm (15.7 in). Unshielded,
twisted cables are sufficient. Also use unshielded cables as the supply system lead.
Connecting NF...-... line filters

Installation
8 Installing the optional power components
8.2.3 ULF11A foldable ferrites

Place the supply system cable (L and N) in the foldable ferrite and press the foldable
ferrites together until they snap in place.
Compliance with EMC limit class C1 has been tested on a specified test setup. Compli-
ance with class C1 for signal interference is achieved by the proper installation of the
foldable ferrites ULF11A.
8.2.4 HF output filter
NOTE
• Install output filters next to the corresponding inverter. Leave a ventilation space of
at least 100 mm (3.94 in) below and above the output filter. No clearance is
required on the sides.
• Limit the connection cable between inverter and output filter to the absolutely
necessary length. Maximum 1 m/3 ft with unshielded cable, 10 m/33 ft with shielded
cable.
• Several motors can be connected to one output filter when operating a motor group
from one inverter. The total value of the rated motor currents must not exceed the
rated throughput current of the output filter.
• Two identical output filters can be connected in parallel to one inverter output to
double the rated throughput current. To do this, connect all like connections to the
output filters in parallel.
• Output filter connection V5 (with HF...-503) or 7 (with HF...-403) must not be
connected when the inverter is operated with fPWM = 4 or 8 kHz.
• No VDC link connection is permitted for size 0XS units.
HF output filter connection without VDC link connection (PWM frequency only 4 or 8 kHz)
B
X1 X2/3
+R
HF output filter connection without VDC link connection (PWM frequency only 12 or
16 kHz)
B
X1 X2/3
+R

Installation
Installing the optional power components
8
8.2.5 HD output choke

• Install the output choke close to MOVITRAC® B outside the minimum clearance.
• Always route all three phases (not PE) together through the output choke.
• If the cable is shielded, do not route the shield through the output choke.
When using the HD output choke, the cable must be

4 5 6 wrapped around the choke 5 times.
U V W PE
Only 5 loops are possible if the cable has a large diam-
n=5
eter. To make up for this, 2 or 3 output chokes should be
connected in series. SEW recommends connecting in
series 2 output chokes in case of 4 windings and 3
output chokes in case of 3 windings.
• Installing HD012 output choke:

Install output choke under the corresponding inverter. Leave a ventilation space of at
least 100 mm (3.94 in) below and above the output choke. Provide a clearance of
10 mm (0.39 in) on each side.
Three alternative connection options are provided for connecting the protective
earth. You can connect the PE line of the motor cable directly on the frequency
inverter.

Installation
8 Installing the optional power components
8.2.6 FKE12B / FKE13B EMC-modules

Use the supplied screws to mount the EMC module together with the MOVITRAC® B
frequency inverter onto the conductive mounting surface in the control cabinet.
The connections U / V / W are labeled U / V / W and have to be connected accordingly.
The connections L1 / L2 / L3 (brown / orange / white) can be connected in any order.
L1 L2 L3 PE L1 L2 L3
FKE MOVITRAC® B
PE
U V W U V W
M
3 ~
8.2.7 PTC braking resistors BW1 / BW3 with FKB10B

BW1 and BW3 PTC braking resistors can be mounted to the shield plate underneath the
inverter using the angle bracket FDB10B, part number 18216218 available as option.

Installation
UL compliant installation
8
8.2.8 Flat-design resistors with FKB11/12/13B and FHS11/12/13B

Flat-design resistors can be mounted between inverter and control cabinet with FKB11/
12/13B or FHS11/12/13B.
FKB11/12/13B FHS11/12/13B
8.3 UL compliant installation

Please note the following points for UL compliant installation:
• Use only copper cables with the following temperature ranges as connection cables:
– MOVITRAC® B 0003 ... 0300: temperature range 60/75 °C (140/167 °F)
– MOVITRAC® B 0370 and 0450: temperature range 75 °C (167 °F)
• Necessary tightening torques of MOVITRAC® B power terminals: See installation
notes.
• Operate the inverters on supply systems with a maximum phase-to-earth voltage of
AC 300 V only.
• The inverter can only be operated on IT systems if the phase-to-earth voltage of
AC 300 V cannot be exceeded either during operation or in case of an error.
• MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters are only allowed to be operated on supply
systems which can supply maximum values in accordance with the following table.
Only use melting fuses. The performance data of the fuses must not exceed the
values in the following table.

Installation
8 UL compliant installation
8.3.1 Maximum values/fuses

The following maximum values/fuses must be observed for UL compliant installation:
230 V units / 1-phase Max. mains current Max. mains voltage Fuses
0003 / 0004 / 0005 / 0008 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 15 A / 250 V
0011 / 0015 / 0022 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 30 A / 250 V
230 V units / 3-phase Max. mains current Max. mains voltage Fuses
0003 / 0004 / 0005 / 0008 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 15 A / 250 V
0011 / 0015 / 0022 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 20 A / 250 V
0037 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 30 A / 250 V
0055 / 0075 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 110 A / 250 V
0110 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 175 A / 250 V
0150 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 225 A / 250 V
0220 / 0300 AC 10000 A AC 240 V 350 A / 250 V
400 / 500 V units Max. mains current Max. mains voltage Fuses
0003 / 0004 / 0005 / 0008 / AC 5000 A AC 500 V 15 A / 600 V
0011 / 0015
0022 / 0030 / 0040 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 20 A / 600 V
0055 / 0075 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 60 A / 600 V
0110 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 110 A / 600 V
0150 / 0220 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 175 A / 600 V
0300 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 225 A / 600 V
0370 / 0450 AC 10000 A AC 500 V 350 A / 600 V
0550 / 0750 AC 10000 A AC 500 V 500 A / 600 V
NOTES
• Only use tested units with a limited output voltage (Vmax = DC 30 V) and limited
output current (I ≤ 8 A) as an external DC 24 V voltage source.
• UL certification does not apply to operation in voltage supply systems with a
non-grounded star point (IT systems).

Installation
Scope of delivery and installation of loose items
8
8.4 Scope of delivery and installation of loose items

8.4.1 Scope of delivery of loose items
The scope of delivery includes a bag for loose items. Its contents depends on the
inverter size.
Scope of delivery of loose items for size
0XS / 0S / 0L 1 2S 2 3 4/5
• Shield plate for control electronics with clamps and screws [1]
• 3 connectors for electronics terminals [2]
• Grounding terminals with screws [4] – –
• Shield plate for the power section • Shield plate for • Touch guard – –
with clamps and screws [3] the power section • Shield plate for the
• Connector for mains (2 or 3-pole) without screws power section with
and motor [5] screws
• Plastic insulations with stickers [6] • Fixing straps – – • Touch guard
Loose items for size 0:
X1
[5] [4]
X2
X10
[2] X12
X13
[1]
M4u20
2 u M4u20
7 u M4u10
[6]
EMV-Kondensatoren deaktiviert.
EMC Capacitors deactivated.
Condensateurs CEM désactivés. [3]
8196737.LBL

Installation
8 Scope of delivery and installation of loose items
8.4.2 Installing shield plate for control electronics (all sizes)

MOVITRAC® B includes a shield plate for the control electron-
ics with a retaining screw as standard. Install the shield plate for
control electronics as follows:
1. Loosen the screw first [1].
2. Push the shield clamp through the slot in the plastic housing.
3. Fasten the shield clamp.
[1]
8.4.3 Installing shield plate for power section

Size 0 A power shield plate for the power section with 2 retaining screws is supplied as
standard with MOVITRAC® size 0. Mount the shield plate for the power section using
the two retaining screws.
[1]
[2]
[1] PE connection [2] Shield plate

Installation
8
Size 1 SEW-EURODRIVE supplies a shield plate for the power section as standard with
MOVITRAC® B size 1. Mount the shield plate for the power section using the unit's two
retaining screws.
[1]
[2]
[1] Shield clamp [2] PE connection
Sizes 2S / 2 SEW-EURODRIVE supplies a shield plate for the power section with two retaining
screws as standard with MOVITRAC® B sizes 2S / 2. Mount the shield plate for the
power section using the two retaining screws. The illustration shows size 2.
[1] Shield clamp [2] PE connection
The shield plate for the power section provides you with a very convenient way of install-
ing the shield for the motor and brake cables. Apply the shield and PE conductor as
shown in the figures.
Sizes 3 ... 5 With MOVITRAC® B sizes 3 ... 5, no shield plates are supplied for the power section.
Use commercially available shield clamps for installing the shielding of motor and brake
cables. Apply the shield as closely as possible to the inverter.

Installation
8 Scope of delivery and installation of loose items
8.4.4 Installing the touch guard
HAZARD!
Uncovered power connections.
• Install the touch guard according to the regulations.
• Never start the unit if the touch guard is not installed.
Size 2S SEW-EURODRIVE supplies two touch guards for the DC link and braking resistor
terminals as standard with MOVITRAC® B size 2S. Without touch guard,
MOVITRAC® B size 2S has degree of protection IP10. When the touch guard is
installed, the unit has degree of protection IP20.
IP10
X4
-UZ +UZ PE
IP20
X4
-UZ +UZ PE
IP10
X3
8/+R 9/-R PE
IP20
X3
8/+R 9/-R PE

Installation
8
Sizes 4 / 5 Two touch guards with 8 retaining screws are supplied as standard with MOVITRAC®
sizes 4 / 5. Install the touch guard on both covers of the power section terminals.
Touch guard for MOVITRAC® B sizes 4 / 5:
[2]
[1]
[3]
The touch guard comprises the following parts:

[1] Cover plate
[2] Connection plate
[3] Screen (only for size 4)
The MOVITRAC® B unit sizes 4 / 5 can only achieve degree of protection IP10 when the
following conditions are met:
• Touch guard is fully installed
• The shrink tubing is installed on all power terminals (X1, X2, X3, X4)
NOTE
If the above conditions are not met, MOVITRAC® units sizes 4 and 5 have degree of
protection IP00.

Installation
8 Installing cold plate
8.5 Installing cold plate

The dissipation of the frequency inverter power loss can take place via coolers that work
with different cooling media (air, water, oil, etc.). This can be useful, for example, in
restricted installation spaces. When adhering to the usual installation notes (40 °C
(104 °F) / 100 mm (3.94 in) space above and below), cold-plate technology is not
necessary.
A good thermal connection to the cooler is important for safe operation of frequency
inverters:
• The contact area between cooler and frequency inverter has to be the size of the
frequency inverter cooling plate.
• Level contact surface, deviation max. up to 0.05 mm (0.0002 in).
• Connect cooler and cooling plate with all necessary screw connections.
• The mounting plate must not exceed 70 °C (158 °F) during operation. This must be
ensured by the cooling medium.
• Cold plate installation is not possible with FHS or FKB.
8.6 Deactivating EMC capacitors (size 0 only)

Only electricians are allowed to convert the unit. Once converted, the unit must be
marked with the sticker provided in the accessory bag.
HAZARD!
• Disconnect the inverter from the power. Switch off the DC 24 V and the line
voltage.
• Wait 10 seconds.
• Ensure that the unit is de-energized.
• Take appropriate measures to avoid electrostatic charges (use discharge strap,
conductive shoes, etc.) before removing the cover.
• Touch only the unit frame and heat sink. Do not touch any electronic components.
Proceed as follows to deactivate the EMC capacitors for MOVITRAC® B:
1. Open the unit:
– Remove all connectors.
– Remove the electronics shield clamp.
– Remove the housing retaining screw in the center of the housing front.
– Remove the housing.

Installation
Deactivating EMC capacitors (size 0 only)
8
2. Remove the two screws [A] securing the circuit board.

3. Install the screws in the plastic insulations provided [B].
4. Fasten screws to the unit [C].
5. Close the unit.
6. Attach the sticker provided to the unit.
[A] [A]
[B]
[C] [C]
Deactivating the EMC capacitors stops earth-leakage currents from flowing over the
EMC capacitors.
• Please ensure that the earth-leakage currents are essentially only determined by the
level of the DC link voltage, the PWM frequency, the applied motor cable and its
length and the motor used.
When the suppression capacitors are deactivated, the EMC filter is no longer active.
NOTE
IT systems
• No EMC limits are specified for interference emission in voltage supply systems
without a grounded star point (IT systems).

Installation
8 Wiring diagram
8.7 Wiring diagram

3 x AC 400/500 V / PE
1 x AC 230 V / N / PE 3 x AC 230 V / PE
[1]
–UZ +UZ
PE 7 8 PE X4
Changeover
REF1
0 ... 10 V*
®
MOVITRAC B 0 ... 20 mA; 4 ... 20 mA
Reference potential analog signals
Higher-level
S1 S2
control
ON ON
Binary input
Fault reset
X44 OFF OFF
CW/stop
CCW stop Binary
FSC11B Enable/stop* outputs
}
X45 X46 n13 = n11 + n12
HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Supply voltage for
+24V input/output (can be disabled) 24VIO Reference
Reference potential binary signals binary outputs
Reference potential
Brake released*
Ready
Reference potential
Relay contact/fault
NOC relay
X17: NCC relay
X17 "Safe stop"
3 SOV24
1 DGND
4 SVI24
2 VO24
only with 400 V

5.5 ... 75 kW
and
0.55 ... 4.0 kW PE PE X2
MC07B...-S0 X3
[1] [1]
→ Section "Connecting
braking resistor BW.. / BW..-T / BW..-P"
→ Section "Connecting
the brake rectifier" 3-phase Factory setting
[1] In sizes 1, 2S, and 2, there is no PE connection next to the power supply connection
terminals and motor connection terminals [X1]/[X2]. In this case, use the PE terminal
next to the DC link connection [X4].
From size 3 onwards, there are two additional PE terminals.

Installation
TF thermistor and TH bimetallic switch
8
8.8 TF thermistor and TH bimetallic switch

The winding temperature is monitored using TF thermistors or TH bimetallic switches.
The connection is made at the TF output VOTF and the TF input DI05TF of
MOVITRAC®. The binary input DI05TF must be set to TF signal. The temperature will
then be monitored by MOVITRAC®; no additional monitoring unit is required.
A connection can also be made to 24VIO and a binary output when using TH bimetallic
switches. Set the binary input to /External fault.
8.9 Connecting braking resistors BW.. / BW..-T / BW..-P to X3 / X2
X2/X3: X2/X3: X2/X3:

+R -R PE +R -R PE +R -R PE
8 9 8 9
F16
→ K11
BW...-...-P BW...-...-T
97 95
RB1 T2
F16 → K11
→ K11
98 96
T1
4 6
RB2 BW...
A terminal must be set to "/Controller inhibit". K11 must be opened and "/Controller
inhibit" must receive a "0" signal in the following cases:
• BW...-...-P: The auxiliary contact trips
• BW...-...-T: The internal temperature switch trips
• BW...: The external bimetallic relay F16 trips
The resistor circuit must not be interrupted.
Overload protection for braking resistors BW:

Overload protection
Braking resistor type Design Internal temperature External bimetallic
specified switch (..T) relay (F16)
BW... – – Required
1)
BW...-...-T – One of the two options (internal temperature switch /
external bimetallic relay) is required.
BW...-003 / BW...-005 Adequate – Permitted
1) Permitted installation: On horizontal or vertical surfaces with brackets at the bottom and
perforated sheets at top and bottom. Not permitted: On vertical surfaces with brackets at the top,
right or left.

Installation
8 Connecting the brake rectifier
8.10 Connecting the brake rectifier

NOTE
The connection of the brake rectifier requires a separate supply system cable; supply
from the motor voltage is not permitted!
Use contactors of utilization category AC-3 for K11 and K12 only.
Always switch off the brake on the DC and AC sides in:
• All hoist applications.
• Drives which require a rapid brake response time.
If the brake rectifier is installed in the control cabinet, route the connecting leads
between the brake rectifier and the brake separately from other power cables. Routing
together with other cables is only permitted if the other cables are shielded.
Wiring diagrams
DOØ2
GND
Cut-off in the Cut-off in the Cut-off in the

AC and DC circuits AC and DC circuits AC circuit
Note the corresponding connection regulations for brakes without BG/BGE or BME.
Refer to the SEW publication "Drive Engineering - Practical Implementation: SEW Disc
Brakes" for more information.

Installation
Installing FSC11B / FIO11B
8
8.11 Installing FSC11B / FIO11B

You can enhance the basic units with the FSC11B and FIO11B modules.
S1 S2
ON
OFF
X44 X44
FSC11B FIO11B
X45 X46 X45 X40
HL A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HL A 1 2 3 4 5
Connection/unit FIO11B FSC11B

RS-485 service interface X44 Yes Yes
RS-485 terminal connection X45 Yes Yes
SBus connection X46 No Yes
Analog input/output X40 Yes No
8.11.1 Mounting and installation on FSC11B/FIO11B

Always attach the option to the unit with the screw that is included. For size 0, mount the
spacer bolt first. The bolt is already installed in sizes 1 and higher. Fitting the screw
secures the high-frequency EMC connection between the basic unit and the option.
Function Termi- Description Data FSC11B FIO11B
nal
Service X44 Via RJ10 plug Only for service Yes Yes
interface connector purposes
Maximum cable
length 3 m (10 ft)
RS-485 X45:H ST11: RS-485+ Yes Yes
interface
X45:L ST12: RS-485–
X45:⊥ GND: Reference
potential
System bus X46:1 SC11: SBus high CAN bus to CAN Yes No
specification 2.0,
parts A and B
X46:3 GND: Reference Max. 64 stations
potential Terminating resistor
X46:4 SC21: SBus high 120 can be acti-
vated via DIP switch
X46:6 GND: Reference
potential
DC 24 V X46:7 24VIO: Auxiliary volt- Yes No
age / external voltage
supply
Analog input X40:1 AI2: Voltage input –10 ... +10 V No Yes
X40:2 GND: Reference Ri > 40 k
potential Resolution 10 bit
Sampling time 5 ms

Installation
8 Installing FSC11B / FIO11B
Function Termi- Description Data FSC11B FIO11B

nal
Analog X40:3 GND: Reference 0 ... +10 V No Yes
output potential Imax = 2 mA
X40:4 AOV1: Voltage output 0 (4) ... 20 mA
X40:5 AOI1: Current output Resolution 10 bit
Sampling time 5 ms
Short-circuit proof,
protected against
external voltage up to
30 V
The DC 24 V function of X46:7 is identical to X12:8 of the basic unit. All GND terminals
of the unit are connected to each other and to PE.
Cable specification • Use a 4-core twisted and shielded copper cable (data transmission cable with braided
copper shield). The cable must meet the following specifications:
– Core cross section 0.25 ... 0.75 mm2 (AWG 23 ... AWG 18)
– Cable resistance 120 at 1 MHz
– Capacitance per unit length ≤ 40 pF/m at 1 kHz
Suitable cables include CAN bus or DeviceNet cables.
Connecting the shield • Connect the shield to the electronics shield clamp on the inverter or master controller and
make sure it is connected over a wide area at both ends.
• There is no need for a ground connections between MOVITRAC® B and gateways, or
MOVITRAC® B and MOVITRAC® B with shielded cables. A 2-core cable is permitted in this
case.
• When connecting MOVIDRIVE® B and MOVITRAC® B, be aware that the electrical isola-
tion is eliminated between the reference potential DGND and ground in MOVIDRIVE® B.
STOP!
Potential displacement
Possible consequences include malfunctions that could lead to irreparable damage to
the unit.
• There must not be any potential displacement between the connected units. Take
appropriate measures to avoid potential displacement, such as connecting the
unit ground connectors using a separate cable.

Installation
8
8.11.2 Installing the system bus (SBus) to FSC11B

Max. 64 CAN bus nodes can be addressed via the system bus (SBus). The SBus
supports transmission technology compliant with ISO 11898.
S1 S2 SC11/SC12 SC21/SC22
Off Off CAN1 CAN1
On Off CAN1 concluded –
X On Reserved
MOVITRAC® B system bus connection
MOVITRAC® B MOVITRAC® B MOVIDRIVE® B

S12
S1 S2 S1 S2 ON OFF
ON ON
OFF OFF X12:
X44 X44
DGND 1
SC11 2
FSC11B FSC11B SC12 3
X45 X46 X45 X46
HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
System bus connection MOVITRAC®B with UFx

®
MOVITRAC B
UFx S1 S2
ON
OFF
X44
FSC11B
X45 X46
HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Installation
8 Installing FSC11B / FIO11B
System bus connection MOVITRAC® B with DFx/UOH11B gateways or DFx integrated

in MOVITRAC® B
UOH11B
DFP21B
RUN
BUS
FAULT
9 5
6 1
X30
0 1
20
21
22
23
24 ®
25
MOVITRAC B
26
AS
ADDRESS S1 S2
H1 ON
H2 OFF
X44
X24
FSC11B
X26 X45 X46
1234567 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+ 24 V
GND
Line length • The permitted total cable length depends on the baud rate setting of the SBus (P884):
– 125 kBaud: 320 m (1050 ft)
– 250 kBaud: 160 m (525 ft)
– 500 kBaud: 80 m (260 ft)
– 1000 kBaud: 40 m (130 ft)
• You must use shielded cables.
NOTE
Terminating resistor: Switch on the system bus terminating resistor (S1 = ON) at the
start and end of the system bus connection. Switch off the terminating resistor on the
units in between (S1 = OFF).
Certain units have a permanently integrated terminating resistor that cannot be
switched off. This is the case for UFx and DFx/UOH. These gateways form the end of
the physical line. Do not connect any external terminating resistors.

Installation
8
8.11.3 Installing RS-485 interface to FSC11B

The RS-485 interface can be used for connecting max. 32 MOVITRAC® units or 31
MOVITRAC® units and a higher-level controller (PLC).
MOVITRAC® B RS-485 connection
MOVITRAC® B MOVITRAC® B MOVIDRIVE® B
X13
X44 X44
DGND 9
FSC11B / FSC11B / ST11 10
FIO11B FIO11B ST12 11
X45 X46 X45 X46
HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Cable length • The permitted total cable length is 200 m.

• You must use shielded cables.
NOTE
Terminating resistor: Dynamic terminating resistors are installed. Do not connect any
external terminating resistors.
8.11.4 Wiring analog module FIO11B
Bipolar analog input Unipolar analog Current analog out- Voltage analog out-
AI2 input AI2 put AOC1 put AOV1
X45 X40 X45 X40 X45 X40 X45 X40

RS-485+
RS-485+
RS-485+
RS-485+
RS-485–
RS-485–
RS-485–
RS-485–
AOC1
AOC1
AOC1
AOC1
AOV1
AOV1
AOV1
AOV1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
AI2
AI2
AI2
AI2
HL A 1 2 3 4 5 HL A 1 2 3 4 5 HL A 1 2 3 4 5 HL A 1 2 3 4 5
GND
A V
RL
GND
–10 V +10 V +10 V
external external external RL ≤ 750 Ω
or
X10:1

Installation
8 Installing MBG11A speed control module
8.12 Installing MBG11A speed control module

• Mounting A from the rear using 4 tapped holes.
• Mounting B from the front using 2 retaining holes
A B
A A
88 (3.5)
60 (2.4)
B B
28 (1.1)
M4
A A
56 (2.2)
68 (2.7)
8.12.1 Connection
®
MOVITRAC B
S1 S2
ON
OFF
X44
FSC11B
MBG11A
X45 X46
HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1234

Startup I
Brief description of the startup process
9
0
9 Startup
9.1 Brief description of the startup process
The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter can be connected directly to a motor of the same
power. For example: A 1.5 kW (2.0 HP) motor can be connected directly to a
MC07B0015.
9.1.1 Procedure
1. Connect the motor to MOVITRAC® B
3-phase 1-phase
(terminal X2).
PE
2. You have the option of connecting a
braking resistor (terminal X2/X3).

3. The following signal terminals must be
controlled with your control system: Changeover
• Enable DI∅3
REF1
• As required CW/Stop DI∅1 or CCW/

Reference potential analog signals GND
Stop DI∅2
• Setpoint:
Fault reset
• Analog input X10 and/or CW/stop
CCW/stop
• DI∅4 = n11 = 150 rpm or/and Enable/stop*
}
n13 = n11 + n12
• DI∅5 = n12 = 750 rpm or/and
Supply voltage
input/output 24VIO
• DI∅4 + DI∅5 = n13 = 1500 rpm Reference potential binary signals
• For brakemotors:
DO∅2 = Brake control using brake Reference potential
Brake released*
rectifiers Ready
Reference potential
4. You have the option of connecting the Relay contact/fault
NOC relay
following signal terminals: NCC relay
• DI∅∅ = Fault reset

• DO∅1 = /Fault (designed as relay
X2 PE
contact) X3
• DO∅3 = Ready
5. Check the controller for the required Shield clamp
functionality. Factory setting
6. Connect the frequency inverter to the

mains (X1). 3-phase
9.1.2 Notes
Signal terminal functions and setpoint settings can be modified using the FBG11B
keypad or a PC. A PC connection requires the FSC11B front option or one of the follow-
ing interface adapters: UWS21B / UWS11A / USB11A.
NOTE
The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter must only be operated in strict
observance of the detailed operating instructions.

I Startup
9 General startup instructions
0
9.2 General startup instructions
HAZARD!
Uncovered power connections.
• Install the touch guard according to the regulations.
• Never start the unit if the touch guard is not installed.
9.2.1 Prerequisite
The drive must be configured correctly to ensure that startup is successful.
MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters are factory set to be taken into operation with the SEW
motor adapted to the correct power level (4-pole, 50 Hz) in V/f control mode.
9.2.2 Hoist applications
HAZARD!
Risk of fatal injury if the hoist falls.
MOVITRAC® B may not be used as a safety device in hoist applications.
• Use monitoring systems or mechanical protection devices to ensure safety.

Startup I
Preliminary work and resources
9
0
9.3 Preliminary work and resources

• Check the installation.
HAZARD!
Risk of crushing if the motor starts up unintentionally.
• Ensure that the motor cannot start inadvertently, for example, by removing the
electronics terminal block X13.
• Additional safety precautions must be taken depending on the application, such as
monitoring systems or mechanical protection devices, to avoid injury to people and
damage to machinery.
9.3.1 Preliminary work and resources on the MOVITRAC® B basic unit

• Connect the supply system and the motor.
• Connect the signal terminals.
• Switch on the power supply system.
9.3.2 Preliminary work and resources on MOVITRAC® B with keypad

• Connect the supply system and the motor. Do not connect signal terminals!
• The display shows Stop.
• Program the signal terminals.
• Set the parameters correctly (e.g. ramps).
• Check the set terminal assignment ( P601 ... P622).
• Switch off the power supply system.
• Connect the signal terminals.
NOTE
The inverter automatically changes parameter values once you perform a startup.

I Startup
9 Optional keypad FBG11B
0
9.4 Optional keypad FBG11B

Key arrangement and symbols on keypad:
9.4.1 Keypad functions

The UP/DOWN and ENTER/OUT buttons are used for navigating through the mmodule
is used for setpoint specification.
Use UP/DOWN to select symbols and change values.
out ENTER/OUT to activate and deactivate the symbols or parameter menus

Enter
Press "RUN" to start the drive.

RUN
STOP
"STOP/RESET" is used for resetting errors and for stopping the drive.
RESET
STOP The STOP/RESET button has priority over a terminal enable or an enable via the inter-
RESET
face. If you stop a drive using the STOP/RESET key, you have to enable it again by
pressing the RUN key.
NOTE
After switching off the power supply, press the STOP key to revoke the lock.
The STOP/RESET key can be used for performing a reset after a fault has occurred with
a programmed error response. The drive is then inhibited and must be enabled using
the RUN key. You can deactivate the STOP function with parameter 760 using FBG11B.
If you stop the drive with the STOP/RESET key, the display Stop is flashing. This signal
RUN
indicates you have to enable the drive using the "RUN" key.
After copying the parameter set in MOVITRAC® B, the unit is also stopped.

Startup I
Basic operation of the FBG11B keypad
9
0
9.5 Basic operation of the FBG11B keypad

Level 1 Level 2
Display
inverter status
speed
Display out Enter Modify Enter Modify/accept

ramp up ramp up [s] value

ramp down ramp down [s] value
Fixed setpoint menu
Edit mode
Selection out Enter out Enter
nxx fixed setpoint menu
Enter Modify/accept
value

nmax maximum setpoint maximum speed value
[rpm]
Parameter menu Edit mode

Select out Enter out Enter
Par parameter menu
Enter Modify/accept
value
Select out Enter

motor startup Motor statup menu
Select
data backup
out Enter
Data backup menu
Select FBG out Enter

speed ctr. module FBG speed control module
Display
initial frequency
Display
output current

I Startup
9 Basic operation of the FBG11B keypad
0
9.5.1 Menu system

The LED integrated in the symbol lights up when you select a symbol. If a symbol only
represents display values, the current display value appears immediately on the display.
9.5.2 Changing parameters

You can select the required parameter by selecting a symbol and pressing the ENTER
key.
Press the ENTER key again to edit the parameter value. You can alter the value when
the LED in the corresponding symbol flashes. When pressing the ENTER key again, the
value becomes active and the LED does not flash any longer.
9.5.3 Status display

If the status is "Drive enabled", the display will show the calculated actual speed.
9.5.4 Fault display

In the event of a fault, the display changes and the fault code flashes in the display, for
example F-11 (refer to the fault list in the "Operation and Service" section). This situa-
tion will not occur during active startup.
9.5.5 Warnings
You may not alter any parameter in any operating mode. If you try to do so, the display
r-19 ... r-32 will appear. The display shows a code depending on the action, e.g.
r-28 (controller inhibit required). You find a list of warnings in the Operation and Service
section.
9.5.6 Parameter menu change short ↔ long

Using parameter P800, you can switch back and forth between short menu and long
menu. The parameter description and parameter list indicates which parameters are
accessible via short and long menu.

Startup I
Manual operation with FBG11B speed control module
9
0
9.6 Manual operation with FBG11B speed control module

FBG11B speed control module of the keypad (local manual operation): LED
flashes
The only relevant parameters in "FBG speed control module" operating mode are:
• P122 Direction of rotation FBG manual operation
• "RUN" and "STOP/RESET" keys
• Speed control module
When the FBG speed control module is activated, the symbol flashes.
You limit the smallest speed with P301 Minimum speed and the largest speed with the
nmax symbol.
After a fault, a reset can be performed using the "STOP/RESET" button via the terminal
or the interface. After a reset, the "manual speed control module" operating mode will
be active once again. The drive remains stopped.
The Stop display flashes to indicate that you have to re-enable the drive by pressing
"RUN."
The parameter P760 Locking RUN/STOP keys does not have any effect in "manual
speed control module" operating mode.
Removing the FBG11B keypad will trigger a stop response.

I Startup
9 External setpoint selection
0
9.7 External setpoint selection

External setpoint selection
Control via
– Terminals
– Serial interface
– Setpoint potentiometer connected to AI11/AI12
9.7.1 Set direction of rotation

You can specify the set direction of rotation:
• "CW/Stop and "CCW/Stop" in P101 control signal source = terminals or P101 control
signal source = 3 wire-control
• The polarity of the setpoint in the process data word in P101 Control signal source =
RS485 or SBus and P100 Setpoint source = RS485 or SBus
9.7.2 Setpoint speed

You can specify the set speed:
• Speed control module if P121 Addition FBG speed control module is set to ON
• P100 Setpoint source
– Fixed setpoints
– Fixed setpoints with analog input
– Process data word from SBus or RS-485
– Motor potentiometer
9.7.3 Direction of rotation enable with RS-485 or SBus

Unipolar setpoint sources:
Unipolar/fixed setpoint
Motor potentiometer/fixed setpoint
Fixed setpoint + AI1
Fixed setpoint* + AI1
Frequency setpoint input/fixed setpoint
The direction of rotation is set with the CW or CCW terminals.
Bipolar setpoint sources:

Bipolar/fixed setpoint
RS-485/fixed setpoint
SBus 1/fixed setpoint
The direction of rotation is determined by the setpoint. Enable with terminal CW or CCW.

Startup I
Startup using the FBG11B keypad
9
0
9.8 Startup using the FBG11B keypad

Level 2 Level 3
Motor selection:
– SEW DT/DV motor
Level1 – Non-SEW motor

out Enter
– SEW DRS motor (in preparation
out Enter
– SEW DRE motor (in preparation
Choose operating mode:

– V/f characteristic curve
– V/f + DC braking
– VFC
out Enter
– VFC DC braking
– VFC flying start function
– VFC hoist
out Enter Power in [KW]

HP = kW x 1.33
out Enter
Motor voltage [V]
out Enter
Rated motor frequency [Hz]
out Enter Rated motor speed

[rpm]
)
out Enter
(
Rated motor current [A]
only available for startup
of non-SEW motors
(Motor=non-SEW)
out Enter
cos phi
out Enter
4Q operation
out Enter Number of motors for

multi-motor drives

I Startup
9 Startup using the FBG11B keypad
0
9.8.1 Required data

The following data is required to ensure startup is successful:
• Motor type (SEW or non-SEW motor)
• Motor data
– Rated voltage and rated frequency
– Additionally for non-SEW motors: Rated current, rated power, rated factor cos ϕ,
and rated speed.
• Rated mains voltage
9.8.2 Activating startup

Requirements:
• Drive ”No enable”: Stop
If a smaller or a larger motor is connected (maximum difference one size), then you have
to choose the value closest to the rated motor power.
The complete startup procedure is not complete until you have returned to the main
menu level by pressing the OUT button.
You can then perform the startup only with motor parameter set 1.
NOTE!
The SEW motor startup is designed for 4-pole motors. It may be useful to
startup 2-pole or 6-pole SEW motors as non-SEW motors.
9.8.3 V/f
The default setting for the operating mode is V/f. Use this operating mode if you have no
particular requirements and for applications where a high maximum speed is required.
9.8.4 VFC
Startup the inverter in VFC or VFC & DC brake operating mode for the following require-
ments:
• High torque
• Continuous duty at low frequencies
• Accurate slip compensation
• More dynamic behavior
For this purpose, you will have to choose the VFC or VFC & DC brake operating modes
from P-01 at startup.

Startup I
Startup with DBG60B
9
0
9.8.5 Startup of multi-motor drive

Multi-motor drives are mechanically connected to each other (e.g. chain drive with
several motors). Observe the notes in the publication "Multi-Motor Drives".
Multi-motor drives are possible with installed identical SEW motors only.
• Set the multi parameter of the motor startup to the number of connected motors.
9.8.6 Startup of group drives

Group drives are mechanically decoupled from each other (e.g. different conveyor
belts). In this operating mode, the inverter operates without slip compensation and with
a constant V/f ratio.
You can operate a group of asynchronous motors on one inverter in V/f characteristic
curve operating mode. Important:
• Select V/f operating mode
• Set the power of the largest motor
• Disable automatic adjustment P320/330
• Set boost P321/331 to zero
• Set IxR compensation P322/332 to zero
• Set slip compensation P324/334 to zero
• Set current limitation P303/313 to 1.5 times the total current of all motors
• Set Irated UL monitoring P345/346 to the total current of the connected motors.
Implement motor protection individually.
In this operating mode, the inverter operates without slip compensation and with a
constant V/f ratio.
NOTE!
The parameter settings apply to all connected motors.
9.9 Startup with DBG60B

9.9.1 Required data
The following data is required to ensure startup is successful:
• Motor type (SEW or non-SEW motor)
• Motor data
– Rated voltage and rated frequency
– Additionally for non-SEW motors: Rated current, rated power, rated factor cos ϕ,
and rated speed.
• Rated mains voltage

I Startup
9 Startup with DBG60B
0
9.9.2 Selecting a language

The figure below shows the keys for selecting the language.
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] ↑ key Move up to the next menu item

[2] OK key Confirm entry
[3] ↓ key Move down to the next menu item
[4] Language key A list of languages is displayed
The following text appears on the display when the keypad is switched on for the first
time or after activating the start mode:
SEW
EURODRIVE
The symbol for language selection then appears on the display.
Proceed as follows to select the language:

• Press the language key. A list of languages is displayed on the screen.
• Choose the desired language using the ↑ / ↓ keys.
• Confirm your language selection by pressing the OK key. The basic display is now
shown in your chosen language.

Startup I
Startup with DBG60B
9
0
9.9.3 Startup
The figure below shows the keys required for startup.
[1]
[6] [2]
[3]
[5] [4]
[1] ↑ key Move up to the next menu item

[2] OK key Confirm entry
[3] Context key Activate the context menu
[4] ↓ key Move down to the next menu item
[5] ↔ key Change the menu, display mode ↔ edit mode
[6] DEL key Cancel or abort startup
9.9.4 Startup procedure
1. Enter "0" signal at terminal X12:2 (DIØ1 "/CW/STOP), e.g. 0.00rpm

by disconnecting X13 the electronics terminal block. 0.000Amp
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
2. Press the context key to activate the context menu.

PARAMETER MODE
VARIABLE MODE
BASIC VIEW
3. Scroll down with the ↓ key until you have selected the MANUAL MODE
menu option "STARTUP". STARTUP
COPY TO DBG
COPY TO MDX

I Startup
0
4. To startup, select the OK key. The first parameter appears.

The flashing cursor under the parameter number indicates STARTUP
that the keypad is in display mode. PREPARE FOR STAR-
• Use the ↔ key to switch to edit mode. The flashing TUP
cursor disappears.
• Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select "PARAMETER SET 1" or
"PARAMETER SET 2".
• Press the OK key to confirm your selection.
• Use the ↔ key to switch back to display mode. The
flashing cursor appears again.
• Use the ↑ key to choose the next parameter. C00*STARTUP
PARAMETER SET 1
PARAMETER SET 2
5. Set the motor type. C22*MOTORS

SINGLE MOTOR
IDENT. MOTORS
DIFFERENT MOTORS
6. Select the operating mode you require. Use the ↑ key to C01*OPER. MODE 1
choose the next parameter. STANDARD V/f
VFC operating mode is required for activating the flying VFC1
start or hoist function.
a. When selecting STANDARD V/f operating mode: C28*DC BRAKING
NO
YES
b. When selecting VFC operating mode: C36*OPER.MODE

SPEED CONTROL
HOIST
DC BRAKING
FLYING START
7. Select the motor type. If a 2 or 4-pole SEW motor is C02*MOTOR TYPE 1

connected, select the correct motor from the list. If a non- DT71D2
SEW motor or an SEW motor with more than four poles is DT71D4
connected, select "NON-SEW MOTOR" from the list. DT80K2
Use the ↑ key to choose the next parameter.
C02*MOTOR TYPE 1
NON-SEW MOTOR
DT63K4/DR63S4

Startup I
Startup with DBG60B
9
0
8. Enter the rated motor voltage for the selected connection C03* V
type according to the value specified on the nameplate. RATED MOT. VOLT 1
+400.000
Example: Nameplate 230 / 400 50 Hz
connection → enter "400 V".
connection/transition point at 50 Hz → enter "230 V".
connection, transition point at 87 Hz → Also enter 230 V.
However, set parameter P302 "MAXIMUM SPEED 1" to the
value for 87 Hz after startup first. Then start the drive.
Example: Nameplate 400 / 690 50 Hz

Only connection possible → enter "400 V".
connection is not possible.
9. Enter the rated frequency specified on the motor name- C04* Hz

plate. RATED MOT. FREQ. 1
Example: 230 / 400 50 Hz +50.000
Enter "50 Hz" in and connection.
FOR SEW MOTORS

10. The motor values are stored for SEW 2 and 4-pole motors C47*4-Q OPERATION
and need not be entered. NO
YES
FOR NON-SEW MOTORS

10. Enter the following motor nameplate data: C47*4-Q OPERATION
• C10* Rated motor current, connection type or . NO
• C11* rated motor power YES
• C12* power factor cos ϕ
• C13* rated motor speed
11. Enter the rated power supply voltage (C05* for SEW motor, C05* V
C14* for non-SEW motor). RAT. MAINS VOLT. 1
+400.000
11. Start the calculation for the startup data by choosing "YES". C06*CALCULATION
The process lasts a few seconds.
NO
YES
FOR SEW MOTORS

12. The calculation is performed. After calculation, the next C06*SAVE
menu item appears automatically.
NO
YES

I Startup
0
FOR NON-SEW MOTORS

12. For non-SEW motors, a calibration process is required to
perform the calculation:
• When prompted, apply a "1" signal to terminal X12:2
(DIØ1 "/CW/STOP").
• Apply a "0" signal to terminal X12:2 again after the
calibration is complete.
• After calculation, the next menu item appears
automatically.
13. Set "SAVE" to "YES" The data (motor parameters) are

copied to the non-volatile memory of MOVITRAC®. DATA IS
BEING COPIED...
14. The startup procedure is now complete. Use the DEL key MANUAL MODE
to return to the context menu. STARTUP
COPY TO DBG
COPY TO MC07B
15. Use the ↓ key to scroll down until the menu item "EXIT" is UNIT SETTINGS
selected. EXIT
16. Confirm your selection by pressing OK. The basic display 0.00rpm
appears. 0.000Amp
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
HAZARD!
Parameter settings incorrect due to unsuitable data sets.
Severe or fatal injury.
Make sure that the data set you copy is suitable for the application.
• Enter any parameter settings which differ from the factory settings in the parameter
list.
• In the case of non-SEW motors, set the correct brake application time (P732 / P735).
• Observe the notes for starting the motor in the section "Starting the Motor".
• With connection and transition point at 87 Hz, set parameter P302/312 "Maximum
speed ½" to the value for 87 Hz.

Startup I
Startup with DBG60B
9
0
9.9.5 Setting parameters

Proceed in the following order to set the parameters:
• Use the context key to call up the context menu. In the context menu, select the
"PARAMETER MODE" menu item. Press the OK key to confirm your selection. The
flashing cursor under the parameter number indicates that the keypad is in parameter
mode.
• Use the ↔ key to switch to edit mode. The flashing cursor disappears.
• Using the ↑ or ↓ key, you can to select or set the correct parameter value.
• Press the OK key to confirm the selection or setting.
• Use the ↔ key to switch back to parameter mode again. The flashing cursor appears
again.
• Use the ↑ key to choose the next parameter.
9.9.6 Manual operation

The inverter can be controlled using the DBG60B keypad in manual operation (Context
menu → Manual operation). The 7-segment display on the unit shows "H" during manual
operation.
The binary inputs will be without any functions for the duration of manual operation, with
the exception of a /Controller inhibit. A binary input "/Controller inhibit" must be assigned
a "1" signal to enable the drive to be started in manual operation.
The direction of rotation is not determined by the "CW/stop" or "CCW/stop" binary
inputs. Instead, you select the direction of rotation using the DBG60B keypad.
• Enter the required speed and then the direction of rotation (+ = CW/– = CCW) using
the sign key (+/–).
Manual operation remains active when the power supply is switched off and on;
however, the inverter is then inhibited.
• Use the "Run" key to enable and start the inverter at nmin in the selected direction of
rotation. The speed is increased and decreased using the ↑ and ↓ keys.
NOTE
The signals at the binary inputs take effect as soon as manual operation is finished. A
binary input /Controller inhibit does not have to be switched from "1" to "0" and back to
"1". The drive can start according to the signals at the binary inputs and the setpoint
sources.
HAZARD!
Risk of crushing if the motor starts up unintentionally.
• Ensure that the motor cannot start inadvertently, for example, by removing the
electronics terminal block X13.
• Additional safety precautions must be taken depending on the application to avoid
injury to people and damage to machinery.

I Startup
9 Startup with PC and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio
0
9.10 Startup with PC and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio

Start MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio in the Windows start menu:
Programs / SEW / MOVITOOLS MotionStudio 5.x/MotionStudio 5.x
Press the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio [Scan] button to list all connected units in the unit
tree.
You can perform a startup by right-clicking on one of the units. You find additional infor-
mation in the online help.
9.11 Startup for MBG11A speed control module

You cannot simultaneously establish communication between MOVITRAC® B /
MBG11A and MOVITRAC® B / PC.
The MBG11A can simultaneously specify a setpoint for up to 31 MOVITRAC® B units.
9.11.1 Parameter settings

The following parameters have to be set in MOVITRAC® B other than the factory setting.
When you use a FBG11B for setting the parameters, set the values indicated in paren-
thesis:
• P100: RS 485 (2)
• P101: RS 485 (1)
• P871: Set PA2 to "Speed [%]", then P876 PA data enable to "Yes".
The speed is now displayed: –100 % ... 100% correspond to –nmax ... nmax.
9.11.2 Input terminals

The following input terminals must be connected with 24 V:
• DI01 CW/Stop: positive + negative direction of rotation are possible by selecting the
+/- sign on the MBG11A.
• DI03 Enable/Stop

Startup I
Starting up pumps and fans of non-SEW motors
9
0
9.11.3 Settings for process data word

If you do not change the PO2 process data word, you can also use the MBG11B. In this
case, the conversion is 1 % = 32 rpm. The results from the relationship 4000 hex =
100 % speed. Refer to the following tables for the respective value.
PO2 = Speed (standard parameter setting P871 = speed)
Percent Hex Decimal Speed
1% A4 hex 164 dec 32
10 % 666 hex 1638 dec 328
25 % 1000 hex 4096 dec 819.2
33 % 1555 hex 5461 dec 1092.3
50 % 2000 hex 8192 dec 1638.4
75 % 3000 hex 12288 dec 2457.6
100 % 4000 hex 16384 dec 3276.8
PA2 = Speed [%] (changed parameter setting P871 = speed [%])

Percent Hex Decimal Speed
1% A4 hex 164 dec n_max / 100
10 % 666 hex 1638 dec n_max / 10
25 % 1000 hex 4096 dec n_max / 4
33 % 1555 hex 5461 dec n_max / 3
50 % 2000 hex 8192 dec n_max / 2
75 % 3000 hex 12288 dec n_max / 1.333
100 % 4000 hex 16384 dec n_max
9.12 Starting up pumps and fans of non-SEW motors

Due to the physical conditions of the application, it is recommended that you adjust the
following parameters when operating pumps and fans, and non-SEW motors:
• Operation of the drive in the V/F characteristic curve operating mode; Parameter 700
/ 701 = V/f characteristic curve (21)
• Disable automatic adjustment; Parameter 320 / 330 = Off (0)
• Set IxR adjustment to 0; Parameter 322 / 332 = 0
• Set boost to 0; Parameter 321 / 331 = 0
• Minimize slip compensation and set to 0 if required; Parameter 324 / 334
• Increase ramp times; Parameters 130 / 140 and 131 / 141
Deactivating the slip compensation might require that you specify a higher setpoint
speed to achieve the required air/volume flow.

I Startup
9 Starting the motor
0
9.13 Starting the motor

9.13.1 Analog setpoint specification
The following table shows which signals must be present on terminals X11:2 (AI1) and
X12:1 … X12:4 (DIØØ … DIØ3) when the "unipolar/fixed setpoint" setpoint is selected
(P100), in order to operate the drive with an analog setpoint entry.
X12:1
X11:2 X12:3 X12:4
(DIØØ) X12:2 X12:5 X12:6
(AI11) (DIØ2) (DIØ3)
Function /Control- (DIØ1) (DIØ4) (DIØ5)
Analog CCW/ Enable/
ler CW/stop n11/n21 n12/n22
input n1 stop stop
inhibit1)
Controller
X 0 X X X 0 0
inhibit
Stop X 1 X X 0 0 0
Enable
X 1 0 0 1 0 0
and stop
Clock-
wise at 50 5V 1 1 0 1 0 0
% nmax
Clock-
wise with 10 V 1 1 0 1 0 0
nmax
Counter-
clockwise
5V 1 0 1 1 0 0
with 50 %
nmax
Counter-
clockwise 10 V 1 0 1 1 0 0
with nmax
1) No default setting

Startup I
Starting the motor
9
0
The following travel cycle shows by way of example how the motor is started with the
assignment of terminals X12:1 … X12:4 and analog setpoints. Binary output X10:3
(DBØØ "/Brake") is used for switching brake contactor K12.
"1"
Input DIØØ
/Controller inhibit
"0"
"1"
Input DIØ1
CW/Stop
"0"
"1"
Input DIØ2
CCW/Stop
"0"
Input DIØ3 "1"
Enable /
Stop "0"
"1"
Output DBØØ
/Brake
"0"
10V
Analog
input n1 (AI11) 5V
0V
n [rpm ]
nmax
Speed t11 up t11 down
50 % nmax t11 up t11 down
nmin t11 up
nstart-stop
0
t11 up Stop ramp t13
-50 % nmax
-nmax
NOTE
The motor is not energized in the event of controller inhibit. A motor without brake will
coast to standstill.

I Startup
9 Starting the motor
0
9.13.2 Fixed setpoints

The following table shows which signals must be present on terminals X12:1 … X12:6
(DIØØ … DIØ5) when the "unipolar/fixed setpoint" setpoint is selected (P100), in order
to operate the drive with the fixed setpoints.
X12:1
X12:2 X12:3 X12:5 X12:6
(DIØØ) X12:4 (DIØ3)
Function (DIØ1) (DIØ2) (DIØ4) (DIØ5)
/Control- Enable/stop
CW/stop CCW/stop n11/n21 n12/n22
ler inhibit
Controller
0 X X X X X
inhibit
Stop 1 X X 0 X X
Enable and
1 0 0 1 X X
stop
CW opera-
1 1 0 1 1 0
tion with n11
CW opera-
1 1 0 1 0 1
tion with n12
CW opera-
1 1 0 1 1 1
tion with n13
CCW opera-
1 0 1 1 1 0
tion with n11

Startup I
Starting the motor
9
0
The following travel cycle shows by way of example how the drive is started with the
assignment of terminals X12:1 … X12:6 and the internal fixed setpoints. Binary output
X10:3 (DBØØ "/Brake") is used for switching brake contactor K12.
"1"
Input DIØØ
/Controller inhibit
"0"
"1"
Input DIØ1
CW/Stop
"0"
"1"
Input DIØ2
CCW/Stop
"0"
Input DIØ3 "1"
Enable /
Stop "0"
"1"
Input DIØ4
n11/n21
"0"
"1"
Input DIØ5
n12/n22
"0"
"1"
Output DBØØ
/Brake
"0"
n [rpm ]
n13 t11 up
Speed
n12 t11 up t11 down
n11 t11 up
0
-n11
-n12 t11 up Stop ramp t13
-n13
NOTE
The motor is not energized in the event of controller inhibit. A motor without brake will
coast to standstill.

I Startup
9 Parameter list
0
9.14 Parameter list

All parameters that can also be displayed and edited using the keypad are indicated as
follows in the "FBG" (keypad) column:
Selection in long menu
Selection in short or long menu
Selection using symbol on keypad and in long menu
Selection within FGB motor startup
If a choice is offered, the factory setting is indicated in bold.

No. FBG Index Name Range / factory setting Value
dec. ®
Display MOVITOOLS MotionStudio after
startup
0__ Display values (read only)
00_ Process values
000 8318 Speed (signed) [rpm]
001 8501 User display for [Text]

DBG11B
002 8319 Frequency [Hz]
(signed)
004 8321 Output current [% IN]
(amount)
005 8322 Active current [% IN]
(signed)
008 8325 DC link voltage [V]
009 8326 Output current [A]
01_ Status displays

010 8310 Inverter status [Text]
011 8310 Operating status [Text]
012 8310 Fault status [Text]
013 8310 Current Current parameter set
parameter set
014 8327 Heat sink [°C]
temperature
02_ Analog setpoints
020 8331 Analog input AI1 [V]
021 8332 Analog input AI2 [V]
(optional)
03_ Binary inputs
030 8844 Binary input DI00 Fault reset
031 8335 Binary input DI01 CW / STOP (fixed assignment)
032 8336 Binary input DI02 CCW/stop
033 8337 Binary input DI03 Enable/stop
034 8338 Binary input DI04 n11/n21
035 8339 Binary input DI05 n12/n22

Startup I
Parameter list
9
0

dec. Display MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio after
startup
039 8334 Binary inputs DI00 Collective display of binary inputs
... DI05
05_ Binary outputs
051 8349 Binary output /Fault
DO01
052 8349 Binary output Brake released
DO02
053 8349 Binary output Ready
DO03
059 8349 Binary outputs Collective display of binary outputs
DO01 ... DO03
07_ Unit data
070 8301 Unit type [Text]
071 8361 Rated output cur- [A]
rent
076 8300 Firmware basic [Part number and version]
unit
077 – DBG firmware Only in DBG60B
08_ Fault memory
080 ... 084 8366 ... Fault t-0 ... t-4 Fault Background information for previous faults.
8370 code
09_ Bus diagnostics
094 8455 PO1 setpoint [hex]
097 8458 PI1 actual value [hex]

I Startup
9 Parameter list
0

startup
1__ Setpoints / ramp generators (on FBG only parameter set 1)
10_ Setpoint selection / frequency input
100 8461 Setpoint source 0 Bipolar/fixed setpoint
1 Unipolar/fixed setpoint
2 RS-485/fixed setpoint
4 Motor potentiometer/fixed setpoint
6 Fixed setpoint + AI1
7 Fixed setpoint* + AI1
8 MASTER SBus1
9 MASTER RS-485
10 SBus 1/fixed setpoint
11 Frequency setpoint input / Fixed setpoint
14 Bipolar AI2 / Fixed setpoint
101 8462 Control signal 0 Terminals
source 1 RS-485
3 SBus 1
4 3-wire control
102 8840 Frequency scaling 0.1 ... 10 ... 120.00 [kHz]
103 10247.15 FI1 reference 0 nmax
1 nreference
104 10247.10 Setpoint refer- 0 ... 3000 ... 6000 rpm
ence speed nref
105 10416.1 Wire breakage 0 No response
detection 2 Immediate stop / fault
4 Rapid stop / fault
7 Rapid stop / warning
106 10247.11 FI1 char.curve x1 0 ... 100 %
107 10247.12 FI1 char. curve y1 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
108 10247.13 FI1 char.curve x2 0 ... 100 %
109 10247.14 FI1 char. curve y2 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
11_ Analog input 1 (0 ... 10 V)
110 8463 AI1 scaling 0.1 ... 1 ... 10
112 8465 AI1 Operating 1 10 V, reference maximum speed
mode 5 0 - 20 mA, reference maximum speed
6 4 - 20 mA, reference maximum speed
7 0 - 10 V, n-reference
8 0 - 20 mA, n-reference
113 8466 AI1 voltage offset –10 V ... 0 ... +10 V
116 10247.6 AI1 characteristic 0 ... 100 %
curve x1
117 10247.7 AI1 characteristic –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
curve y1
118 10247.8 AI1 characteristic 0 ... 100 %
curve x2
119 10247.9 AI1 characteristic –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
curve y2

Startup I
Parameter list
9
0

startup
12_ Analog input AI2 / FBG speed control module (option)
120 8469 AI2 operating 0 No function
mode 1 0 ... ±10 V + Setpoint
2 0 ... 10 V current limitation
121 8811 Addition FBG 0 Off
setpoint control 1 On
module 2 On (without fixed setpoint)
122 8799 Direction of rota- 0 Unipolar CW
tion FBG manual 1 Unipolar CCW
operation 2 Bipolar CW and CCW
126 10247.1 AI2 char. curve x1 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–10 V ... 0 ... +10 V)
127 10247.2 AI2 char. curve y1 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–nmax ... 0 ... +nmax / 0 ... Imax)
128 10247.3 AI2 char. curve x2 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–10 V ... 0 ... +10 V)
129 10247.4 AI2 char. curve y2 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–nmax ... 0 ... +nmax / 0 ... Imax)
13_ / 14_ Speed ramps 1 / 2
130 / 140 8807 / Ramp t11 / t21 up 0.1 ... 2 ... 2000 [s]
9264
131 / 141 8808 / Ramp t11 / t21 0.1 ... 2 ... 2000 [s]
9265 down
134 / 144 8474 / Ramp t12 / t22 0.1 ... 10 ... 2000 [s]
8482
135 / 145 8475 / S pattern t23/t22 0 Off
8483 1 Weak
2 Medium
3 Strong
136 / 146 8476 / Stop ramp t13 / 0.1 ... 2 ... 20 [s]
8484 t23
139 / 149 8928 / Ramp monitoring 0 YES
8929 1/2 1 NO
15_ Motor potentiometer function
150 8809 Ramp t3 up = 0.2 ... 20 ... 50 [s]
down
152 8488 Save last setpoint Off Off
On On
16_ / 17_ Fixed setpoints
160 / 170 8489 / Internal setpoint 0 ... 150 ... 5000 [rpm]
8492 n11 / n21
8493 n12 / n22
8494 n13 / n23
163 / 173 8814 / n11/n21 PI 0 ... 3 ... 100 [%]
8817 controller
164 / 174 8815 / n12/n22 PI 0 ... 15 ... 100 [%]
8818 controller
165 / 175 8816 / n13/n23 PI 0 ... 30 ... 100 [%]
8819 controller

I Startup
9 Parameter list
0

startup
2__ Controller parameters
25_ PI controller
250 8800 PI controller 0 Off
1 Normal
2 Inverted
251 8801 P-gain 0 ... 1 ... 64
252 8802 I-component 0 ... 1 ... 2000 [s]
253 8465 PI actual value 1 10 V, reference maximum speed
mode 5 0 - 20 mA, reference maximum speed
6 4 - 20 mA, reference maximum speed
7 0 - 10 V, n-reference
254 8463 PI actual value 0.1 ... 1.0 ... 10.0
scaling
255 8812 PI actual value 0.0 ... 100.0 [%]
offset
3__ Motor parameters (on FBG only parameter set 1)
30_ / 31_ Limits 1 / 2
300 / 310 8515 / Start/stop speed 1 0 ... 150 [rpm]
8519 /2
301 / 311 8516 / Minimum speed 1 0 ... 15 ... 5500 [rpm]
8520 /2
302 / 312 8517 / Maximum speed 1 0 ... 1500 ... 5500 [rpm]
8521 /2
303 / 313 8518 / Current limit 1 / 2 0 ... 150 [% IN]
8522
32_ / 33_ Motor adjustment 1 / 2
320 / 330 8523 / Automatic adjust- Off Off
8528 ment 1 / 2 On On
321 / 331 8524 / Boost 1 / 2 0 ... 100 [%]
8529
322 / 332 8525 / IxR compensa- 0 ... 100 [%]
8530 tion 1 / 2
323 / 333 8526 / Pre-magnetiza- 0 ... 2 [s]
8531 tion time 1 / 2
324 / 334 8527 / Slip compensa- 0 ... 500 [rpm]
8532 tion 1 / 2
34_ IN UL monitoring
345 / 346 9114 / IN UL monitoring 1 0.1 ... 500 A
9115 /2

Startup I
Parameter list
9
0

startup
4__ Reference signals
40_ Speed reference signal
400 8539 Speed reference 0 ... 750 ... 5000 [rpm]
value
401 8540 Hysteresis 0 ... 100 ... +500 [rpm]
402 8541 Delay time 0 ... 1 ... 9 [s]
403 8542 Signal = "1" when 0 n < nref
1 n > nref
43_ Current reference signal
430 8550 Current reference 0 ... 100 ... 150 % IN
value
431 8551 Hysteresis 0 ... 5 ... 30 % IN
432 8552 Delay time 0 ... 1 ... 9 s
433 8553 Signal = "1" when 0 I < Iref
1 I > Iref
44_ Imax signal
440 8554 Hysteresis 0 ... 5 ... 50 % IN
441 8555 Delay time 0 ... 1 ... 9 s
442 8556 Signal = "1" when 0 I < Imax
1 I > Imax
45_ PI controller reference signal
450 8813 PI actual value
reference
451 8796 Signal = "1" when 0 PI Actual value < PI ref
1 PI Actual value > PI ref
5__ Monitoring parameters (on FBG only parameter set 1)
50_ Speed monitoring 1 / 2
500 / 502 8557 / Speed monitoring 0 Off
8559 1/2 3 Motor / regenerative
501 / 503 8558 / Delay time 1 / 2 0 ... 1 ... 10 [s]
8560
54_ Gear unit/motor monitoring
540 9284 Response to drive Factory setting: Display fault
vibration / warning
541 9285 Response to drive Factory setting: Rapid stop / warning
vibration / fault
542 9286 Response to oil Factory setting: Display fault
aging / fault
543 9287 Response to oil Factory setting: Display fault
aging / warning
544 9288 Oil aging / over- Factory setting: Display fault
temperature
545 9289 Oil aging / ready Factory setting: Display fault
signal
549 9290 Response to Factory setting: Display fault
brake wear

I Startup
9 Parameter list
0

startup
6__ Terminal assignment
60_ Binary inputs
601 8336 Binary input DI02 0: No function
assignment 1: Enable / stop (factory setting DI03)
602 8337 Binary input DI03 2: CW/stop
assignment 3: CCW / stop (factory setting DI02)
603 8338 Binary input DI04 4: n11 / n21 (factory setting DI04)
assignment 5: n12 / n22 (factory setting DI05)
604 8339 Binary input DI05 n13 = n11 + n12
assignment 6: Fixed setpoint switchover
608 8844 Binary input DI00 7: Parameter set switchover
assignment 8: Ramp switchover
9: Motor potentiometer up
10: Motor potentiometer down
11: /External fault
12: Fault reset (factory setting DI00)
19: Slave free running
20: Setpoint acceptance active
26: TF signal (only with DI05)
27: Vibration/warning
28: Vibration/fault
29: Brake wear
30: Controller inhibit
33: Oil aging/warning
34: Oil aging/fault
35: Oil aging / overtemperature
36: Oil aging/ready
62_ Binary outputs
620 8350 Binary output 0: No function
DO01 assignment 1: /Fault (factory setting DO01)
621 8351 Binary output 2: Ready (factory setting DO03)
DO02 assignment 3: Output stage on
622 8916 Binary output 4: Rotating field on
DO03 assignment 5: Brake released (factory setting DO02 / not
with DO03)
8: Parameter set
9: Speed reference signal
11: Comparison message setpoint-actual
value
12: Current reference signal
13: Imax signal
21: IPOS output
22: /IPOS fault
23: PI controller actual value reference
24: Ex-e current limit active (in preparation)
27: Safe stop
30: Ixt warning
31: Ixt fault

Startup I
Parameter list
9
0

startup
64_ Analog outputs AO1 (optional)
640 8568 Analog output 0 No function
AO1 1 Ramp generator input
2 Setpoint speed
3 Actual speed
4 Actual frequency
5 Output current
6 Active current
7 Unit utilization
11 Actual speed (signed)
12 Actual frequency (signed)
641 10248.5 AO1 reference 0 3000 rpm , 100 Hz, 150 %
1 nmax
2 nset reference
642 8570 AO1 Operating 0 No function
mode 2 0 ... 20 mA
3 4 ... 20 mA
4 0 ... 10 V
646 10246.1 AO1 Characteris- –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
tic curve x1
647 10246.2 AO1 Characteris- 0 ... 100 %
tic curve y1
648 10246.3 AO1 Characteris- –100 % ... 0 ... +100 %
tic curve x2
649 10246.4 AO1 Characteris- 0 ... 100 %
tic curve y2
7__ Control functions (on FBG only parameter set 1)
70_ Operating modes 1 / 2
700 / 701 8574 / Operating mode 1 0 VFC
8575 /2 2 VFC & hoist
3 VFC & DC braking
4 VFC & flying start function
21 V/f characteristic curve
22 V/f & DC braking
71_ Standstill current 1 / 2
710 / 711 8576 / Standstill current 0 ... 50 % IMot
8577 1/2
72_ Setpoint stop function 1 / 2
720 / 723 8578 / Setpoint stop Off Off
8581 function 1 / 2 On On
721 / 724 8579 / Stop setpoint 1 / 2 0 ... 30 ... 500 [rpm]
8582
722 / 725 8580 / Start offset 1 / 2 0 ... 30 ... 500 [rpm]
8583
73_ Brake function 1 / 2
731 / 734 8749 / Brake release 0 ... 2 [s]
8750 time 1 / 2
732 / 735 8585 / Brake application 0 ... 2 [s]
8587 time 1 / 2

I Startup
9 Parameter list
0

startup
74_ Speed skip function
740 / 742 8588 / Skip window 0 ... 1500 ... 5000 rpm
8590 center 1 / 2
741 / 743 8589 / Skip width 1 / 2 0 ... 300 rpm
8591
75_ Master/slave function
750 8592 Slave setpoint
751 8593 Scaling slave set-
point
76_ Manual operation
760 8798 Lock RUN / STOP Off Off
buttons On On
77_ Energy-saving function
770 8925 Energy-saving Off Off
function On On
8__ Unit function (on FBG only parameter set 1)
80_ Setup
800 – Short menu long
short
801 – DBG language
802 8594 Factory setting no 0 / No
Hours 1 / Standard
ALL 2 / Delivery status
NEMA 4 / NEMA delivery status
803 8595 Parameter lock Off Off
On On
804 8596 Reset statistical No action
data Fault memory
805 – Rated mains 50 ... 500 V
voltage
806 – Copy DBG → Yes
MOVITRAC® B No
807 – Copy MOVIT- Yes
RAC® B → DBG No
808 8660 24 V output Off
voltage On
809 10204.1 IPOS enable Off
On
81_ Serial communication
810 8597 RS-485 address 0 ... 99
811 8598 RS-485 group 100 ... 199

address
812 8599 RS-485 timeout 0 ... 650 [s]
interval

Startup I
Parameter list
9
0

startup
82_ Brake operation 1 / 2
820 / 821 8607 / 4-quadrant Off Off
8608 operation 1 / 2 On On
83_ Fault responses
830 8609 Response termi- 2 Immediate stop / fault
nal "external fault" 4 Rapid stop / fault (830)
833 8612 Response to RS- 7 Rapid stop / warning (833 / 836)
485 timeout
836 8615 Response to
SBus timeout
84_ Reset behavior
840 8617 Manual reset Yes
No
85_ Scaling actual speed value
850 8747 Scaling factor 1 ... 65535 (can be set with SHELL only)
numerator
851 8748 Scaling factor 1 ... 65535 (can be set with SHELL only)
denominator
852 8772 / User travel unit Text
8773
853 9312 Scaled speed 0 Speed
FBG 1 Scaled speed
86_ Modulation 1 / 2
860 / 861 8620 / PWM frequency 1 4 4 kHz
8621 /2 8 8 kHz
12 12 kHz
16 16 kHz
862 / 863 8751 / PWM fix 1 / 2 On On
8752 Off Off
87_ Process data parameter setting
870 8304 Setpoint descrip- No function (factory setting P872)
tion PO1 Setpoint speed (factory setting P871)
871 8305 Setpoint descrip- Max. speed
tion PO2 Ramp
872 8306 Setpoint descrip- Control word 1 (factory setting P870)
tion PO3 Control word 2
Setpoint speed [%]
IPOS PO data
873 8307 Actual value No function
description PI1 Actual speed (factory setting P874)
874 8308 Actual value Output current (factory setting P875)
description PI2 Active current
875 8309 Actual value Status word 1 (factory setting P873)
description PI3 Actual speed [%]
IPOS PI-DATA
PI controller actual value [%]
876 8622 PO data enable No
Yes

I Startup
9 Parameter list
0

startup
88_ Serial communication SBus
880 8937 SBus protocol 0 / MoviLink
1 / CANopen
881 8600 SBus address 0 ... 63
882 8601 SBus group 0 ... 63
address
883 8602 SBus timeout 0 ... 650 [s]
interval
884 8603 SBus baud rate 125 125 kbaud
250 250 kbaud
500 500 kbaud
1000 1 MBaud
886 8989 CANopen 1 ... 2 ... 127
address

Operation I
Data backup
10
0
10 Operation
10.1 Data backup
10.1.1 Data backup using FBG11B
Use the FBG11B keypad to download parameter data from the MOVITRAC® B to the
keypad or copy from the keypad to the MOVITRAC® B.
After copying the parameters, check for accuracy.
Data backup using FBG11B
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Enter Start
loading
Select
data backup
out Enter Enter
Parameter data from

FBG11B MOVITRAC® B
Enter Start
saving
Enter
Parameter data from

MOVITRAC® B FBG11B
After copying data, the MOVITRAC® B is inhibited. The inhibited status is indicated by
a flashing STOP in the status display. The status LED also slowly flashes yellow.
You can revoke the inhibit by taking one of the following measures:
• Pressing the RUN button on the FBG11B
• Switching the mains off, waiting 10 seconds, and switching the mains back on
10.1.2 Data backup using DBG60B

Copy the parameter set from MOVITRAC® B into the DBG60B keypad. You have the
following options:
• In the context menu, select the "COPY TO DBG" menu item. Confirm your selection
by pressing OK. The parameter set is copied from MOVITRAC® B to DBG60B.
• In the context menu, select the "PARAMETER MODE" menu item. Select parameter
P807 "MCB → DBG". The parameter set is copied from MOVITRAC® B to DBG60B.
10.1.3 Data backup using UBP11A

Copy the parameter set from MOVITRAC® B to the UBP11A parameter module. To do
so, press the button at the lower end of the module. You need a pointed object for this
purpose.

I Operation
10 Return codes (r-19 ... r-38)
0
10.1.4 Data backup using MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio

When you use MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio to transfer data to the MOVITRAC® B
frequency inverter, you must re-enable the inverter as follows:
• Select the unit in the network.
• Right click to open the context menu.
• Select menu [RUN/STOP via software keypad] [1]
• Select [RUN] in the software keypad [2]
[1]
[2]
10.2 Return codes (r-19 ... r-38)

Return codes MOVITRAC® B:
No. Designation Meaning
19 Parameter lock activated Parameters cannot be changed
20 Factory setting in progress Parameters cannot be changed
23 Option card missing The option card required for the function is missing.
27 Option card missing The option card required for the function is missing.
28 Controller inhibit required Controller inhibit required
29 Invalid value for parameter. • Invalid value for parameter.
• FGB manual operation selection invalid as PC is
in active manual operation.
32 Enable You cannot perform this function in ENABLED status
34 Fault during execution • Error while saving in FBG11B.
• Startup not performed with FBG. Perform FGB
startup with MotionStudio or select a new motor.
38 FBG11B incorrect data set Stored data set does not match the unit

Operation I
Status displays
10
0
10.3 Status displays

10.3.1 FBG11B keypad
If the status is "Drive enabled", the display will show the calculated actual speed.
Status Display
Drive "Controller inhibit" oFF
Drive "No enable" StoP
Drive "Enable" 8888 (actual speed)
Factory setting SEt (Set)
Standstill current dc
24 V operation 24U
Status of binary Parameter P039 (binary inputs) and parameter P059 (binary outputs) are adopted in the
inputs/outputs parameter menu as display parameters. The status is displayed as binary. Every binary
input or output has two segments vertically on top of one another of the 7-segment
display assigned to it. The upper segment lights up when the binary input or output is
set, and the lower segment lights up when the binary input or output is not set. The two
7-segment displays on the right are displayed if P039 (di = binary inputs ) or P059 (do =
binary outputs) are output.
Examples:
Above: Input status: DI00 = 1 / DI01 = 0 / DI02 = 1 / DI03 = 1 / DI04 = 1 / DI05 = 0

Bottom: Output status: DO01 = 1 / DO02 = 0 / DO03 = 1

I Operation
10 Unit status codes
0
10.3.2 LED flash codes

The LED on the front of the unit signals the following states:
Status Display (optional with LED flash code status of basic
FBG) unit
"ENABLE" Speed Constant green light
"ENABLE" at current limit Speed flashes Rapid green flashing
"CURRENT AT STAND- dc Slow green flashing
STILL"
Timeout Errors 43 / 46 / 47 Flashing green/yellow
"NO ENABLE" Stop Constant yellow light
"FACTORY SETTING" SEt Rapid yellow flashing
"CONTROL.INHIBIT" oFF Rapid yellow flashing
"24 V operation" Flashing 24U Slow yellow flashing
"SAFE STOP" Flashing U Slow yellow flashing
FGB manual operation FGB manual operation Yellow on long, off briefly
active or inverter stopped symbol or "stop" is flashing
using "stop" button.
Copy Fault 97 Flashing red/yellow
System error Errors 10 / 17 ... 24 / 25 / 32 Constant red light
/ 37 / 38 / 45 / 77 / 80 / 94
Overvoltage / phase failure Errors 4 / 6 / 7 Slow red flashing
Overload Errors 1 / 3 / 11 / 44 / 84 Rapid red flashing
Monitoring Errors 8 / 26 / 34 / 81 / 82 2 x red flashing
Motor protection Errors 31 / 84 3 x red flashing
WARNING!
Incorrect interpretation of display U = "Safe stop" active.
The display U = "Safe stop" is not safety-related and must not be used as a safety
function.
10.4 Unit status codes

Use status word 1 to determine the unit status code.
Code Meaning
0x0 Not ready
0x1 Controller inhibit
0x2 No enable
0x3 Standstill current active, no enable
0x4 Enable
0x8 Factory setting is active

Operation I
DBG60B keypad
10
0
10.5 DBG60B keypad

10.5.1 Basic displays
0.00rpm
0.000Amp Display when /CONTROLLER INHIBIT = "0".
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
0.00rpm
0.000Amp Display when inverter is not enabled ("ENABLE/STOP" = "0").
NO ENABLE
950.00rpm
0.990Amp Display for enabled inverter.
ENABLE (VFC)
NOTE 6: Information message

VALUE TOO HIGH
(DEL)=Quit
ERROR 9 Error display
STARTUP
10.5.2 Information messages

Information messages on the DBG60B (ca. 2 s in duration) or in MOVITOOLS® Motion-
Studio/SHELL (message that can be acknowledged):
No. Text DBG60B/SHELL Description
1 ILLEGAL INDEX Index addressed via interface not available.
• Attempt to execute a function that is not implemented.
2 NOT IMPLEMENT. • An incorrect communication service has been selected.
• Manual operation selected via invalid interface (e.g. fieldbus).
3 READ ONLY VALUE Attempt to modify a read only value.
4 PARAM. INHIBITED Parameter lock P803 = "ON". Parameter cannot be altered.
5 SETUP ACTIVE Attempt to change parameters when factory setting is active.
6 VALUE TOO HIGH Attempt to enter a value that is too high.
7 VALUE TOO LOW Attempt to enter a value that is too low.
8 REQ. CARD MISSING The option card required for the selected function is missing.
-
10 ONLY VIA ST1 Manual mode must be completed using X13:ST11/ST12 (RS 485).
11 ONLY TERMINAL Manual mode must be exited via TERMINAL (DBG60B or UWS21B).
12 NO ACCESS Access to selected parameter denied.
CTRL. INHIBIT
13 Set terminal DIØØ "/Controller inhibit" = "0" for the selected function.
MISSING
14 INVALID VALUE Attempt to enter an invalid value.
--
Overflow of EEPROM buffer, e.g., due to cyclic write access. Parameter is
16 PARAM. NOT SAVED saved in EEPROM and is not protected against loss following POWER
OFF.
• Parameter to be changed can only be set in the state "CONTROLLER
17 INVERTER ENABLED INHIBIT".
• Attempt to change to manual mode during live operation

Operation
10 DBG60B keypad
10.5.3 Functions of the DBG60B keypad

Key assignments
for DBG60B
[2]
[1] [3]
[12] [4]
[11] [5]
[10] [6]
[9]
[8] [7]
[1] Stop key Stop

[2] ↑ key Up arrow, moves up to the next menu item
[3] RUN key Start
[4] OK key OK, confirms the entry
[5] Context key Activate the context menu
[6] ↓ key Down arrow, moves down to the next menu item
[7] . key Decimal point
[8] ± key Sign reversal
[9] Keys 0 ... 9 Digits 0... 9
[10] ↔ key Change menu
[11] Language key Select language
[12] DEL key Delete previous entry
Copy function of The DBG60B keypad can be used for copying complete parameter sets from one
the DBG60B MOVITRAC® unit to other MOVITRAC® units. Proceed as follows:
• In the context menu, select the menu item "COPY TO DBG". Confirm your selection
by pressing OK.
• After the copying process has finished, plug the keypad in the other inverter.
• In the context menu, select the menu item "COPY TO MC07B". Confirm your
selection by pressing OK.

Operation
DBG60B keypad
10
Parameter mode Proceed as follows to set the parameters in parameter mode:

1. Press the context key to activate the context menu. The first
menu item is "PARAMETER MODE". PARAMETER MODE
VARIABLE MODE
BASIC VIEW
2. Press the OK key to start PARAMETER MODE. The first P 000 upm
display parameter P000 "SPEED" appears. Use the ↑ or ↓ SPEED
key to select main parameter groups 0 to 9. +0.0
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
3. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select the desired main parameter P 1.. SETPOINTS/
group. The flashing cursor is positioned under the number RAMP GENERATORS
of the main parameter group.
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
4. Press the OK key to activate the parameter subgroup selec- P 1.. SETPOINTS/
tion in the required main parameter group. The flashing cur- RAMP GENERATORS
sor moves one position to the right.
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
5. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select the desired parameter sub- \ 13. SPEED
group. The flashing cursor is positioned under the number RAMPS 1
of the parameter subgroup.
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
6. Press the OK key to activate the parameter selection in the \ 13. SPEED
required parameter subgroup. The flashing cursor moves RAMPS 1
one position to the right.
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
7. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select the desired parameter. The \ 132 s

flashing cursor is positioned under the third digit of the T11 UP CCW
parameter number. +0.13
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
8. Press the OK key to activate the setting mode for the \ 132 s
selected parameter. The cursor is positioned under the T11 UP CCW
parameter value. +0.13_
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
9. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to set the required parameter value. \ 132 s

T11 UP CCW
+0.20_
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
10. Press the OK key to confirm the setting. To exit setting \ 132 s
mode, press the ↔ key. The flashing cursor is positioned T11 UP CCW
under the third digit of the parameter number again. +0.20
CONTROLLER INHIBIT

Operation
10 DBG60B keypad
11. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select another parameter, or press the \ 13. SPEED
DEL key to switch to the menu of the parameter subgroups. RAMPS 1
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
12. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select another parameter subgroup or P 1.. SETPOINTS/
press the DEL key to switch to the menu of the main param- RAMP GENERATORS
eter groups.
CONTROLLER INHIBIT
13. Use the context key to return to the context menu.

PARAMETER MODE
VARIABLE MODE
BASIC VIEW
User menu The DBG60B keypad has a standard user menu containing the parameters that are
used most often. The parameters in the user menu are displayed with a "\" before the
parameter number (→ Sec. "Complete parameter list"). You can add or delete parame-
ters. You can save a maximum of 50 parameter entries. The parameters are displayed
in the order in which they are stored in the inverter. The parameters are not sorted
automatically.
• Use the context key to call up the context menu. Select the menu item "USER
MENU" and press the OK key to confirm. The user menu with the most frequently
used parameters appears.
Adding parameters Proceed in this order to add parameters to the user menu:
to the user menu
• Use the context key to call up the context menu. Select the "PARAMETER MODE"
menu item.
• Select desired parameter and press the OK key to confirm.
• Use the context key to return to the context menu. In the context menu, select the
menu item "ADD Pxxx". "xxx" is the parameter you selected previously. Confirm your
selection by pressing OK. The selected parameter is stored in the user menu.
Deleting Proceed in this order to delete parameters from the user menu:
parameters from
• Use the context key to call up the context menu. Select the menu item "USER
the user menu
MENU".
• Select the parameter that is to be deleted. Confirm your selection by pressing OK.
• Use the context key to return to the context menu. In the context menu, select the
menu item "DELETE Pxxx". "xxx" is the parameter you selected previously. Confirm
your selection by pressing OK. The selected parameter is deleted from the user
menu.

Operation
DBG60B keypad
10
Initial parameter The wake-up parameter is the parameter that is displayed when the DBG60B is
switched on. The factory setting for the wake-up parameter is the basic display. You can
select which parameter should be the wake-up parameter. The following options can be
used as the wake-up parameter:
• Parameter (→ Parameter mode)
• Parameter from the user menu (→ User menu)
• Basic display
Proceed as follows to save a wake-up parameter:
• First select the required parameter in parameter mode.
• In the context menu, select the menu item "XXXX INITIAL PARAM.". "XXXX" is the
selected initial parameter. Confirm your selection by pressing OK.

Service / List of Faults
11 Unit information
11 Service / List of Faults

11.1 Unit information
11.1.1 Fault memory
The inverter stores the error message in fault memory P080. The inverter does not save
a new fault until the error message has been acknowledged. The local operating panel
shows the most recent fault. Whenever double faults occur, the value stored in P080
does not correspond to the value displayed on the operating panel. This is an example
of what happens with F-07 DC link overvoltage followed by F34 Ramp timeout.
The inverter stores the following information when a malfunction occurs:
• Fault occurred
• Status of the binary inputs / binary outputs
• Operating status of the inverter
• Inverter status
• Heat sink temperature
• Speed
• Output current
• Active current
• Unit utilization
• DC link voltage
11.1.2 Switch-off responses

There are 3 switch-off responses depending on the fault:
Immediate switch This fault response causes immediate locking of the output stage with simultaneous
off control of the brake output so that an existing brake is applied. The "fault message" is
set and the "ready message" is revoked.
This status can only be exited by an explicit fault reset.
Stop This fault response causes a stop at the set stop ramp. This fault stop is subject to time
monitoring. If the drive does not reach the start / stop speed within a specified time
period, the unit jumps to the fault state, the output stage is inhibited and an existing
brake is applied. The fault message "F34 Ramp timeout" is generated. The original fault
message is overwritten. If the drive reaches the start/stop speed, the unit jumps to the
fault state, the brake is applied and the output stage is inhibited. The "fault message" is
set and the "ready message" is revoked.
This status can only be exited by an explicit fault reset.

Unit information
11
Timeout (warning) The switch-off response causes a stop at the set rapid stop ramp. The stop is subject to
time monitoring as for the "fault stop".
If the drive reaches the start/stop speed, the unit jumps to the warning state, the brake
is applied and the output stage is inhibited. The "fault message" is set and the "ready
message" remains set.
An explicit fault reset is not possible. The fault is reset when communication is made
again or the timeout is set to 0 s.
Behavior of the inverter when it is controlled via a communciation interface (RS-485 or
SBus):
• Power off and on
• Enable has no effect
• Valid data to an interface monitored with timeout
• Enable
11.1.3 Reset
Basic unit reset A fault message can be acknowledged:
• Reset via input terminals with an appropriately assigned binary input (DIØØ,
DIØ2...DIØ5). DIØØ is factory set to fault reset.
Keypad reset A fault message can be acknowledged:

• Manual reset on the keypad (STOP/RESET key).
The "STOP/RESET" button has priority over a terminal enable or an enable via the
interface.
The STOP/RESET key can be used for performing a reset after a fault has occurred with
a programmed error response. A reset inhibits the drive. To enable the drive, press the
RUN key.
Interface reset A fault message can be acknowledged:

• Manual reset in MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio / P840 Manual reset = Yes, or in the
status window of the reset button.

11 List of faults (F-00 ... F-113)
11.2 List of faults (F-00 ... F-113)

No. Designation Response Possible cause Measure
00 No fault
01 Overcurrent Immediate switch- • Short circuit at output • Rectify the short circuit
off with inhibit
• Output switching • Switching with inhibited output
stage only
• Motor too large • Connect a smaller motor
• Faulty output stage • Consult SEW Service if the fault
cannot be reset
03 Ground fault Immediate switch- • Ground fault in motor • Replace motor
off with inhibit
• Ground fault in inverter • Replace MOVITRAC® B
• Ground fault in the motor supply • Eliminate ground fault
lead
• Overcurrent (see F-01) • See F-01
04 Brake chopper Immediate switch- • Too much regenerative power • Extend deceleration ramps
off with inhibit
• Braking resistor circuit • Check supply cable to the
interrupted braking resistor
• Short circuit in the braking • Rectify the short circuit
resistor circuit
• Brake resistor has too high • Check technical data of braking
resistance resistor
• Brake chopper defective • Replace MOVITRAC® B
• Ground fault • Eliminate ground fault
06 Mains phase Immediate switch- • Phase failure • Check the supply system cable
failure off with inhibit (only
• Supply voltage too low • Check the supply voltage
with 3-phase
inverter)
07 DC link Immediate switch- • DC link voltage too high • Extend deceleration ramps
overvoltage off with inhibit • Check supply cable to the bra-
king resistor
• Check technical data of braking
resistor
• Ground fault • Eliminate ground fault
08 Speed Immediate switch- Current controller works at the set
monitoring off with inhibit limit due to:
• Mechanical overload • Reduce load
• Check current limitation
• Extend deceleration ramps
• Increase set deceleration time
P5011)
• Phase failure in supply system • Check line phases
• Phase failure in motor • Check motor cable and motor
• Maximum speed for VFC • Reduce maximum speed
operating modes exceeded
09 Startup Immediate switch- • Inverter not started yet • Start up the inverter
off with inhibit
• Unknown motor selected • Select another motor

List of faults (F-00 ... F-113)
11

10 IPOS-ILLOP Stop with inhibit • Incorrect command during • Check the program
With IPOS only command execution
• Incorrect conditions during • Check program run
command execution.
• Function does not exist / is not • Use another function
implemented in the inverter
11 Over- Stop with inhibit • Thermal overload of inverter • Reduce load and / or ensure
temperature adequate cooling.
• If a braking resistor is integrated
in the heat sink: Install braking
resistor externally
17 System Immediate switch- • Inverter electronics is faulty, • Check grounding and shielding
... malfunction off with inhibit possibly due to EMC influence and improve, if necessary.
24 • Contact SEW Service for advice
if this fault reoccurs.
25 EEPROM Stop with inhibit • Error while accessing EEPROM • Activate factory settings,
perform reset and reset parame-
ters.
• Contact SEW Service for advice
26 External Programmable • Read in external fault signal via • Eliminate respective cause;
terminal programmable input. reprogram terminal if necessary.
31 TF/TH sensor Stop with inhibit • Motor too hot, TF sensor has • Let motor cool off and reset fault
tripped tripped
• TF sensor of motor not connec- • Check connections / links
ted or connected incorrectly between MOVITRAC® B and TF
• Connection of MOVITRAC® B
and TF on motor interrupted
32 IPOS index Stop with inhibit • Programming principles violated • Check user program and correct
overflow leading to internal stack over-
flow
34 Ramp timeout Immediate switch- • Set ramp time exceeded. • Extend the ramp time
off with inhibit
• If you remove the inhibit and the • Extend the stop ramp time
drive exceeds the stop ramp
time t13 by a certain time, the
inverter will signal F34.
36 Option missing Immediate switch- • Type of option card not allowed • Use correct option card
off with inhibit
• Setpoint source, control signal • Set correct setpoint source.
source or operating mode not • Set correct control signal
permitted for this option card source.
• Set the correct operating mode.
• Check parameters P120 and
P121
37 System Immediate switch- • Error during system software • Check grounding and shielding
watchdog off with inhibit execution and improve, if necessary.
38 System Immediate switch- • System malfunction • Check grounding and shielding
software off with inhibit and improve, if necessary.
43 RS-485 timeout Stop without • Connection between inverter • Check connection between
inhibit2) and PC interrupted. inverter and PC.

11 List of faults (F-00 ... F-113)

44 Unit utilization Immediate switch- • Unit utilization (Ixt value) • Decrease power output
off with inhibit exceeded • Extend ramps
• If these points are not possible:
Use a larger inverter
45 Initialization Immediate switch- • Error during initialization • Contact SEW Service for
off with inhibit advice.
47 System bus 1 Stop without inhibit • Fault during communication via • Check system bus connection
timeout system bus
77 IPOS control Stop with inhibit • System malfunction • Contact SEW Service for
word advice.
80 RAM test Immediate switch- Internal unit fault, RAM defective. Contact SEW Service.
off
81 Start condition Immediate switch- Only in "VFC hoist" operating
off with inhibit mode:
The motor could not be supplied
with the correct amount of current
during the pre-magnetizing time:
• Rated motor power too small in • Check connection between
relation to rated inverter power inverter and motor
• Check startup data and perform
new startup, if necessary.
• Motor cable cross section too • Check cross section of motor
small cable and increase if necessary.
82 Open output Immediate switch- Only in "VFC hoist" operating
off with inhibit mode:
• 2 or all output phases • Check connection between
interrupted inverter and motor
• Rated motor power too small in • Check startup data and perform
relation to rated inverter power new startup, if necessary.
84 Motor Stop with inhibit • Motor utilization too high. • Check P345/346 INUL
protection monitoring
• Reduce load
• Extend ramps
• Longer pause times
94 EEPROM Immediate switch- • EEPROM defective • Contact SEW Service.
checksum off with inhibit
97 Copy fault Immediate switch- • Parameter module is removed Before acknowleding the fault:
off with inhibit during copying process • Load factory setting or complete
• Switching off/on while copying data set from parameter module
98 CRC error flash Immediate switch- Internal unit fault Flash memory Send unit in for repair.
off defective.
100 Vibration/ Display error Vibration sensor warning (→ Determine cause of vibrations.
warning "DUV10A" operating instructions) Continue operation until F101
occurs.
101 Vibration error Rapid stop Vibration sensor reports fault SEW-EURODRIVE recommends
that you remedy the cause of the
vibrations immediately
102 Oil aging/ Display error Oil aging sensor warns Schedule oil change.
warning
103 Oil aging/fault Display error Oil aging sensor reports fault SEW-EURODRIVE recommends
that you change the gear unit oil
immediately.
104 Oil aging/over- Display error Oil aging sensor signals over- • Let oil cool down
temperature temperature • Check if the gear unit cools
properly

SEW electronics service
11

105 Oil aging / Display error Oil aging sensor is not ready for • Check voltage supply of oil
ready signal operation aging sensor
• Check and, if necessary,
replace the oil aging sensor
106 Brake wear Display error Brake lining worn Replace brake lining (→ "Motors"
operating instructions)
110 "Ex-e protec- Stop with inhibit Duration of operation below 5 Hz • Check project planning
tion" fault exceeded • Shorten duration of operation
below 5 Hz
113 Analog input Programmable AI1 analog input open circuit • Check wiring
open circuit
1) Speed monitoring is set by changing parameters 500 / 502 and 501 / 503. The sagging of hoists cannot be avoided safely when
monitoring is deactivated or the delay time is set too long.
2) No reset required, error message disappears after communication is reestablished
11.3 SEW electronics service

11.3.1 Hotline
Call the Drive Service Hotline to talk to an SEW-EURODRIVE service specialist on
365 days a year, 24 hours a day.
Simply dial the prefix 01805 and enter the key combination SEWHELP. Or just dial
018057394357.
11.3.2 Sending unit in for repair

Please contact the SEW Electronics Service if you cannot rectify a fault.
Please always specify the unit status code number when you contact the SEW
electronics service so that our service personnel can assist you more effectively.
Please provide the following information when sending the unit in for repair:
Serial number (→ nameplate)
Unit designation
Short description of application (application, control via terminals or serial)
Connected motor (motor voltage, star or delta connection)
Type of fault
Accompanying circumstances
Your own presumptions as to what has happened
Unusual events preceding the problem

11 Extended storage
11.4 Extended storage

If the unit is being stored for a long time, connect it to the mains voltage for at least
5 minutes every 2 years. Otherwise, the unit's service life may be reduced.
Procedure when maintenance has been neglected:
Electrolytic capacitors are used in the inverters. They are subject to aging effects when
deenergized. This effect can damage the electrolytic capacitors if the unit is connected
using the rated voltage after a longer period of storage.
If you have not performed maintenance regularly, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that
you increase the line voltage slowly up to the maximum voltage. This can be done, for
example, by using a variable transformer for which the output voltage has been set
according to the following overview. SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you increase
the voltage from 0 V to the first stage after a few seconds.
SEW-EURODRIVE recommends the following stages:
AC 400/500 V units:
• Stage 1: AC 350 V for 15 minutes
• Stage 3: AC 500 V for 1 hour
AC 230 V units:
• Stage 3: AC 240 V for 1 hour
After you have completed the regeneration process, the unit can be used immediately
or stored again for an extended period with maintenance.

Address List
12
12 Address List
Germany
Headquarters Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Production Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1970
Sales D-76646 Bruchsal http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Postfach 3023 • D-76642 Bruchsal
Service Competence Central SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1710
Center Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251 75-1711
D-76676 Graben-Neudorf sc-mitte@sew-eurodrive.de
North SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 5137 8798-30
Alte Ricklinger Straße 40-42 Fax +49 5137 8798-55
D-30823 Garbsen (near Hannover) sc-nord@sew-eurodrive.de
East SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 3764 7606-0
Dänkritzer Weg 1 Fax +49 3764 7606-30
D-08393 Meerane (near Zwickau) sc-ost@sew-eurodrive.de
South SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 89 909552-10
Domagkstraße 5 Fax +49 89 909552-50
D-85551 Kirchheim (near München) sc-sued@sew-eurodrive.de
West SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 2173 8507-30
Siemensstraße 1 Fax +49 2173 8507-55
D-40764 Langenfeld (near Düsseldorf) sc-west@sew-eurodrive.de
Electronics SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1780
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1769
D-76646 Bruchsal sc-elektronik@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service +49 180 5 SEWHELP
+49 180 5 7394357
Additional addresses for service in Germany provided on request!
France
Production Haguenau SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Sales 48-54, route de Soufflenheim Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
Service B. P. 20185 http://www.usocome.com
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex sew@usocome.com
Production Forbach SEW-EUROCOME Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Zone Industrielle
Technopôle Forbach Sud
B. P. 30269
F-57604 Forbach Cedex
Assembly Bordeaux SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Sales Parc d'activités de Magellan Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Service 62, avenue de Magellan - B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Lyon SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 4 72 15 37 00
Parc d'Affaires Roosevelt Fax +33 4 72 15 37 15
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin
Paris SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Zone industrielle Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
2, rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil I'Etang
Additional addresses for service in France provided on request!

Address List
12
Algeria
Sales Alger Réducom Tel. +213 21 8222-84
16, rue des Frères Zaghnoun Fax +213 21 8222-84
Bellevue El-Harrach reducom_sew@yahoo.fr
16200 Alger
Argentina
Assembly Buenos Aires SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A. Tel. +54 3327 4572-84
Sales Centro Industrial Garin, Lote 35 Fax +54 3327 4572-21
Service Ruta Panamericana Km 37,5 sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
1619 Garin http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Australia
Assembly Melbourne SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 3 9933-1000
Sales 27 Beverage Drive Fax +61 3 9933-1003
Service Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 2 9725-9900
9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park Fax +61 2 9725-9905
New South Wales, 2164 enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Austria
Assembly Wien SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0
Sales Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24 Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30
Service A-1230 Wien http://sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Belarus
Sales Minsk SEW-EURODRIVE BY Tel.+375 (17) 298 38 50
RybalkoStr. 26 Fax +375 (17) 29838 50
BY-220033 Minsk sales@sew.by
Belgium
Assembly Brüssel SEW Caron-Vector S.A. Tel. +32 10 231-311
Sales Avenue Eiffel 5 Fax +32 10 231-336
Service B-1300 Wavre http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
info@caron-vector.be
Service Competence Industrial Gears SEW Caron-Vector S.A. Tel. +32 84 219-878
Center Rue de Parc Industriel, 31 Fax +32 84 219-879
BE-6900 Marche-en-Famenne http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
service-wallonie@sew-eurodrive.be
Brazil
Production Sao Paulo SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 11 6489-9133
Sales Avenida Amâncio Gaiolli, 152 - Rodovia Presi- Fax +55 11 6480-3328
Service dente Dutra Km 208 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.br
Guarulhos - 07251-250 - SP sew@sew.com.br
SAT - SEW ATENDE - 0800 7700496
Additional addresses for service in Brazil provided on request!
Bulgaria
Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GmbH Tel. +359 2 9151160
Bogdanovetz Str.1 Fax +359 2 9151166
BG-1606 Sofia bever@fastbg.net
Cameroon
Sales Douala Electro-Services Tel. +237 33 431137
Rue Drouot Akwa Fax +237 33 431137
B.P. 2024
Douala

Address List
12
Canada
Assembly Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 905 791-1553
Sales 210 Walker Drive Fax +1 905 791-2999
Service Bramalea, Ontario L6T3W1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
marketing@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 604 946-5535
7188 Honeyman Street Fax +1 604 946-2513
Delta. B.C. V4G 1 E2 marketing@sew-eurodrive.ca
Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 514 367-1124
2555 Rue Leger Fax +1 514 367-3677
LaSalle, Quebec H8N 2V9 marketing@sew-eurodrive.ca
Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request!
Chile
Assembly Santiago de Chile SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA. Tel. +56 2 75770-00
Sales Las Encinas 1295 Fax +56 2 75770-01
Service Parque Industrial Valle Grande http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl
LAMPA ventas@sew-eurodrive.cl
RCH-Santiago de Chile
P.O. Box
Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile
China
Production Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 22 25322612
Assembly No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA Fax +86 22 25322611
Sales Tianjin 300457 info@sew-eurodrive.cn
Service http://www.sew-eurodrive.cn
Assembly Suzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 512 62581781
Sales 333, Suhong Middle Road Fax +86 512 62581783
Service Suzhou Industrial Park suzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Jiangsu Province, 215021
Guangzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 20 82267890
No. 9, JunDa Road Fax +86 20 82267891
East Section of GETDD guangzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Guangzhou 510530
Shenyang SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 24 25382538
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 24 25382580
Shenyang Economic Technological Develop- shenyang@sew-eurodrive.cn
ment Area
Shenyang, 110141
Wuhan SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 27 84478398
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 27 84478388
No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA
430056 Wuhan
Additional addresses for service in China provided on request!
Colombia
Assembly Bogotá SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Tel. +57 1 54750-50
Sales Calle 22 No. 132-60 Fax +57 1 54750-44
Service Bodega 6, Manzana B http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co
Santafé de Bogotá sewcol@sew-eurodrive.com.co
Croatia
Sales Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. Tel. +385 1 4613-158
Service PIT Erdödy 4 II Fax +385 1 4613-158
HR 10 000 Zagreb kompeks@inet.hr

Address List
12
Czech Republic
Sales Praha SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O. Tel. +420 255 709 601
Business Centrum Praha Fax +420 220 121 237
Lužná 591 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
CZ-16000 Praha 6 - Vokovice sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Denmark
Assembly Kopenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. +45 43 9585-00
Sales Geminivej 28-30 Fax +45 43 9585-09
Service DK-2670 Greve http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Egypt
Sales Cairo Copam Egypt Tel. +20 2 22566-299 + 1 23143088
Service for Engineering & Agencies Fax +20 2 22594-757
33 EI Hegaz ST, Heliopolis, Cairo http://www.copam-egypt.com/
copam@datum.com.eg
Estonia
Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Tel. +372 6593230
Reti tee 4 Fax +372 6593231
EE-75301 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa veiko.soots@alas-kuul.ee
Finland
Assembly Lahti SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Sales Vesimäentie 4 Fax +358 3 780-6211
Service FIN-15860 Hollola 2 sew@sew.fi
http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
Production Karkkila SEW Industrial Gears OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Assembly Valurinkatu 6 Fax +358 201 589-310
Service FIN-03600 Karkkila sew@sew.fi
http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
Gabon
Sales Libreville Electro-Services Tel. +241 7340-11
B.P. 1889 Fax +241 7340-12
Libreville
Great Britain
Assembly Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. +44 1924 893-855
Sales Beckbridge Industrial Estate Fax +44 1924 893-702
Service P.O. Box No.1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Greece
Sales Athen Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34
Service 12, Mavromichali Street Fax +30 2 1042 251-59
P.O. Box 80136, GR-18545 Piraeus http://www.boznos.gr
info@boznos.gr
Hong Kong
Assembly Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Tel. +852 36902200
Sales Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Fax +852 36902211
Service Hong Leong Industrial Complex contact@sew-eurodrive.hk
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong

Address List
12
Hungary
Sales Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. Tel. +36 1 437 06-58
Service H-1037 Budapest Fax +36 1 437 06-50
Kunigunda u. 18 office@sew-eurodrive.hu
India
Assembly Vadodara SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 265 2831086
Sales Plot No. 4, GIDC Fax +91 265 2831087
Service POR Ramangamdi • Vadodara - 391 243 http://www.seweurodriveindia.com
Gujarat sales@seweurodriveindia.com
subodh.ladwa@seweurodriveindia.com
Ireland
Sales Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. Tel. +353 1 830-6277
Service 48 Moyle Road Fax +353 1 830-6458
Dublin Industrial Estate info@alperton.ie
Glasnevin, Dublin 11 http://www.alperton.ie
Israel
Sales Tel-Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd. Tel. +972 3 5599511
Ahofer Str 34B / 228 Fax +972 3 5599512
58858 Holon http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il
office@liraz-handasa.co.il
Italy
Assembly Milano SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. +39 02 96 9801
Sales Via Bernini,14 Fax +39 02 96 799781
Service I-20020 Solaro (Milano) http://www.sew-eurodrive.it
sewit@sew-eurodrive.it
Ivory Coast
Sales Abidjan SICA Tel. +225 2579-44
Ste industrielle et commerciale pour l'Afrique Fax +225 2584-36
165, Bld de Marseille
B.P. 2323, Abidjan 08
Japan
Assembly Iwata SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD Tel. +81 538 373811
Sales 250-1, Shimoman-no, Fax +81 538 373814
Service Iwata http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Shizuoka 438-0818 sewjapan@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Korea
Assembly Ansan-City SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 31 492-8051
Sales B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate Fax +82 31 492-8056
Service 1048-4, Shingil-Dong http://www.sew-korea.co.kr
Ansan 425-120 master@sew-korea.co.kr
Busan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA Co., Ltd. Tel. +82 51 832-0204
No. 1720 - 11, Songjeong - dong Fax +82 51 832-0230
Gangseo-ku master@sew-korea.co.kr
Busan 618-270
Latvia
Sales Riga SIA Alas-Kuul Tel. +371 7139253
Katlakalna 11C Fax +371 7139386
LV-1073 Riga http://www.alas-kuul.com
info@alas-kuul.com

Address List
12
Lebanon
Sales Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl Tel. +961 1 4947-86
B. P. 80484 +961 1 4982-72
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut +961 3 2745-39
Fax +961 1 4949-71
gacar@beirut.com
Lithuania
Sales Alytus UAB Irseva Tel. +370 315 79204
Naujoji 19 Fax +370 315 56175
LT-62175 Alytus info@irseva.lt
http://www.sew-eurodrive.lt
Luxembourg
Assembly Brüssel CARON-VECTOR S.A. Tel. +32 10 231-311
Sales Avenue Eiffel 5 Fax +32 10 231-336
Service B-1300 Wavre http://www.sew-eurodrive.lu
info@caron-vector.be
Malaysia
Assembly Johore SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD Tel. +60 7 3549409
Sales No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya Fax +60 7 3541404
Service 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor sales@sew-eurodrive.com.my
West Malaysia
Mexico
Assembly Queretaro SEW-EURODRIVE MEXIKO SA DE CV Tel. +52 442 1030-300
Sales SEM-981118-M93 Fax +52 442 1030-301
Service Tequisquiapan No. 102 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
Parque Industrial Queretaro scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
C.P. 76220
Queretaro, Mexico
Morocco
Sales Casablanca Afit Tel. +212 22618372
5, rue Emir Abdelkader Fax +212 22618351
MA 20300 Casablanca ali.alami@premium.net.ma
Netherlands
Assembly Rotterdam VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V. Tel. +31 10 4463-700
Sales Industrieweg 175 Fax +31 10 4155-552
Service NL-3044 AS Rotterdam http://www.vector.nu
Postbus 10085 info@vector.nu
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam
New Zealand
Assembly Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 9 2745627
Sales P.O. Box 58-428 Fax +64 9 2740165
Service 82 Greenmount drive http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz
East Tamaki Auckland sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 3 384-6251
10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead Fax +64 3 384-6455
Christchurch sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Norway
Assembly Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Sales Solgaard skog 71 Fax +47 69 24 10 40
Service N-1599 Moss http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no

Address List
12
Peru
Assembly Lima SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES Tel. +51 1 3495280
Sales S.A.C. Fax +51 1 3493002
Service Los Calderos, 120-124 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima sewperu@sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Poland
Assembly Lodz SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. +48 42 67710-90
Sales ul. Techniczna 5 Fax +48 42 67710-99
Service PL-92-518 £ódŸ http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
24 Hour Service Tel. +48 602 739 739
(+48 602 SEW SEW)
sewis@sew-eurodrive.pl
Portugal
Assembly Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Tel. +351 231 20 9670
Sales Apartado 15 Fax +351 231 20 3685
Service P-3050-901 Mealhada http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Romania
Sales Bucureºti Sialco Trading SRL Tel. +40 21 230-1328
Service str. Madrid nr.4 Fax +40 21 230-7170
011785 Bucuresti sialco@sialco.ro
Russia
Assembly St. Petersburg ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. +7 812 3332522 +7 812 5357142
Sales P.O. Box 36 Fax +7 812 3332523
Service 195220 St. Petersburg Russia http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
Senegal
Sales Dakar SENEMECA Tel. +221 338 494 770
Mécanique Générale Fax +221 338 494 771
Km 8, Route de Rufisque senemeca@sentoo.sn
B.P. 3251, Dakar
Serbia
Sales Beograd DIPAR d.o.o. Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288
Ustanicka 128a 0393
PC Košum, IV floor Fax +381 11 347 1337
SCG-11000 Beograd office@dipar.co.yu
Singapore
Assembly Singapore SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. Tel. +65 68621701
Sales No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Fax +65 68612827
Service Jurong Industrial Estate http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg
Singapore 638644 sewsingapore@sew-eurodrive.com
Slovakia
Sales Bratislava SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 2 33595 202
Rybnièná 40 Fax +421 2 33595 200
SK-831 06 Bratislava sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk
Žilina SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 41 700 2513
Industry Park – PChZ Fax +421 41 700 2514
ulica M.R.Štefánika 71 sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
SK-010 01 Žilina

Address List
12
Slovakia
Banská Bystrica SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 48 414 6564
Rudlovská cesta 85 Fax +421 48 414 6566
SK-974 11 Banská Bystrica sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Košice SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 55 671 2245
Slovenská ulica 26 Fax +421 55 671 2254
SK-040 01 Košice sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Slovenia
Sales Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. Tel. +386 3 490 83-20
Service UI. XIV. divizije 14 Fax +386 3 490 83-21
SLO - 3000 Celje pakman@siol.net
South Africa
Assembly Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 11 248-7000
Sales Eurodrive House Fax +27 11 494-3104
Service Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads http://www.sew.co.za
Aeroton Ext. 2 info@sew.co.za
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Cape Town SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 21 552-9820
Rainbow Park Fax +27 21 552-9830
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Telex 576 062
Montague Gardens jhainsworth@sew.co.za
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Cape Town
Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 31 700-3451
2 Monaceo Place Fax +27 31 700-3847
Pinetown hengela@sew.co.za
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Spain
Assembly Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Tel. +34 94 43184-70
Sales Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 Fax +34 94 43184-71
Service E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) http://www.sew-eurodrive.es
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Sweden
Assembly Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. +46 36 3442 00
Sales Gnejsvägen 6-8 Fax +46 36 3442 80
Service S-55303 Jönköping http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
Box 3100 S-55003 Jönköping info@sew-eurodrive.se
Switzerland
Assembly Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Tel. +41 61 417 1717
Sales Jurastrasse 10 Fax +41 61 417 1700
Service CH-4142 Münchenstein bei Basel http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Thailand
Assembly Chonburi SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. +66 38 454281
Sales 700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh Fax +66 38 454288
Service Muang sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.com
Chonburi 20000

Address List
12
Tunisia
Sales Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service Tel. +216 71 4340-64 + 71 4320-29
5, Rue El Houdaibiah Fax +216 71 4329-76
1000 Tunis tms@tms.com.tn
Turkey
Assembly Istanbul SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. +90 216 4419164, 3838014,
Sales Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti. 3738015
Service Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3 Fax +90 216 3055867
TR-34846 Maltepe ISTANBUL http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr
sew@sew-eurodrive.com.tr
Ukraine
Sales Dnepropetrovsk SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. +380 56 370 3211
Service Str. Rabochaja 23-B, Office 409 Fax +380 56 372 2078
49008 Dnepropetrovsk http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua
sew@sew-eurodrive.ua
USA
Production Southeast Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 864 439-7537
Assembly 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830
Sales P.O. Box 518 Fax Manufacturing +1 864 439-9948
Service Lyman, S.C. 29365 Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566
Cooporate Offices Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly Northeast Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 856 467-2277
Sales Pureland Ind. Complex Fax +1 856 845-3179
Service 2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Midwest Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 937 335-0036
2001 West Main Street Fax +1 937 440-3799
Troy, Ohio 45373 cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Southwest SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 214 330-4824
Region 3950 Platinum Way Fax +1 214 330-4724
Dallas, Texas 75237 csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Western Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 510 487-3560
30599 San Antonio St. Fax +1 510 487-6433
Hayward, CA 94544 cshayward@seweurodrive.com
Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request!
Venezuela
Assembly Valencia SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A. Tel. +58 241 832-9804
Sales Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319 Fax +58 241 838-6275
Service Zona Industrial Municipal Norte http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ve
Valencia, Estado Carabobo ventas@sew-eurodrive.com.ve
sewfinanzas@cantv.net

Index
Index
A Binary output DO01 P620 ........................................................ 102

AC brakemotors, connection.....................................................124 Binary output DO02 P052 .......................................................... 87
Active current P005.....................................................................86 Binary output DO02 P621 ........................................................ 102
Actual value description PI1 P873 ............................................111 Binary output DO03 P053 .......................................................... 87
Actual value description PI2 P874 ............................................111 Binary output DO03 P622 ........................................................ 102
Actual value description PI3 P875 ............................................111 Binary outputs ............................................................ 87, 102, 161
Addition FBG setpoint generator P121 .......................................94 Binary outputs DO01 ... DO03 P059 .......................................... 87
Addressing ......................................................................79, 80, 82 Boost .......................................................................................... 98
AI1 characteristic curve x1 P116 ................................................93 Boost 1 P321.............................................................................. 98
AI1 characteristic curve x2 P118 ................................................93 Boost 2 P331.............................................................................. 98
AI1 characteristic curve y1 P117 ................................................93 Brake activation........................................................................ 125
AI1 characteristic curve y2 P119 ................................................93 Brake application time 1 P732.................................................. 106
AI1 Operating mode P112 ..........................................................92 Brake application time 2 P735.................................................. 106
AI1 Scaling (setpoints for analog input) ......................................92 Brake operation ........................................................................ 109
AI2 Characteristic curve x1 P126................................................95 Brake parameters..................................................................... 125
AI2 Characteristic curve x2 P128................................................95 Brake rectifier ........................................................................... 125
AI2 Characteristic curve y1 P127................................................95 Brake rectifier, connection........................................................ 178
AI2 Characteristic curve y2 P129................................................95 Brake release time 1 P731 ....................................................... 106
AI2 Operating mode P120 ..........................................................94 Brake release time 2 P734 ....................................................... 106
Ambient temperature ..................................................................18 Braking resistor BW, connection .............................................. 177
Analog input AI1..........................................................................92 Braking resistors
Analog input AI1 P020 ................................................................87 Flat design........................................................................... 122
Analog input AI2 P021 ................................................................87 Grid resistor......................................................................... 122
Analog input AI2 (setpoint potentiometer)...................................94 PTC ..................................................................................... 121
Analog module FIO11B.....................................................179, 183 Wire resistor ........................................................................ 122
Braking resistor, connection ..................................................... 160
Analog outputs AO1..................................................................102
Braking resistor, flat design ........................................................ 52
Analog setpoint specification ....................................................204
Braking resistor, grid resistor...................................................... 53
Analog setpoints .........................................................................87
Braking resistor, project planning ............................................. 120
AO1 Analog output P640 ..........................................................103
Braking resistor, PTC ................................................................. 51
AO1 Characteristic curve x1 P646............................................103
Braking resistor, wire resistor ..................................................... 53
AO1 Characteristic curve x2 P648............................................103
Bus diagnostics .......................................................................... 88
AO1 Characteristic curve y1 P647............................................103
Bus termination .............................................................. 76, 78, 81
AO1 Characteristic curve y2 P649............................................103
BW braking resistor .................................................................... 51
AO1 Operating mode P642.......................................................103
BW braking resistors, dimensions .............................................. 56
AO1 Reference P641................................................................103
Application examples ................................................................146
Applications...............................................................................114 C
Automatic adjustment .................................................................98
Cable cross sections ................................................................ 159
Automatic adjustment 1 P320 .....................................................98
cable cross-sections................................................................. 127
Automatic adjustment 2 P330 .....................................................98
Cable length ............................................................................. 130
Auxiliary voltage output...............................................................20
Cable lengths ........................................................................... 160
Cable length, RS-485 ............................................................... 183
B Cable specification, SBus......................................................... 180
CANopen address P886........................................................... 111
Baud rate ......................................................76, 77, 79, 80, 81, 82
CE-marking ................................................................................ 17
Bending space ..........................................................................127
Changing parameters, FBG11B keypad .................................. 190
Bimetallic switch TH..................................................................177
Churning losses........................................................................ 116
Binary input DI00 P030 ...............................................................87
class B limit .............................................................................. 161
Binary input DI00 P608 .............................................................101
Climate class .............................................................................. 18
Binary input DI01 P031 ...............................................................87
Cold plate ................................................................................. 174
Binary input DI02 P032 ...............................................................87
Communication interface FSC11B ........................................... 179
Binary input DI02 P601 .............................................................101
Connection braking resistor...................................................... 160
Binary input DI03 P033 ...............................................................87
Connection technology................................. 76, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82
Binary input DI03 P602 .............................................................101
Connector
Binary input DI04 P034 ...............................................................87
X31 binary inputs and outputs............................................... 84
Binary input DI04 P603 .............................................................101
Contactor.................................................................................. 159
Binary input DI05 P035 ...............................................................87
Control card type DHP11B
Binary input DI05 P604 .............................................................101
LEDs...................................................................................... 84
Binary inputs .........................................................20, 87, 101, 161
Control functions ...................................................................... 104
Binary inputs DI00 ... DI05 P039.................................................87
Control signal source P101 ........................................................ 90
Binary output...............................................................................20
Control signals, interrelation..................................................... 142
Binary output DO01 P051 ...........................................................87

Index
Controller parameters .................................................................96 External voltage supply DC 24 V.............................................. 139

Cooling type ................................................................................18
Copy DBG -> MOVITRAC® B P806 .........................................108
Copy MOVITRAC® B -> DBG P807 .........................................108 F
Core cross section ....................................................................127 Factory setting.......................................................................... 108
CSA.............................................................................................17 Factory setting P802 ................................................................ 108
cUL..............................................................................................17 Fault
Current limit 1 P303 ....................................................................98 F01 Overcurrent .................................................................. 230
Current limit 2 P313 ....................................................................98 F03 Ground fault ................................................................. 230
Current parameter set P013 .......................................................87 F04 Brake chopper.............................................................. 230
Current reference value P430.....................................................99 F06 Mains phase failure ...................................................... 230
F07 DC link overvoltage ...................................................... 230
F08 Speed monitoring ......................................................... 230
D F09 Startup error ................................................................. 230
Data backup..............................................................................219 F10 ILLOP ........................................................................... 231
DBG60B...............................................................................219 F11 Overtemperature .......................................................... 231
F113 Wire breakage analog input ....................................... 233
FBG11B ...............................................................................219
F17 ... F24 System error ..................................................... 231
MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio...............................................220
UBP11A ...............................................................................219 F25 EEPROM...................................................................... 231
F26 External terminal .......................................................... 231
DBG60B......................................................................................44
F31 TF sensor tripped ......................................................... 231
DBG60B keypad .........................................................................44
F32 Index overflow .............................................................. 231
Setting parameters ..............................................................201
F34 Ramp timeout............................................................... 231
Startup .................................................................................195
F36 Option missing ............................................................. 231
DBG60B, displays.....................................................................223
F37 Wachtdog timer ............................................................ 231
DBG60B, manual operation ......................................................201
F38 System software........................................................... 231
DC link voltage P008 ..................................................................86
F43 RS-485 timeout ............................................................ 231
Deactiving EMC capacitors.......................................................174 F44 Unit utilization............................................................... 232
Degree of protection ...................................................................18 F45 Initialization .................................................................. 232
Degree of protection, braking resistors .......................................52 F47 System bus 1 timeout................................................... 232
Delay time P402..........................................................................99 F77 Control word................................................................. 232
Delay time P432..........................................................................99 F81 Start condition .............................................................. 232
Delay time P441........................................................................100 F82 Open output ................................................................. 232
Delay time 1 P501.....................................................................100 F84 UL motor protection...................................................... 232
Delay time 2 P503.....................................................................100 F94 EEPROM checksum .................................................... 232
DeviceNet DFD11B.....................................................................77 F97 Copy error .................................................................... 232
DFD11B DeviceNet.....................................................................77 Fault list .................................................................................... 230
DFE24B EtherCat .......................................................................78 Fault memory ..................................................................... 88, 228
DFE32B PROFINET .......................................................79, 80, 82 Fault responses........................................................................ 109
DFP21B PROFIBUS .............................................................76, 81 Fault status P012 ....................................................................... 87
Direction of rotation...................................................................192 Fault t-0 ... t-4 P080 ... P084 ...................................................... 88
Direction of rotation FBG manual operation P122 ......................94 Fault, FBG11B keypad ............................................................. 190
Display values.............................................................................86 FBG11B...................................................................................... 41
DP configuration ...................................................................76, 81 FBG11B keypad ................................................................. 41, 188
DP ident number ...................................................................76, 81 Functions............................................................................. 188
Dynamic applications ................................................................116 Operation............................................................................. 189
Startup................................................................................. 193
Fieldbus connection ................................................................... 73
E Fieldbus gateways...................................................................... 73
Earth-leakage circuit breaker ....................................................162 Fieldbus interface
Earth-leakage monitor.......................................................125, 159 DeviceNet DFD11B ............................................................... 77
Electromagnetic compatibility EMC ..........................................133 EtherCat DFE24B.................................................................. 78
Electronics cables .....................................................................139 PROFIBUS DFP21B ....................................................... 76, 81
Electronics service ....................................................................233 PROFINET DFE32B.................................................. 79, 80, 82
Electronics shield clamps..........................................................170 Fieldbus parameter setting....................................................... 110
Electronics data ..........................................................................20 FIO11B ....................................................................................... 43
EMC ..........................................................................................133 FIO11B analog module .............................................. 43, 179, 183
EMC limits.................................................................................161 Firmware basic unit P076........................................................... 87
EMC-compliant installation .......................................................159 Firmware DBG P077 .................................................................. 87
EMC-module FKE .......................................................................68 Fixed setpoints ................................................................... 96, 206
Energy-saving function P770 ....................................................108 FI1 characteristic curve x1 P106 ................................................ 91
Enter (FBG11B keypad)............................................................188 FI1 characteristic curve x2 P108 ................................................ 91
EtherCat DFE24B .......................................................................78 FI1 characteristic curve y1 P107 ................................................ 91
Extended storage......................................................................234 FI1 characteristic curve y2 P109 ................................................ 91
External setpoint potentiometer ................................................146 FI1 reference P103..................................................................... 91
External setpoint selection ........................................................192 FKE EMC-module .............................................................. 68, 166
External voltage supply...............................................................20 Flat design................................................................................ 122

Index
Flat-design braking resistor.........................................................52 K

Flat-design resistor, submounting...............................................59 Keypad
Flat-design resistor, support rail mounting..................................60 Status of binary inputs/outputs ............................................ 221
Foldable ferrites ULF ................................................................164 Keypad DBG60B
Folding ferrites ULF11A ..............................................................65 Setting parameters .............................................................. 201
Frequency input FI1 characteristic curve ....................................91 Startup................................................................................. 195
Frequency P002..........................................................................86 Keypad FBG11B ...................................................................... 188
Frequency scaling P102 .............................................................90 Functions............................................................................. 188
Front option FBG11B keypad .....................................................41 Operation............................................................................. 189
Front option FIO11B analog module...........................................43 Startup................................................................................. 193
Front option FSC11B communication .........................................42 Keypad, status displays............................................................ 221
FSC11B ......................................................................................42
FSC11B communication interface ......................................42, 179
Fusing .......................................................................................127 L
Language DBG60B P801......................................................... 108
Leakage current ......................................................................... 18
G Leakage currents...................................................................... 135
GOST-R ......................................................................................17 LEDs........................................................................................... 84
Grid resistor ..............................................................................122 LED, flash codes ...................................................................... 222
Grid resistor, braking resistor......................................................53 Limit class................................................................................. 161
Group drive .......................................................................132, 195 Limit value class ....................................................................... 134
GSD file.................................................................................76, 81 Limits .......................................................................................... 97
Line choke ................................................................................ 163
Line chokes .............................................................................. 133
H Line filters ................................................................................. 161
HD output choke .................................................................65, 165 Line length, SBus ..................................................................... 182
Heat sink temperature...............................................................118 Line protection.................................................................. 127, 162
Heat sink temperature P014 .......................................................87 Lock RUN/STOP keys P760 .................................................... 107
HF output filter ............................................................69, 136, 164 Loose items .............................................................................. 169
Hoists ........................................................................................114 Low output frequencies ............................................................ 119
Hysteresis P401..........................................................................99
Hysteresis P431..........................................................................99
Hysteresis P440........................................................................100 M
Mains connection ..................................................................... 125
Manual operation...................................................................... 107
I Manual operation with FBG11B keypad................................... 191
I-component P252.......................................................................97 Manual operation, DBG60B ..................................................... 201
Ident number.........................................................................76, 81 Manual reset P840 ................................................................... 109
Immediate stop/fault............................................................91, 109 Manual speed control module .................................................. 191
Immediate switch-off .................................................................228 Maximum speed 1 P302............................................................. 97
IN UL monitoring 1 P345.............................................................98 Maximum speed 2 P312............................................................. 97
IN UL monitoring 2 P346.............................................................98 MBG11A..................................................................................... 48
Input contactor ..........................................................................126 MBG11A setpoint control module............................................... 48
Input fuses ................................................................................126 MBG11A speed control module ....................................... 184, 202
Installation altitude ......................................................................19 Minimum clearance .................................................................. 158
Installation notes .......................................................................157 Minimum speed 1 P301.............................................................. 97
Interference emission........................................................134, 161 Minimum speed 2 P311.............................................................. 97
Interference immunity .........................................................18, 134 Modulation................................................................................ 110
Interference emission..................................................................18 Monitoring functions ................................................................. 100
Internal fixed setpoint n11 P160 .................................................96 Motor adjustment........................................................................ 98
Internal setpoint n12 P161 ..........................................................96 Motor cable length.................................................................... 130
Internal setpoint n13 P162 ..........................................................96 Motor cable, voltage drop......................................................... 131
Internal setpoint n21 P170 ..........................................................96 Motor connection.............................................................. 124, 125
Internal setpoint n22 P171 ..........................................................96 Motor lead ................................................................................ 159
Internal setpoint n23 P172 ..........................................................96 Motor parameters ....................................................................... 97
Interrelation between control signals ........................................142 Motor potentiometer ................................................................... 96
Inverter status P010....................................................................87 Motor selection ......................................................................... 116
Inverter/motor combinations .....................................................117 Motor, starting .......................................................................... 204
IT system ..................................................................................125 Mounting position ..................................................................... 158
IT systems.................................................................135, 159, 174 MOVI-PLC® ............................................................................... 83
IxR adjustment ............................................................................98 MOVI-PLC® controller................................................................ 83
IxR adjustment 1 P322................................................................98 MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio, startup ...................................... 202
IxR adjustment 2 P332................................................................98 Multi-motor drive............................................................... 132, 195

Index
N Unit functions/Serial communication ................................... 109

Nameplate.................................................................................156 Unit functions/setup............................................................. 108
ND line choke......................................................................61, 163 Parameter-setting data......................................................... 76, 81
NF line filter.........................................................................63, 163 Parametes
Unit functions/brake operation............................................. 109
Parametesr
O Terminal assignment/binary outputs ................................... 102
Oil aging / overtemperature P544 .............................................101 PC startup ................................................................................ 202
Oil aging / ready signal P545 ....................................................101 PE mains connection................................................................ 162
Operating mode ..........................................................................18 Peak braking power.................................................................. 120
Operating mode 1 P700............................................................105 Permitted voltage supply system.............................................. 125
Operating mode 2 P701............................................................105 P-gain P251................................................................................ 97
Operating modes ......................................................................104 PI actual value mode (controller parameters PI controller) ........ 97
Operating states, priority...........................................................142 PI actual value reference P450 ................................................ 100
Operating status P011 ................................................................87 PI actual value scaling (controller parameters PI controller) ...... 97
out (FBG11B keypad) ...............................................................188 PI actual value threshold .......................................................... 145
Output current P004....................................................................86 PI controller ........................................................................ 96, 143
Output current P009....................................................................87 PI controller n11 P163................................................................ 96
Output frequency, load capacity ...............................................119 PI controller n12 P164................................................................ 96
Overload capacity .....................................................................118 PI controller n13 P165................................................................ 96
Overvoltage category..................................................................18 PI controller n21 P173................................................................ 96
PI controller n22 P174................................................................ 96
PI controller n23 P175................................................................ 96
P PI controller P250....................................................................... 97
Parameter list............................................................................208 PI controller reference signal.................................................... 100
Parameter lock P803 ................................................................108 PI 1 Actual value P097 ............................................................... 88
Parameter module UBP11A........................................................47 PI 2 Actual value P098 ............................................................... 88
Parameter set .............................................................................87 PI 3 Actual value P099 ............................................................... 88
Parameter set switchover .........................................................141 PI-controller
Parameters PI actual value threshold ..................................................... 145
Control functions ..................................................................104 PO data enable P876 ............................................................... 111
Control functions / speed monitoring ...................................100 PO 1 Setpoint P094.................................................................... 88
Control functions/manual operation .....................................107 PO 2 Setpoint P095.................................................................... 88
Control functions/operating modes ......................................104 PO 3 Setpoint P096.................................................................... 88
Controller parameters ............................................................96 Pollution class ............................................................................ 18
Controller parameters/PI controller ........................................96 Power shield clamps ................................................................ 170
Display values........................................................................86 Premagnetization time................................................................ 98
Display values/analog setpoints ............................................87 Premagnetization time 1 P323 ................................................... 98
Display values/binary inputs ..................................................87 Premagnetization time 2 P333 ................................................... 98
Display values/binary outputs ................................................87 pressure control........................................................................ 143
Display values/bus diagnostics ..............................................88 Priority of operating states........................................................ 142
Display values/fault memory ..................................................88 Process input data words ......................................................... 111
Display values/process values...............................................86 Process output data words....................................................... 110
Display values/status displays ...............................................87 Process values ........................................................................... 86
Display values/unit data .........................................................87
PROFIBUS DFP21B ............................................................ 76, 81
Monitoring functions.............................................................100
PROFINET DFE32B....................................................... 79, 80, 82
Motor parameters ..................................................................97
Project planning........................................................................ 112
Motor parameters/limits .........................................................97
Protocol options.................................................. 76, 79, 80, 81, 82
Motor parameters/motor adjustment......................................98
Reference signals ..................................................................99 Protocol SBus P880 ................................................................. 111
Reference signals/PI controller reference signal .................100 PTC braking resistor................................................................... 51
Reference signals/speed reference signal.............................99 PTC braking resistors............................................................... 121
Setpoints/ramp generators ....................................................88 PWM fix 1 P862........................................................................ 110
Setpoints/ramp generators/analog input AI1 .........................92 PWM fix 2 P863........................................................................ 110
Setpoints/ramp generators/analog input AI2 .........................94 PWM frequency................................................................ 110, 118
Setpoints/ramp generators/fixed setpoints 1..........................96 PWM frequency 1 P860 ........................................................... 110
Setpoints/ramp generators/motor potentiometer ...................96 PWM frequency 2 P861 ........................................................... 110
Setpoints/ramp generators/setpoint potentiometer ................94 P0__ Display values................................................................... 86
Setpoints/ramp generators/setpoint selection........................88 P110 AI1 Scaling (setpoints for analog input) ............................ 92
Setpoints/ramp generators/speed ramps...............................95 P113 Setpoint voltage offset (setpoints for analog input)........... 93
Terminal assignment ...........................................................101 P152 Save last setpoint.............................................................. 96
Terminal assignment/binary inputs ......................................101 P253 PI actual value mode (controller parameters PI controller)97
Unit functions .......................................................................108 P254 PI actual value scaling
Unit functions/fault responses..............................................109 (controller parameters PI controller) ........................................ 97
Unit functions/fieldbus parameter setting.............................110 P255 PI actual value scaling
Unit functions/modulation ....................................................110 (controller parameters PI controller) ........................................ 97
Unit functions/reset behavior ...............................................109

Index
P300 Start/stop speed 1 .............................................................97 Setpoint reference speed P104.................................................. 91

Setpoint selection ....................................................................... 88
Setpoint selection, external ...................................................... 192
R Setpoint source P100 ................................................................. 88
Ramp t11 down P131 .................................................................95 Setpoint specification, analog................................................... 204
Ramp t11 up P130 ......................................................................95 Setpoint speed ......................................................................... 192
Ramp t21 down P141 .................................................................95 Setpoint stop function 1 P720 .................................................. 106
Ramp t21 up P140 ......................................................................95 Setpoint stop function 2 P723 .................................................. 106
Ramp t3 motor potentiometer P150............................................96 Setpoint voltage offset (setpoints for analog input) .................... 93
Rated output current P071..........................................................87 Setpoints/ramp generators ......................................................... 88
Reference signals .......................................................................99 Setting parameters with the DBG60B keypad.......................... 201
Relay output................................................................................20 Setup ........................................................................................ 108
Repair service ...........................................................................233 Shield plate for control electronics ........................................... 170
Reset.........................................................................................229 Shield plate for power section .................................................. 170
Basic unit .............................................................................229 Shielding................................................................................... 139
Interface ...............................................................................229 Short menu FBG11B P800....................................................... 108
Keypad.................................................................................229 Signal generation ..................................................................... 139
Reset behavior..........................................................................109 Signal = "1" when P403...................................................... 99, 100
Reset statistics data P804 ........................................................108 Signal = "1" when P433.............................................................. 99
Response to brake wear P549..................................................101 Signal = "1" when P442............................................................ 100
Response to drive vibration / fault P541 ...................................101 Skip width 1 P741..................................................................... 106
Response to drive vibration / warning P540 .............................101 Skip width 2 P743..................................................................... 106
Response to oil aging / fault P543 ............................................101 Skip window center 1 P740 ...................................................... 106
Response to oil aging / warning P542 ......................................101 Skip window center 2 P742 ...................................................... 106
Response to RS-485 timeout P833 ..........................................109 Slave setpoint P750 ................................................................. 107
Response to SBus timeout P836 ..............................................109 Slip compensation ...................................................................... 98
Response to /EXT. FAULT P830 ..............................................109 Slip compensation 1 P324.......................................................... 98
Return code Slip compensation 2 P334.......................................................... 98
19 Parameter lock activated ................................................220 Smallest bending space ........................................................... 127
20 Factory setting in progress .............................................220 Speed control module MBG11A............................................... 184
23 Option card missing ........................................................220 Speed control module MBG11A, startup.................................. 202
27 Option card missing ........................................................220
Speed control module, manual................................................. 191
28 Controller inhibit required................................................220
Speed monitoring ..................................................................... 100
29 Invalid value for parameter .............................................220
Speed monitoring 1 P500......................................................... 100
32 Enable.............................................................................220
Speed monitoring 2 P502......................................................... 100
34 Fault during execution ....................................................220
38 FBG11B incorrect data set .............................................220 Speed P000................................................................................ 86
Return codes.............................................................................220 Speed ramps .............................................................................. 95
RS-485 address ........................................................................109 Speed reference signal .............................................................. 99
RS-485 address P810...............................................................109 Speed reference value P400...................................................... 99
RS-485 group address P811 ....................................................109 Speed-torque characteristic curve............................................ 115
RS-485 remote timeout P812 ...................................................109 Standard applications............................................................... 113
RS-485, installation...................................................................183 Standstill current function 1 P710............................................. 105
RUN (FBG11B keypad) ............................................................188 Standstill current function 2 P711............................................. 105
Start offset 1 P722.................................................................... 106
Start offset 2 P725.................................................................... 106
S Startup
S pattern t12 P135 ......................................................................95 Brief description................................................................... 185
S pattern t22 P145 ......................................................................95 Hoist applications ................................................................ 186
Safety contact .............................................................................21 Notes ................................................................................... 186
Safety Notes .................................................................................7 Preliminary work and resources .......................................... 187
Preliminary work and resources basic unit.......................... 187
SBus address............................................................................111
Preliminary work and resources using keypad.................... 187
SBus address P881 ..................................................................111
Prerequisite ......................................................................... 186
SBus baud rate P884................................................................111
Startup for MBG11A speed control module.............................. 202
SBus group address P882 ........................................................111
Startup with DBG60B keypad................................................... 195
SBus timeout interval P883.......................................................111
Startup with FBG11B keypad ................................................... 193
Scaled speed FBG P853 ..........................................................110
Startup with PC ........................................................................ 202
Scaling slave setpoint P751......................................................107
Start/stop speed 2 P310............................................................. 97
Scope of delivery ......................................................................169
Station address .............................................................. 76, 78, 81
Serial communication................................................................109
Status displays ........................................................................... 87
Set direction of rotation .............................................................192
Keypad ................................................................................ 221
Setpoint description PO1 P870.................................................110
LED, flash codes ................................................................. 222
Setpoint description PO2 P871.................................................110 Status of binary inputs/outputs ............................................ 221
Setpoint description PO3 P872.................................................110 Status display, FBG11B keypad............................................... 190
Setpoint input ..............................................................................20 Stop .......................................................................................... 228
Setpoint potentiometer..........................................................89, 96 Stop ramp t13 up = down P134.................................................. 95

Index
Stop ramp t13 up = down P136 ..................................................95 UL compliant installation .......................................................... 167
Stop ramp t13 up = down P139 ..................................................96 ULF11A folding ferrites............................................................... 65
Stop ramp t23 up = down P144 ..................................................95 Unit data ..................................................................................... 87
Stop ramp t23 up = down P146 ..................................................95 Unit design ............................................................................... 152
Stop ramp t23 up = down P149 ..................................................96 Size 0XS / 0S / 0L ............................................................... 152
Stop setpoint 1 P721.................................................................106 Size 1 / 2S / 2 ...................................................................... 153
Stop setpoint 2 P724.................................................................106 Size 3 .................................................................................. 154
STOP / RESET (FBG11B keypad) ...........................................188 Size 4 / 5 ............................................................................. 155
Stop/fault.............................................................................91, 109 Unit designation........................................................................ 156
Storage temperature ...................................................................18 Unit functions............................................................................ 108
Submounting flat-design resistor ................................................59 Unit information ........................................................................ 228
Supply system contactor...........................................................163 Unit status ................................................................................ 156
Supply system lead...................................................................159 Unit status codes...................................................................... 222
Support rail mounting flat-design resistor ...................................60 Unit type P070............................................................................ 87
Switched-mode power supply UWU52A .....................................85 USB11A...................................................................................... 50
Switch-off response USB11A interface adapter.......................................................... 50
Immediate switch-off ............................................................228 User display P001 ...................................................................... 86
stop ......................................................................................228 UWS11A..................................................................................... 49
Switch-off responses.................................................................228 UWS11A interface adapter......................................................... 49
Switchover parameter set .........................................................141 UWS21B..................................................................................... 50
System overview.........................................................................11 UWS21B interface adapter......................................................... 50
Systembus (SBus), installation .................................................181 UWU52A switched-mode power supply ..................................... 85
T V
Technical data VFC .......................................................................................... 194
AC 230 V / 1-phase / size 0XS ..............................................31 Voltage drop ............................................................................. 131
AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 2 ...................................................38 Voltage drop motor cable ......................................................... 127
AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 3 ...................................................39 Voltage supply system ............................................................. 125
AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 4 ...................................................40 Voltage supply, external DC 24 V ............................................ 139
AC 230 V /1-phase / size 0L ..................................................33 Voltage-frequency characteristic curve .................................... 116
AC 230 V /1-phase / size 0S..................................................32 V/f ............................................................................................. 194
AC 230 V /3-phase / size 0L ..................................................36
AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 0XS ..............................................34
AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 0L ..........................................25 W
AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 0S..........................................24 Warnings, FBG11B keypad...................................................... 190
AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 0XS .......................................23 Wire breakage detection P105 ................................................... 91
AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 2 ............................................27 Wire resistor ............................................................................. 122
AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 2S..........................................26
Wire resistor, braking resistor..................................................... 53
AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 3 ............................................28
Wiring diagram 230 V 3.7 ... 30 kW / 400 V 5.5 ... 75 kW ........ 176
AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 4 ............................................29
AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 5 ............................................30
DFP21B option ................................................................76, 81 X
Technical data, general...............................................................18
XML file ...................................................................................... 78
Technical data, overview ............................................................22
Temperature control..................................................................143
Terminal assignment.................................................................101 0 ... 9
Terminal response times.............................................................21
4-quadrant operation 1 P820.................................................... 109
TF................................................................................................20
4-quadrant operation 2 P821.................................................... 109
TF thermistor.............................................................................177
TH bimetallic switch ..................................................................177
thermal class F..........................................................................116
Thermistor.................................................................................116
Thermistor TF ...........................................................................177
Timeout (warning) .....................................................................229
TN system.................................................................................125
Touch guard..............................................................................172
Touch guard BS ..........................................................................58
Transportation temperature ........................................................18
Trolleys .....................................................................................114
TT system .................................................................................125
U
UBP11A ......................................................................................47
UL approval.................................................................................17

Startup: Brief Description
The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter can be connected directly to a motor of the same
power. Example: A motor with 1.5 kW (2.0 HP) can be connected directly to a
MC07B0015.
Procedure
1. Connect the motor to MOVITRAC® B
3-phase 1-phase
(terminal X2).
PE
2. You have the option of connecting a
braking resistor (terminal X2/X3).

3. The following signal terminals must be
controlled with your control system: Changeover
• Enable DI∅3
REF1
• As required, CW/Stop DI∅1 or CCW/

Reference potential analog signals
Stop DI∅2 GND
• Setpoint:
Fault reset
• Analog input (X10) or / and CW/stop
CCW/stop
• DI∅4 = n11 = 150 rpm or / and Enable/stop*
}
n13 = n11 + n12
• DI∅5 = n12 = 750 rpm or / and
Supply voltage
input/output 24VIO
• DI∅4 + DI∅5 = n13 = 1500 rpm Reference potential binary signals
• For brakemotors:
DO∅2 = Brake control via brake Reference potential
Brake released*
rectifier Ready
Reference potential
4. You have the option of connecting the Relay contact/fault
NOC relay
following signal termianls: NCC relay
• DI∅∅ = Error reset

• DO∅1 = /Malfunction (designed as a
X2 PE
relay contact) X3
• DO∅3 = Ready
Shield clamp
5. Check the controller for the required
functionality. Factory setting
6. Connect the frequency inverter to the

3-phase
power supply system (X1).
Notes
Signal terminal functions and setpoint settings can be modified using the FBG11B key-
pad or a PC. A PC connection requires the FSC11B front option or one of the following
interface adapters: UWS21B / UWS11A / USB11A.
Note
Operate the MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter only in strict observance of the
detailed operating instructions!
Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services
How we’re driving the world
With people who With comprehensive With uncompromising

think fast and With a worldwide With drives and controls knowledge in virtually quality that reduces the
develop the service network that is that automatically every branch of cost and complexity of
future with you. always close at hand. improve your productivity. industry today. daily operations.
SEW-EURODRIVE
Driving the world
With a global presence With innovative With online information

that offers responsive technology that solves and software updates,
and reliable solutions. tomorrow’s problems via the Internet, available
Anywhere. today. around the clock.
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG

P.O. Box 3023 · D-76642 Bruchsal / Germany
Phone +49 7251 75-0 · Fax +49 7251 75-1970
sew@sew-eurodrive.com
www.sew-eurodrive.com

Movitrac B Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Movitrac B Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Movitrac B Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services

Color code system for catalogs

DR gearmotors Synchronous Asynchronous Gear units

DR series AC motors DT/DV/CT/CV series

Explosion-proof Explosion-proof Explosion-proof motors

Control cabinet inverters, control technology and HMI

MOVIDRIVE® MOVITRAC® MOVIAXIS® MOVI-PLC® DOP11B®

MOVIMOT® Decentralized MOVIGEAR®

Industrial gear units

X series horizontal X series vertical

System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 3

4 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B

System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 5

Symbol SIGNAL WORD!

Nature and source of hazard.

Symbol Signal word Meaning Consequences if

WARNING! Possible hazardous situation Severe or fatal injuries

CAUTION! Possible hazardous situation Minor injuries

NOTE Useful information or tip.

1.2 Rights to claim under warranty

1.3 Exclusion of liability

6 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B

2.1 General information

2.2 Target group

2.3 Designated use

System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 7

2.3.1 Safety functions

2.4 Transportation, storage

8 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B

2.6 Electrical connection

2.7 Safe disconnection

System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 9

3 System Description MOVITRAC® B

Compact and economical: MOVITRAC® B – the next frequency inverter generation.

3.1 MOVITRAC® B – compact, versatile and universal

10 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B

3.2 System overview MOVITRAC® B

Line choke ND... Line filter NF...

Output filter HF...

Output choke HD...

Power supply connection Front options Option cards

System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 11

3.3 The units at a glance

12 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B

3.4 Functions / features

3.4.1 Unit properties

System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 13

• Integrated keypad for displaying setpoints and setting parameters

14 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B

3.4.3 Setpoint technology

3.4.4 Optional communication / operation

System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 15

3.5 MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio

16 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B

4.1.2 UL approval / CSA / GOST-R certificate / C-Tick

System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 17

4.2 General technical data

18 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B

MOVITRAC® B All sizes